Hitachi set free inverter driven multi split system heat pump fsn tc2 0811 rev 1 by Education Vietmastec

HITACHI SET-FREE INVERTER-DRIVEN MULTI-SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONERS FSN SERIES SET-FREE FSN SERIES TCII

Indoor Units In-the-Ceiling Type

RPI-1.0FSNQ RPI-1.5FSNQ RPI-2.0FSNQ RPI-2.5FSNQ RPI-1.0FSNQL RPI-1.5FSNQL RPI-1.8FSNQL RPI-2.0FSNQL RPI-2.3FSNQL RPI-1.0FSNQH RPI-1.5FSNQH RPI-1.8FSNQH RPI-2.0FSNQH RPI-2.3FSNQH RPI-2.5FSNQH

RPI-3.0FSNQ RPI-4.0FSNQ RPI-5.0FSNQ

Low Height In-the-Ceiling Type

RPIZ-1.0FSNQ RPIZ-1.5FSNQ

RPIZ-2.0FSNQ RPIZ-2.5FSNQ

4-Way Cassette Type

RCI-1.0FSNQ RCI-1.5FSNQ RCI-1.8FSNQ RCI-2.0FSNQ RCI-2.3FSNQ

RCI-2.5FSNQ RCI-3.0FSNQ RCI-4.0FSNQ RCI-5.0FSNQ RCI-6.0FSNQ

2-Way Cassette Type

RCD-1.0FSN RCD-1.5FSN RCD-2.0FSN RCD-2.5FSN RPC-2.0FSN RPC-2.5FSN RPC-3.0FSN RPK-0.8FSNSM1 RPK-1.0FSNSM1 RPK-1.5FSNSM1 RPK-2.0FSNSM

RCD-3.0FSN RCD-4.0FSN RCD-5.0FSN

Floor-standing Type

RPF-1.0FSNE

RPF-1.5FSNE

Floor-concealed Type

RPFI-1.0FSNE

RPFI-1.5FSNE

RAS-8FSNQ RAS-10FSNQ RAS-12FSNQ RAS-14FSNQ RAS-16FSNQ RAS-18FSNQ RAS-20FSNQ

RAS-22FSNQ RAS-24FSNQ RAS-26FSNQ RAS-28FSNQ RAS-30FSNQ RAS-32FSNQ

In-the-Ceiling Type (Low Static Pressure)

In-the-Ceiling Type (High Static Pressure)

Ceiling Type Wall Type

RPI-2.5FSNQL RPI-3.0FSNQL RPI-4.0FSNQL RPI-5.0FSNQL RPI-6.0FSNQL RPI-3.0FSNQH RPI-4.0FSNQH RPI-5.0FSNQH RPI-6.0FSNQH RPI-8FSNQ RPI-10FSNQ

RPC-4.0FSN RPC-5.0FSN

Technical Catalog II

- Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions-

FLEXIBLE

RPK-2.5FSNSM RPK-3.0FSNSM RPK-3.5FSNSM RPK-4.0FSNSM

Outdoor Units

Catalog No. SFN TCII-0811 Rev.1

SFN TCII-0811 Rev.1

URL : http://www.hitachiacs.co.jp

FSN Series

System Equipment

Total Heat Exchangers KPI-2521 KPI-5021

CS-NET

KPI-8021 KPI-10021

SFN TCII-0811 Rev.1

IMPORTANT NOTICE HITACHI pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design and performance of products. The right is therefore reserved to vary specifications without notice. HITACHI cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. This heat pump air conditioner is designed for standard air conditioning only. Do not use this heat pump air conditioner for other purposes such as drying clothes, refrigerating foods or for any other cooling or heating process. The installer and system specialist shall secure safety against leakage according to local regulations or standards. The following standards may be applicable, if local regulations are not available. British Standard, BS4434 or Japan Standard, KHKS0010. No part of this manual may be reproduced without written permission. The following words (DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION) are used to identify levels of hazard seriousness. Definitions for identifying hazard levels are provided below with their respective signal words.

NOTE

Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.

Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal injury or death.

Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in minor personal injury or product or property damage.

Useful information for operation and/or maintenance.

It is assumed that this heat pump air conditioner will be operated and serviced by English speaking people. If this is not the case, the customer should add safety, caution and operating signs in the native language. If you have any questions, contact your distributor or dealer of HITACHI. This manual gives a common description and information for this heat pump air conditioner which you operate as well as for other models. This heat pump air conditioner has been designed for the following temperatures. Operate the heat pump air conditioner within this range. Temperature

(oC) Maximum 32 DB / 23 WB

Minimum 21 DB / 15 WB

Outdoor Indoor

43 DB 27 DB

-5 DB 15 DB

Outdoor

15 WB

-20 WB

Cooling

Indoor

Operation Heating Operation

DB: Dry Bulb, WB: Wet Bulb

Attention This system has been designed for only cooling or heating operation. Do not apply this system to the rooms where individual cooling and heating operation are required at the same time. If applied, it will result in uncomfortable air conditioning due to big temperature changes when the operation mode is changed.

This manual should be considered as a permanent part of the air conditioning equipment and should remain with the air conditioning equipment. i

SAFETY SUMMARY

Use refrigerant R410A in the refrigerant cycle. Do not charge oxygen, acetylene or other flammable and poisonous gases into the refrigerant cycle when performing a leakage test or an air-tight test. These types of gases are extremely dangerous and can cause an explosion. It is recommended that compressed air, nitrogen or refrigerant be used for these types of tests. Do not pour water into the indoor or outdoor unit. These products are equipped with electrical parts. If poured, it will cause a serious electrical shock. Do not touch or adjust safety devices inside the indoor or outdoor units. If these devices are touched or readjusted, it may cause a serious accident. Do not open the service cover or access panel for the indoor or outdoor units without turning OFF the main power supply. Refrigerant leakage can cause difficulty with breathing due to insufficient air. Turn OFF the main switch, extinguish any naked flames and contact your service contractor, if refrigerant leakage occurs. The installer and system specialist shall secure safety against refrigerant leakage according to local regulations or standards. Use on ELB (Electric Leakage Breaker). In the event of a fault, there is danger of an electric shock or a fire if it is not used. Do not install the outdoor unit where there is a high level of oil mist, flammable gases, salty air or harmful gases such as sulphur.

Do not use any sprays such as insecticide, lacquer, hair spray or other flammable gases within approximately one (1) meter from the system. If circuit breaker or fuse is often activated, stop the system and contact your service contractor. Do not perform installation work, refrigerant piping work, drain piping and electrical wiring connection without referring to our installation manual. If the instructions are not followed, it may result in a water leakage, electric shock or a fire. Check that the ground wire is securely connected. If the unit is not correctly grounded, it lead electric shock. Do not connect the ground wiring to gas piping, water piping, lightning conductor or ground wiring for telephone. Connect a fuse of specified capacity. Do not put any foreign material on the unit or inside the unit. Make sure that the outdoor unit is not covered with snow or ice, before operation. Before performing any brazing work, check to ensure that there is no flammable material around. When using refrigerant be sure to wear leather gloves to prevent cold injuries. Protect the wires, electrical parts, etc. from rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats may gnaw at unprotected parts and which may lead to a fire. Fix the cables securely. External forces on the terminals could lead to a fire.

SAFETY SUMMARY

Do not install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control switch and cable within approximately 3 meters from strong electromagnetic wave radiators such as medical equipment. Supply electrical power to the system to energize the oil heater for 12 hours before start-up after a long shutdown. Do not step or put any material on the product. Provide a strong and correct foundation so that; a. The outdoor unit is not on an incline. b. Abnormal sound does not occur. c. The outdoor unit will not fall down due to a strong wind or earthquake. NOTE: It is recommended that the room be ventilated every 3 to 4 hours. The heating capacity of the heat pump unit is decreased according to the outdoor air temperature. Therefore, it is recommended that auxiliary heating equipment be used in the field when the unit is installed in a low temperature region.

iii

- CONTENTS <Outdoor Unit> Items 1. Safety Summary 2. Structure 2.1 Structure 2.2 Refrigerant Cycle 2.3 Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation 3. Transportation and Handling 3.1 Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit 3.2 Transportation 3.3 Handling of Outdoor Unit 4. Outdoor Unit Installation 4.1 Factory-supplied Accessories 4.2 Initial Check 4.3 Foundation 4.4 Installation Work 5. Refrigerant Piping Work 5.1 Piping Materials 5.2 Piping Connection 5.3 Stop Valve 5.4 Additional Refrigerant Charge Calculation 5.5 Refrigerant Piping Work 5.6 Multi-kit 6. Electrical Wiring 6.1 General Check 6.2 Electrical Wiring Connection 6.3 Dip Switch Setting of Outdoor Unit 7. Test Run 8. Safety and Control Service Setting 9. Common 9.1 Installation Space 9.2 Piping System and Multi-kit 9.3 Electrical Wiring 9.4 Test Run Procedure by Wireless Remote Control Switch (PC-LH3A) 9.5 Test Run from Outdoor Unit Side 9.6 Checking of the Refrigerant Quantity for System

Page 3 3 3 7 13 14 14 15 16 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 21 24 25 26 28 31 31 32 34 39 44 45 45 59 69 74 77 82

- CONTENTS <Indoor Unit> Items 1. Safety Summary 2. Structure 2.1 Structure 2.2 Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation 3. Transportation and Handling 3.1 Transportation 3.2 Handling of Indoor Unit 4. Indoor Unit Installation 4.1 Factory-supplied Accessories 4.2 Initial Check 4.3 Installation 5. Refrigerant Piping Work 5.1 Piping Materials 5.2 Piping Connection 6. Drain Piping 7. Electrical Wiring 7.1 General Check 7.2 Electrical Wiring Connection 8. Test Run 9. Safety and Control Device Setting 10. Common 10.1 Field Minimum Wire Size for Power Source 10.2 Setting of DIP Switches 10.3 Setting the Filter Indication Interval 10.4 Setting of High Speed Tap 11. Installation of Optional Air Panel 11.1 Air Panel for 4-way Cassette Type 11.2 Air Panel for 2-way Cassette Type 12. Installation of Optional Controller 12.1 Remote Control Switch (PC-AR) 12.2 Wireless Remote Control Switch (PC-LH3A) 12.3 Wireless Receiver Kit (PC-ALH,ALHD,ALHP,ALHZ) 12.4 Central Station (PSC-5S) 12.5 7-day Timer (PSC-5T) 13. Total Heat Exchanger 13.1 Safety Summary 13.2 Structure 13.3 Transportation and Handling 13.4 Installation 13.5 Electrical Wiring 13.6 Test Run 13.7 Safety and Control Device Setting RPI: In-the-Ceiling Type Indoor Unit RPIZ: Low Height In-the Ceiling Type Indoor Unit RCI: 4-way Cassette Type Indoor Unit RCD: 2-way Cassette Type Indoor Unit RPK: Wall Type Indoor Unit RPF: Floor Type Indoor Unit RPFI: Floor Concealed Type Indoor Unit RPC: Ceiling Type Indoor Unit

Page RPI

RPIZ

RCI

RCD RPK

89 89 89 91 91 91 91 91 91 93 94 97 97 97 99 100 100 100 102 102

103 103 103 104 105 105 105 105 105 106 106 108 108 109 110 111 111 111 112 112

113 113 113 114 114 114 114 115 115 116 117 119 119 119 120 122 122 123 124 124

125 125 125 126 126 126 126 127 127 128 129 131 131 131 132 134 134 135 136 136 177 177 178 182 183 184 184 187 190 191 203 208 216 233 245 245 245 246 246 250 257 257

137 137 137 140 140 140 140 141 141 142 144 149 149 149 151 152 152 152 154 154

RPF RPC RPFI 155 165 155 165 155 165 156 166 156 166 156 166 156 166 157 167 157 167 158 168 158 169 160 170 160 170 160 170 161 172 162 173 162 174 163 174 164 175 164 175

- CONTENTS <Common>

Items

Page

1. Maintenance 1.1 Regular Inspection 1.2 Filter Cleaning 1.3 Filter and Element Cleaning for Total Heat Exchanger 2. Troubleshooting 2.1 Initial Troubleshooting 2.2 Troubleshooting by Alarm Code 2.3 Troubleshooting in Check Mode 2.4 Troubleshooting by 7-segment Display 2.5 Protection Control Code on 7-segment Display 2.6 Self-Checking of PCB using Remote Control Switch 2.7 Self-Checking of Remote Control Switch 3. Caution on Refrigerant Leakage

261 261 262 264 266 266 266 268 274 281 284 286 288

OUTDOOR UNIT

Page 3 3 3 7 13 14 14 15 16 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 21 24 25 26 28 31 31 32 34 39 44 45 45 59 69 74 77 82

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

2.1

Structure

<RAS-8FSNQ> No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 6 10

13 20

Air Outlet

950

750

19 18

Air Inlet

1745

20 21 22 23 24

23 22

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (1pc.) Heat Exchanger Propeller Fan Fan Motor Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Reversing Valve Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (2pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (2pcs.) Strainer Strainer Check Valve (3pcs.) Crankcase Heater (2pcs.)

12 1

11 16

<RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ> 7

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

25 13

20 9

Air Outlet

9 750

950

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

4 5

Air Inlet

18 15 14

22 2 1

1745

20 21 22 23 24 25

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (1pc.) Heat Exchanger Propeller Fan Fan Motor Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (2pcs.) Reversing Valve Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (2pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (2pcs.) Strainer Strainer Check Valve (3pcs.) Crankcase Heater (2pcs.) Plate Heat Exchanger

21 12 11

<RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ> 6

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 22

10 21

24 20 13 24 20 24 20

Air Outlet

1210

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

750 4 5

1745

17 Air Inlet

20 21 22 23 24 25 26

19 24 14 15 12

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (2pcs.) Heat Exchanger Propeller Fan Fan Motor Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (3pcs.) Reversing Valve Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (2pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (3pcs.) Strainer Strainer Distributor Check Valve (4pcs.) Crankcase Heater (3pcs.) Plate Heat Exchanger

11 25

2 25

<RAS-18FSNQ> 6

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 25 20 13 25 20 25 20

Air Outlet

1910

750 4 5

25 21 18 19 12 11 26

1 26

1744

Air Inlet 17

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (2pcs.) Heat Exchanger (2pcs.) Propeller Fan (2pcs.) Fan Motor (2pcs.) Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (3pcs.) Reversing Valve (2pcs.) Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (3pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (3pcs.) Strainer Strainer Strainer Distributor Check Valve (6pcs.) Crankcase Heater (4pcs.) Plate Heat Exchanger

<RAS-20FSNQ and RAS-22FSNQ> 22

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 13 25 20

25 20 13 25 20 25 20

Air Outlet

1910

750 4 5

Air Inlet 25

1745

21 22 23 24 25 26 27

21 18 19 12 11 26

26 2 16 2 26 23 14

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (3pcs.) Heat Exchanger (2pcs.) Propeller Fan (2pcs.) Fan Motor (2pcs.) Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (3pcs.) Reversing Valve (2pcs.) Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (3pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (4pcs.) Strainer Strainer Strainer Distributor Check Valve (7pcs.) Crankcase Heater (5pcs.) Plate Heat Exchanger

<RAS-24FSNQ and RAS-26FSNQ> 6

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 8

Air Outlet 20

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

2430

750 4 5

11 12

25 2

21 16

1745

18 Air Inlet

20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (4pcs.) Heat Exchanger (2pcs.) Propeller Fan (2pcs.) Fan Motor (2pcs.) Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (5pcs.) Reversing Valve (2pcs.) Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (3pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box (2pcs.) Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (5pcs.) Strainer Strainer Distributor Check Valve (8pcs.) Crankcase Heater (6pcs.) Plate Heat Exchanger

<RAS-28FSNQ, RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ> 13

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 8

Air Outlet

2430

75 0 4 5

11 12

25 2

21 16

1745

18 Air Inlet

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Part Name Compressor (Inverter) Compressor (Const. Speed) (5pcs.) Heat Exchanger (2pcs.) Propeller Fan (2pcs.) Fan Motor (2pcs.) Accumulator Oil Separator Receiver Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (3pcs.) Reversing Valve (2pcs.) Stop Valve (Gas) Stop Valve (Liquid) Solenoid Valve (3pcs.) Check Joint (Low) Check Joint (High) Check Joint (for Oil) Electrical Box Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor High Pressure Switch for Protection (6pcs.) Strainer Strainer Distributor Check Valve (9pcs.) Crankcase Heater (7pcs.) Plate Heat Exchanger

2.2

Refrigerant Cycle

<RAS-8FSNQ> RAS-8FSNQ

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

c φ19.05

b φ22.0

11 20

i φ6.35

18 12

e φ12.7

a φ25.4

d φ15.88

8 c φ19.05

c φ19.05

e φ12.7

i φ6.35

21 2

Mark OD x T a 25.4 x 1.8 b 22.0 x 1.5 c 19.05 x 1.65 d 15.88 x 1.2 e 12.7 x 1.0 f 9.53 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 g 6.35 x 1.07 h i 6.35 x 0.7 j 19.05 x 1.0

g φ9.53 e φ12.7

g φ9.53

14 e φ12.7

e φ12.7

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

i φ6.35

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

b φ22.0

c φ19.05

e φ12.7

g φ9.53

e φ12.7

9 19

h φ6.35

b φ22.0

i φ6.35

j φ19.05

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

10 : Flare Connection

: Field Refrigerant Piping

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (3/8) Strainer (1/4) Strainer (3/4) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (1/2) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Solenoid Valve for Oil Return Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure

: Brazing Connection

Material

C1220T-O

C1220T-1/2H

<RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ> RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

c φ19.05 18

b φ22.0 4

11 20

i φ6.35

18 17

d φ15.88

9 a φ25.4

c φ19.05

e φ12.7 e φ12.7

13 14 15

c φ15.88

7 12

c φ19.05

j φ6.35

g φ9.53 13

e φ12.7

h φ9.53

h φ9.53 14

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

e φ12.7 e φ12.7

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

: Field Refrigerant Piping

: Flare Connection

10 : Flange Connection

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

h φ9.53

10FSNQ: hφ9.53 12FSNQ: fφ12.7

b φ22.0

e φ12.7 j φ6.35 i φ6.35

10FSNQ: k φ22.2 12FSNQ: m φ25.4

: Brazing Connection

Mark a b c d e f g h i j k m

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (3/8) Strainer (1/4) Strainer (3/4) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (5/8) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Solenoid Valve for Oil Return Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure Plate Heat Exchanger OD x T 25.4 x 1.8 22.0 x 1.5 19.05 x 1.65 15.88 x 1.2 12.7 x 1.0 12.7 x 0.8 9.53 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 6.35 x 1.07 6.35 x 0.7 22.2 x 1.0 25.4 x 1.0

Material

C1220T-O

C1220T-1/2H

<RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ> RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ

No. 1 2 3 4

d φ19.05 k φ6.35 c φ25.4

c φ25.4

d φ19.05

j φ6.35

e φ15.88

f φ12.7

a φ31.75

k φ6.35

g φ12.7

φ19.05

k φ6.35

19 d φ19.05

f φ12.7

20 8

k φ6.35

e φ15.88

d φ19.05 d φ19.05

d φ19.05

f φ12.7

i φ9.53 i φ9.53

24 f φ12.7

i φ9.53

15 f φ12.7

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

f φ12.7

: Field Refrigerant Piping

: Flare Connection

11 : Flange Connection

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

k φ6.35

i φ9.53

k φ9.53

f φ12.7

k φ6.35 h φ9.53

f φ12.7

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

i φ9.53

f φ12.7

e φ15.88

d φ19.05

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

k φ6.35

j φ6.35

b φ28.0

j φ6.35

RAS-14FSNQ: mφ25.4 RAS-16FSNQ: nφ28.6

: Brazing Connection

Mark a b c d e f g h i j k m n

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (1/4) Strainer (1/2) Strainer (3/4) Strainer (3/8) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (5/8) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Solenoid Valve for Oil Return Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure Plate Heat Exchanger OD x T 31.75 x 2.2 28.0 x 1.9 25.4 x 1.8 19.05 x 1.65 15.88 x 1.2 12.7 x 1.0 12.7 x 0.8 9.53 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 6.35 x 1.07 6.35 x 0.7 25.4 x 1.0 28.6 x 1.0

Material

C1220T-C

C1220T-1/2H

<RAS-18FSNQ> RAS-18FSNQ 16

eφ22.0

cφ25.4

bφ28.0

mφ28.58

eφ22.0 dφ22.0

eφ22.0 jφ6.35

gφ15.88

jφ6.35

eφ22.0

P 18

S S

jφ6.35

fφ19.05

8 fφ19.05

5 iφ9.53

cφ25.4 cφ25.4

hφ12.7

iφ9.53 25

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (1/4) Strainer (1/2) Strainer (3/4) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (1/4) Check Valve (3/4) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure Solenoid Valve for Refrigerant Solenoid Valve for Return Oil Plate Heat Exchanger

7 S hφ12.7

hφ12.7

hφ12.7 14

hφ12.7

gφ15.88

iφ9.53 13

gφ15.88

gφ15.88 nφ15.88

iφ9.53

8 13

jφ6.35

aφ31.75

jφ6.35

hφ12.7 hφ12.7

23 jφ6.35 12

iφ9.53

hφ12.7

jφ6.35

kφ6.35

gφ15.88

HP 17

jφ6.35

12 21 S

fφ19.05

hφ12.7

fφ19.05 jφ6.35 jφ6.35

hφ12.7

6 jφ6.35

eφ22.0

iφ9.53 7

iφ9.53 13

7 S hφ12.7

hφ12.7

: Field Refrigerant Piping

Ma r k a b c d e f g h i j k m n

: Flare Connection

OD x T 31.75 x 2.2 28.0 x 1.9 25.4 x 1.8 22.0 x 1.65 2 2 .0 x 1 . 5 19.05 x 1.65 15.88 x 1.2 12.7 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 6.35 x 0.7 6.35 x 1.07 28.58 x 1.0 15.88 x 1.0

: Flange Connection

: Brazing Connection

Material

C1220T-O

C1220T-1/2H C1220T-O

<RAS-20FSNQ and RAS-22FSNQ>

Outdoor Unit 16

d φ22.0

c φ25.4

d φ22.0 11

j φ6.35 20

18 22

f φ15.88

d φ22.0

b φ28.0

S j φ6.35

d φ22.0

m φ28.58

S d φ22.0

h φ12.7

S 12

12 S

h φ12.7

P 22

c φ25.4

j φ6.35

h φ12.7

i φ9.53 f φ15.88 n φ15.88

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

: Field Refrigerant Piping

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (1/4) Strainer (1/2) Strainer (3/4) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (1/2) Check Valve (1/1) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure Sight Glass Solenoid Valve for Refrigerant Solenoid Valve for Oil Return Plate Heat Exchanger

h φ12.7

14 7

S h φ12.7

h φ12.7

: Flare Connection

Mark a b c d e f g h i j k m n

i φ9.53

h φ12.7

f φ15.88 i φ9.53

h φ12.7

j φ6.35

h φ12.7

j φ6.35

a φ31.75

e φ19.05

i φ9.53 i φ9.53

f φ15.88

e φ19.05

j φ6.35

k φ6.35

e φ19.05

h φ12.7

j φ6.35

e φ19.05 1

j φ6.35

k φ6.35

f φ15.88

j φ6.35

i φ9.53

25 S

24 j φ6.35

h φ12.7

j φ6.35

j φ6.35 15

6 j φ6.35

: Flange Connection

OD x T 31.75 x 2.2 28.0 x 1.9 25.4 x 1.8 22.0 x 1.5 19.05 x 1.65 15.88 x 1.2 15.88 x 1.0 12.7 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 6.35 x 0.7 6.35 x 1.07 28.58 x 1.0 15.88 x 1.0

: Brazing Connection

Material

C1220T-O

C1220T-1/2H C1220T-O

<RAS-24FSNQ and RAS-26FSNQ>

Outdoor Unit 16

d φ25.4

c φ28.0

e φ22.0

d φ25.4 f φ19.05 e φ22.0

g φ15.88

15 20

15 9

j φ6.35

d φ25.4

b φ31.75

m φ28.58

e φ22.0

j φ6.35

6 j φ6.35

d φ25.4

j φ6.35

23 j φ6.35

j φ6.35

i φ9.53

21 HP

18 d φ25.4 j φ6.35

d φ25.4

j φ6.35

f φ19.05

a φ38.0

j φ6.35

i φ9.53

f φ19.05

j φ6.35

n φ15.88

h φ12.7

e φ22.0

S h φ12.7

h φ12.7 i φ9.53

i φ9.53

f φ19.05

h φ12.7

φ15.88 x t1.2

i φ9.53

j φ6.35

f φ19.05

1 j φ6.35

j φ6.35

i φ9.53

24 8

j φ6.35

f φ19.05 k φ6.35

i φ9.53

h φ12.7 h φ12.7

h φ12.7

f φ19.05 k φ6.35

6 h φ12.7

21 HP

h φ12.7

g φ15.88 k φ6.35

h φ12.7

f φ19.05 k φ6.35

i φ9.53

h φ12.7

25 h φ12.7

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (3/8) Strainer (1/2) Strainer (3/4) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (1/2) Check Valve (1/1) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure Solenoid Valve Refrigerant Solenoid Valve for Oil Return Plate Heat Exchanger

: Field Refrigerant Piping

: Flare Connection

Ma r k a b c d e f g h i j k m n

: Flange Connection

OD x T 38.0 x 2.6 31.75 x 2.2 28.0 x 1.9 25.4 x 1.8 22.0 x 1.5 19.05 x 1.65 15.88 x 1.2 12.7 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 6.35 x 0.7 6.35 x 1.07 28.58 x 1.0 15.88 x 1.0

: Brazing Connection

Material

C1220T-O

C1220T-1/2H C1220T-O

<RAS-28FSNQ, RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ> Outdoor Unit 16

d φ25.4

c φ28.0 18 22

g φ15.88 15

P j φ6.35

d φ25.4

b φ31.75

d φ25.4

f φ19.05 e φ22.0

18 P 22 j φ6.35

d φ25.4

m φ31.75

e φ22.0 e φ22.0

6 j φ6.35

d φ25.4

j φ6.35

1 f φ19.05

j φ6.35

n φ19.75

j φ6.35

1 f φ19.05

j φ6.35

h φ12.7 f φ19.05

f φ19.05

h φ12.7 e φ22.0

i φ9.53

1 8 8

i φ9.53

h φ12.7

i φ9.53 7 3

h φ12.7 h φ12.7

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

: Field Refrigerant Piping

Part Name Compressor Heat Exchanger Receiver Oil Separator Accumulator Strainer (3/8) Strainer (1/2) Strainer (3/4) Silencer Distributor Reversing Valve Capillary Tube Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Check Valve (3/8) Check Valve (1/2) Check Valve (1/1) Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass Check Joint Stop Valve for Liquid Line Stop Valve for Gas Line High Pressure Switch for Protection Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure Solenoid Valve for Refrigerant Solenoid Valve for Oil Return Plate Heat Exchanger

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating)

i φ9.53 14

i φ9.53

: Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling)

h φ12.7

h φ12.7 h φ12.7

j φ6.35

d φ25.4 d φ25.4

a φ38.0

HP f φ19.05

j φ6.35

φ15.88 x t1.2

j φ6.35

h φ12.7

i φ9.53

f φ19.05

f φ19.05 k φ6.35

h φ12.7

f φ19.05 k φ6.35

g φ15.88 k φ6.35

h φ12.7

i φ9.53 6

23 j φ6.35

: Flare Connection

Ma rk a b c d e f g h i j k m n

: Flange Connection

OD x T 38.0 x 2.6 31.75 x 2.2 2 8 .0 x 1 .9 25.4 x 1.8 22.0 x 1.5 19.05 x 1.65 15.88 x 1.2 12.7 x 1.0 9.53 x 0.8 6.35 x 0.7 6.35 x 1.07 31.75 x 1.10 19.05 x 1.00

: Brazing Connection

Material

C1220T-O

C1220T-1/2H

2.3

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation

No.

Tool

No.

Tool

No.

Tool

No.

Tool

Handsaw

Copper Pipe Bender

Spanner

Leveller

Phillips Screwdriver

Manual Water Pump

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Pipe Cutter

Gauge Manifold

Clamper for Solderless Terminals Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Refrigerant Gas Hose Megohmmeter

Brazing Kit

Cutter for Wires

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Gas Leak Detector

Voltage Meter

Use tools and measuring instruments only for the new refrigerant which is directly touched to refrigerant.

The pressure of refrigerant R410A is 1.4 times higher than that of conventional refrigerant, impurities such as moisture, oxide film, and grease affect easily R410A. Therefore, if the specified materials are not used, it may cause explosion, injury, leakage, electrical shock or fire. : Interchangeability is available with current R22 : Prohibited Measuring Instrument and Tool Pipe Cutter Chamfering Reamer Flaring Tool Extrusion Adjustment Gauge Pipe Bender Expanding Tool Refrigerant Pipe

Torque Wrench

Brazing Tool Nitrogen Gas Lubrication Oil (for Flare Surface) Refrigerant Cylinder Vacuum Pump

Vacuum Drying . Refrigerant Charge

Adapter for Vacuum Pump Manifold Valve Charging Hose

Charging Cylinder Weight Scale Refrigerant Gas Leakage Detector

Interchangeability with R22 R410A R407C

: only for Refrigerant R410A (No Interchangeability with R22) : only for Refrigerant R407C (No Interchangeability with R22) Reason of Non-Interchangeability and Attention ( : Strictly Required) -

* The flaring tools for R407C are applicable to R22. * If using flaring tube, make dimension of tube larger for R410A. * In case of material 1/2H, flaring is not available. * In case of material 1/2H, bending is not available. Use elbow for bend and braze. * In case of material 1/2H, expanding of tube is not available. Use socket for connecting tube. * For φ12.7, φ15.88, spanner size is up 2mm. * For φ6.35, φ9.53, φ19.05, spanner size is the same. * Perform correct brazing work. * Strict Control against Contamin (Blow nitrogen during brazing.) * Use a synthetic oil which is equivalent to the oil used in the refrigeration cycle. * Synthetic oil absorbs moisture quickly. * Check refrigerant cylinder color. Liquid refrigerant charging is required regarding zeotoropic refrigerant. The current ones are applicable. However, it is required to mount a vacuum pump adapter which can prevent from reverse flow when a vacuum pump stops, resulting in no reverse oil flow. * No interchangeability is available due to higher pressures when compared with R22. Do not use current ones to the different refrigerant. If used, mineral oil will flow into the cycle and cause sludges, resulting in clogging or compressor failure. Connection diameter is different; R410A: UNF1/2, R407C: UNF7/16. * Use the weight scale. * The current gas leakage detector (R22) is not applicable due to different detecting method.

Use Cutting Pipe Removing Burrs Flaring for Tubes Dimensional Control for Extruded Portion of Tube after Flaring Bending Expanding Tubes Connection of Flare Nut Brazing for Tubes Prevention from Oxidation during Brazing Applying Oil to the Flared Surface Refrigerant Charging

Vacuum Pumping

Vacuum Pumping, Vacuum Holding, Refrigerant Charging and Check of Pressures

Measuring Instrument for Refrigerant Charging Gas Leakage Check

3. Transportation and Handling 3.1

Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit

• Various Indoor/Outdoor Unit Combinations The following indoor units can be combined with the HITACHI SET-FREE FSN outdoor unit. Table 3.1 Indoor Unit Type List Model

Type In-the-Ceiling

0.8HP 1.0HP 1.5HP 1.8HP 2.0HP 2.3HP 2.5HP 3.0HP 3.5HP 4.0HP 5.0HP 6.0HP 8HP 10HP

RPI-FSNQ

In-the-Ceiling(Low RPI-FSNQL Static Pressure) In-the-Ceiling(High RPI-FSNQ(H) Static Pressure) Low-Height RPIZ-FSNQ In-the-Ceiling 4-Way Cassette

RCI-FSNQ

2-Way Cassette

RCD-FSN

Ceiling

RPC-FSN

Wall

RPK-FSNSM(1)

Floor-standing

RPF-FSNE

Floor-concealed

RPFI-FSNE

: Available

• A maximum total capacity of 130% and a minimum total capacity of 50% can be obtained by combination of the indoor units when compared with the nominal outdoor unit capacity. Table 3.2 System Combination Indoor Unit

Outdoor Unit Model

Minimum Combination Capacity (HP)

Maximum Combination Capacity (HP)

Combination Quantity

RAS-8FSNQ RAS-10FSNQ RAS-12FSNQ RAS-14FSNQ RAS-16FSNQ RAS-18FSNQ RAS-20FSNQ RAS-22FSNQ RAS-24FSNQ RAS-26FSNQ RAS-28FSNQ RAS-30FSNQ RAS-32FSNQ

4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0

10.4 13.0 15.6 18.2 20.8 23.4 26.0 28.6 31.2 33.8 36.4 39.0 41.6

2 to 13 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 20 2 to 20 2 to 20 2 to 20 2 to 27 2 to 29 2 to 31 2 to 32 2 to 32

Minimum Individual Operation Capacity (HP) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

3.2

Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

(3) Hang the unit without wooden base with two (2) wire ropes, as shown in Fig. 3.2. Wire Rope Corrugated Paper Frame

more than 1.5m

Rope Position

Do not hang the unit by the ropes at the wooden base.

Do not remove corrugated paper frame and plastic band.

Rope Square Hole

INCORRECT

Wire Rope

Apply ropes on the cushions more than 15mm thickness.

Rope Square Hole

Wooden Base

Apply wire ropes through the square holes.

Fig. 3.2 Hanging Work without Wooden Base Do not step or put any material on the product. Apply four lifting wires onto the outdoor unit, when lifting it by crane. â&#x20AC;˘ Hanging Method When hanging the unit, ensure a balance of the unit, check safety and lift up smoothly. <For 8 to 16HP> (1) Do not remove any packing materials. (2) Hang the unit under packing condition with two (2) wire ropes, as shown in Fig. 3.1. Corrugated Paper Frame

Wire Rope more than 1.5m

Do not remove corrugated paper frame and plastic band. Apply ropes on the cushions more than 15mm thickness. Wooden Base Apply wire ropes through the square holes.

Fig. 3.1 Hanging Work for Transportation

<For 18 to 32HP> (1) Do not remove any packing materials. (2) Hanging Method Hang the unit under packing condition with four (4) wire ropes. Push through the wire ropes into the hang hole and clamp the wires by using shackle as shown in Fig. 3.3.

NOTE In case of transportation after unpacking, protect the unit with the splints or cloth. Wire Rope Corrugated Paper Frame more than 1.5m Do not remove corrugated paper frame and plastic band.

Wire Rope Corrugated Paper Frame more than 1.5m

Apply ropes on the cushions more than 15mm thickness.

Do not remove corrugated paper frame and plastic band. Apply ropes on the cushions more than 15mm thickness.

Lead the wire ropes through the hanging hole and clamp the wire ropes by using shackles.

Wooden Base

Fig. 3.4 Hanging Work without Wooden Base

Lead the wire ropes through the hanging hole and clamp the wire ropes by using shackles.

3.3

Handling of Outdoor Unit

Fig. 3.3 Hanging Work for Transportation (3) For Installation A. Remove the wooden base. B. Apply four (4) wire ropes and hang the unit as shown in Fig. 3.4.

4. 4.1

Do not put any foreign material into the outdoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the outdoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Outdoor Unit Installation Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the outdoor unit.

NOTE If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories Accessory Compressed Sheet Pipe Flange of Refrigerant Gas Piping Pipe with Flare Nut of Refrigerant Gas Piping (φ19.05) Pipe with Flare Nut of Refrigerant Liquid Piping (φ15.88) Pipe with Flare Nut of Refrigerant Liquid Piping (φ19.05) Rubber Bush

Screw

Q'ty 1 1

Purpose Connection for Refrigerant Gas Piping with RAS-10FSNQ to 32FSNQ

Connection for Refrigerant Gas Piping with RAS-8FSNQ

Connection for Refrigerant Liquid Piping with RAS-24FSNQ

Connection for Refrigerant Liquid Piping with RAS-26FSNQ to 32FSNQ

For Connection Hole of Operation Wiring

For Connection Hole of Power Source Wiring with RAS-8FSNQ to 22FSNQ

Spare

4.2

Initial Check

• Install the outdoor unit with a sufficient space around the outdoor unit for operation and maintenance as shown in Fig. 4.1. (mm) Min. 1500

Front Side

Rear Side

• Install the outdoor unit where it is in the shade or it will not be exposed to direct sunshine or direct radiation from high temperature heat source. • Do not install the outdoor unit where dust or other contamination could block the outdoor heat exchanger. • Install the outdoor unit in a space with limited access to general public. • Do not install the outdoor unit in a space where a seasonal wind directly blows to the outdoor heat exchanger or a wind from a building space directly blows to the outdoor fan.

500

Aluminum fins have very sharp edges. Pay attention to the fins to avoid any injury.

NOTE 500

750

300 1/2H

Fig. 4.1 Installation and Service Space Add the half of dimension H to 300mm for air intake space of rear side, when the wall of rear side is higher than 500mm.

• In case of no walls at the front and the rear side of the unit, the space of 500mm for the front side and 300mm for the rear side is required. • When there are walls around the unit, make the vent hole on the wall. • When there are obstacles above the unit, the four (front, rear, right and left) sides of the unit shall be open in principle. • Install the outdoor unit in a dry well ventilated environment. • Install the outdoor unit where the sound or the discharge air from the outdoor unit does not affect neighbors or surrounding ventilation. The operating sound at the rear or right/left sides is 3 to 6dB(A) higher than the value in the catalog at the front side. • Check to ensure that the foundation is flat, level and sufficiently strong. • Do not install the outdoor unit where there is a high level of oil mist, flammable gases, salty air or harmful gases such as sulphur. • Do not install the outdoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box. • Install the outdoor unit as far as practical, being at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. • When installing the outdoor unit in snowcovered areas, mount the field-supplied hoods on the top of the outdoor unit and the inlet side of the heat exchanger.

Install the outdoor unit on a roof or in an area where people except service engineers can not touch the outdoor unit. (mm) Min. 300

Min. 10 Min. 600 to 900

Min. 20

Min. 10

Front Side

(1) Provide a open space above the unit. (2) Keep a wall height as shown below. Front Side: Max. 1,500mm Rear Side: Max. 500mm Right and Left Side: No Limit (3) If the wall height exceeds the above value, add a h1/2 or h2/2 dimension to the service space of the front or rear side. (4) The maximum outdoor unit quantity should be (a) in one block. (a): 8 to 16HP3, 18 to 32HP2 (mm) Wall Height: No Limit h1 500 h2 1500 Min. 300+h1/2 Min. (600 to 900)+h2/2

4.3

Foundation

(5) When installing the outdoor unit, fix the unit by anchor bolts. Refer to Fig. 4.3 regarding the location of fixing holes.

â&#x20AC;˘ Concrete Foundations (1) The height of the foundation should be 100 to 300mm higher than the ground level. (2) Install a drainage around foundation for smooth drain.

8HP 10HP 12HP

688

14HP 16HP

948

760

Unit Capacity

more than 100 90 17

125

Outdoor Unit

Vibration Proof Mat

<18HP to 22HP>

Drainage

more than 100

Details of P

4-16x38 Hole of Anchor Bolt

Mortar Hole 100 x Depth 20

(760) (614) 794

17 90

760

Less than 300

Anchor Bolt

Drainage (Width 100 x Depth 20)

Unit: mm

<8HP to 16HP>

17 90

824

Incorrect

6-38x16 Hole of Anchor Bolt

<24HP to 32HP>

760

Correct

824

Foundation

723 723 723

Fig. 4.2 Foundations (3) Install the outdoor unit in the front-rear and right-left direction horizontally. Check to ensure that the gradient in four directions (front, rear, right and left) is within 10mm.

8-38x16 Hole of Anchor Bolt

Fig. 4.3 Position of Anchor Bolts

4.4

Installation Work

(1) Secure the outdoor unit with the anchor bolts. Nut

Right Side and Left Side

100mm

Washer

Front Side and Rear Side

(4) Provide a strong and correct foundation so that; a. The outdoor unit is not on an incline. b. Abnormal sound does not occur. c. The outdoor unit will not fall down due to a strong wind or earthquake. 18

Concrete

Anchor Bolt M12 Filled Mortar

(2) When installing the unit on a roof or a veranda, drain water sometimes turns to ice on a cold morning. Therefore, avoid draining into an area where people often use because it is slippery. (3) When drain piping is necessary for the outdoor unit, use the drain kit (DBS-26).

For connecting φ25.4 pipe to RAS-12FSNQ and RAS-14FSNQ unit, use the reducer (factorysupplied).

Refrigerant Piping Work

Factory Supplied Pipe Flange for RAS-12FSNQ and RAS-14FSNQ For connecting φ28.6 pipe to RAS-16FSNQ unit, use the reducer (factory-supplied).

Ensure to connect the piping among the units in the same refrigerant cycle.

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select the piping size from the Table 5.1 and Table 5.2. (3) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside of the pipes. Blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air, to remove any dust or foreign materials before connecting pipes. Do not use any tools which produce a lot of swarf such as a saw or a grinder.

Factory Supplied Pipe Flange for RAS-16FSNQ For connecting φ28.6 pipe to RAS-18FSNQ to RAS-24FSNQ unit, use the pipe flange (factorysupplied).

NOTE See the items 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6 before refrigerant piping work. For connecting φ22.2 pipe to RAS-10FSNQ unit, use the reducer (factory-supplied).

100

5.1

Factory Supplied Pipe Flange for RAS-18FSNQ to RAS-24FSNQ For connecting φ31.75 pipe to RAS-26FSNQ to RAS-32FSNQ unit, use the pipe flange (factorysupplied).

When using φ31.75 pipe to connect to the flange, cut off the section which is used for connecting with the longer pipe size.

100

Factory Supplied Pipe Flange for RAS-10FSNQ 29 117

Factory Supplied Pipe Flange for RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ 19

Cautions for Refrigerant Pipe Ends When installing pipe through the wall, secure a cap at the end of the pipe. Incorrect Correct

Do not place the pipe directly on the ground. Correct

Incorrect

• Flaring Dimension Perform the flaring work as shown below. 90o + 2o 45 o

Hole

φA

Hole Attach a cap or vinyl tape.

Attach a cap or vinyl tape. Correct

( ) It is impossible to perform the flaring work with 1/2H material. In this case, use an accessory pipe (with a flare).

Attach a cap or vinyl bag with rubber band.

• Piping Thickness and Material Use the pipe as below.

Table 5.1 Piping Size of Outdoor Unit Gas Piping φ19.05 (3/4) φ22.2 (7/8) φ25.4 (1) φ25.4 (1) φ28.6 (1-1/8) φ28.6 (1-1/8) φ28.6 (1-1/8) φ28.6 (1-1/8) φ28.6 (1-1/8) φ31.75 (1-1/4) φ31.75 (1-1/4) φ31.75 (1-1/4) φ31.75 (1-1/4)

Unit: mm (in.) Liquid Piping φ9.53 (3/8) φ9.53 (3/8) φ12.7 (1/2) φ12.7 (1/2) φ12.7 (1/2) φ15.88 (5/8) φ15.88 (5/8) φ15.88 (5/8) φ15.88 (5/8) φ19.05 (3/4) φ19.05 (3/4) φ19.05 (3/4) φ19.05 (3/4)

Table 5.2 Piping Size of Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Models RPI-1.0FSNQ, 1.5FSNQ RPI-1.0FSNQL/H, 1.5FSNQL/H RPIZ-1.0FSNQ, 1.5FSNQ RCI-1.0FSNQ, 1.5FSNQ RCD-1.0FSN, 1.5FSN RPK-1.0FSNQ, 1.5FSNQ RPF-1.0FSN(E), 1.5FSN(E) RPFI-1.0FSN(E), 1.5FSN(E) RPI-2.0FSNQ RPI-1.8FSNQL/H, 2.0FSNQL/H RPIZ-2.0FSNQ RCI-1.8FSNQ, 2.0FSNQ RCD-2.0FSN RPK-2.0FSNQ, 2.3FSNQ RPC-2.0FSN RPI-2.5FSNQ, 3.0FSNQ RPI-2.3FSNQL/H, 2.5FSNQL/H, 3.0FSNQL/H RPIZ-2.5FSNQ RCI-2.3FSNQ, 2.5FSNQ, 3.0FSNQ RCD-2.5FSN, 3.0FSN RPC-2.5FSN, 3.0FSN RPI-4.0FSNQ, 5.0FSNQ, RPI-4.0FSNQL/H, 5.0FSNQL/H, 6.0FSNQL/H RCI-4.0FSNQ, 5.0FSNQ, 6.0FSNQ RCD-4.0FSN, 5.0FSN RPC-4.0FSN, 5.0FSN

6.35 9.53 12.7 15.88 19.05

φd

Rain water can enter.

(mm) +0 A -0.4 R410A R407C 9.1 9.0 13.2 13.0 16.6 16.2 19.7 19.4 23.3 ( )

Diameter φd

0.4 ~ 0.8R

Incorrect

Outdoor Unit Models RAS-8FSNQ RAS-10FSNQ RAS-12FSNQ RAS-14FSNQ RAS-16FSNQ RAS-18FSNQ RAS-20FSNQ RAS-22FSNQ RAS-24FSNQ RAS-26FSNQ RAS-28FSNQ RAS-30FSNQ RAS-32FSNQ

+ 2o

Unit: mm (in.) Gas Liquid Piping Piping

φ12.7 (1/2)

φ6.35 (1/4)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ6.35 (1/4)

(mm) R410A R407C Diameter Thickness Material Thickness Material φ6.35 0.8 O material 0.8 O material φ9.53 0.8 O material 0.8 O material φ12.7 0.8 O material 0.8 O material φ15.88 1.0 O material 1.0 O material φ19.05 1.0 1/2H material 1.0 O material φ22.2 1.0 1/2H material 1.15 O material φ25.4 1.0 1/2H material 1.0 1/2H material φ28.6 1.0 1/2H material 1.0 1/2H material φ31.75 1.1 1/2H material 1.1 1/2H material φ34.92 1.3 1/2H material 1.15 1/2H material φ38.1

1.35

1/2H material

1.15

• Joint Selection If you use 1/2H material, you can not perform the flaring work. In this case, use a joint selected from the chart below. <Minimum Thickness of Joint (mm)> Diameter φ6.35 φ9.53 φ12.7 φ15.88 φ19.05 φ22.2 φ25.4 φ28.6 φ31.75 φ34.92 φ38.1

R410A 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.95 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.35

R407C 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.95 1.0 1.05 1.2 1.25

<Flare Nut Dimension B (mm)> φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

1/2H material

Diameter φ6.35 φ9.53 φ12.7 φ15.88 φ19.05

R410A 17 22 26 29 36

R407C 17 22 24 27 36 Flare Nut

5.2

Piping Connection

• Position of Connecting Pipes to the Outdoor Unit

Connect the pipes with the liquid line stop valve and the gas line stop valve of the outdoor unit as shown in Fig. 5.1.

<8HP>

(mm)

Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection (φb with Flare Nut)

Model

f (Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection)

e (Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection)

Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection (φa with Flare Nut)

c d

19.05

9.53

137

241

306

238

155

156

RAS-10FSNQ

22.2

9.53

137

241

306

238

155

156

RAS-12FSNQ

25.4

12.7

137

241

306

238

155

156

RAS-14FSNQ

25.4

12.7

137

227

295

254

171

173

RAS-16FSNQ

28.6

12.7

137

227

295

254

171

173

RAS-18FSNQ

28.6

15.88

137

233

287

247

141

150

g (Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection)

RAS-20FSNQ

28.6

15.88

137

233

287

247

141

150

RAS-22FSNQ

28.6

15.88

137

233

287

247

141

150

h (Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection)

RAS-24FSNQ

28.6

15.88

138

234

274

247

159

171

RAS-26FSNQ

31.75

19.05

138

234

274

247

159

171

RAS-28FSNQ

31.75

19.05

138

234

274

247

159

171

RAS-30FSNQ

31.75

19.05

138

234

274

247

159

171

RAS-32FSNQ

31.75

19.05

138

234

274

247

159

171

f (Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection)

e (Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection)

Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection (φb with Flare Nut)

RAS-8FSNQ

<10HP to 32HP> Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection (φa with Flange)

c g (Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection)

h (Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection)

Fig. 5.1 Refrigerant Piping Connection <8HP to 16HP> After piping and wiring work are completed, remove two yellow shipping washers for compressor(s). Front Side

Shipping Washer (Yellow-Painted)

Rear Side Bottom Base

Bottom Side

Foot of Compressor Nut

<18HP to 32HP>

Vibration-proof Rubber Front Side

Vibration-proof Rubber Rear Side

Bottom Base

Bottom Side

Fig. 5.2 Piping Direction 21

<10HP to 16HP> Pay attention to the followings to run through the cables under the unit using conduit for piping and wiring works. (The pipe cover is required to remove before performing piping and wiring works.) 1. Attach the pipe cover to avoid entering rats or other small animals into the unit. 2. Completely seal the conduit inlet with sealing materials. 3. Make a drain hole at the lowest part of the conduit. Pipe

Gas Valve Nut (Q'ty: 2) Redundant Compressed Sheet

Compressed Sheet (Accessory) Flange (Accessory)

Closing Flange Bolt (Q'ty: 2)

<18HP to 32HP> Gas Valve

Cable

Redundant Compressed Sheet

Compressed Sheet (Accessory) Flange (Accessory)

Closing Flange

Pipe Cover

Seal

Bolt (Q'ty: 2)

Conduit

Fig. 5.3 Piping Connection (5) Solder the bend pipes and field piping. • Piping Connection (1) Confirm that the valve is closed. (2) Prepare a field-supplied bend pipe for liquid line. Connect it to the liquid valve by flare nut through the square hole of bottom base. (3) For Gas Piping Connection <10HP to 32HP> Prepare a field-supplied bend pipe for gas line. Solder it and the factory-supplied pipe flange at the outside of the unit.

• When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners. Do not apply the double spanner work here. Refrigerant leakage shall occur.

Double Spanner Work

Tightening Work for Stop Valve

Factory-Supplied Pipe Flange Solder by Bottom Side Up

Field-Supplied Bend Pipe

Check to ensure that no pressure increase is observed one hour after vacuum pumping completion. Table. 5.3 Tightening Work of Flare Nut Required Torque

(4) Remove the flange and the gasket attached to the unit before shipping, and attach the new gasket (factory-supplied) before connecting the pipe flange to the gas valve.

Pipe Size φ6.35

(1/4)

φ9.53

(3/8)

40N-m (4 kg-m)

φ12.7

(1/2)

60N-m (6 kg-m)

φ15.88 (5/8)

80N-m (8 kg-m)

φ19.05 (3/4)

100N-m (10 kg-m)

Bolt for Flange (Factory-Supplied)

Tightening Torque 20N-m (2 kg-m)

53 to 75N-m (5.4 to 7.6 kg-m)

â&#x20AC;˘ Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedure should be performed according to the following instructions and Fig. 5.5. (1) The stop valve has been closed before shipment, however, make sure that the stop valves are closed completely. (2) Connect the indoor unit and the outdoor unit with field-supplied refrigerant piping. Suspend the refrigerant piping at specified points and prevent the refrigerant piping from touching weak parts of the building such as wall, ceiling, etc. (Abnormal sound may occur due to the vibration of the piping. Pay special attention in case of short piping length.) (3) Connect the gauge manifold using charging hoses with a vacuum pump or a nitrogen cylinder to the check joints of the liquid line and the gas line stop valves. Perform the air-tight test. Connect a mani-fold gauge to the check joints of the liquid and gas stop valves in the outdoor unit. Do not open the stop valves. Apply nitrogen gas pressure of 4.15MPa for FSN series. (4) Check for any gas leakage at the flare nut connections, or brazed parts by gas leakage tester or by use of a foaming agent.

(6) To charge refrigerant, connect the gauge manifold using charging hoses with a refrigerant charging cylinder to the check joint of the liquid line stop valve. (7) Fully open the gas line stop valve and slightly open the liquid line stop valve. (8) Charge refrigerant by opening the gauge manifold valve. (9) Charge the required refrigerant within the difference range of Âą0.5kg by operating the system in cooling. (10) Fully open the liquid line stop valve after completing refrigerant charge. (11) Continue cooling operation for more than 10 minutes to circulate the refrigerant.

An excess or a shortage of refrigerant is the main cause of trouble to the units. Charge the correct refrigerant quantity as shown in the item 5.4 and the item 5.5. Check for refrigerant leakage in detail. If a large refrigerant leakage occurs, it will cause difficulty with breathing or harmful gases would occur if a fire was being used in the room.

Procedure Completion of Ref. Piping

Applying Nitrogen Gas

Check of Pressure Decrease

Pass

Repairing of Leakage Part

(5) Connect a mani-fold gauge to the check joints at the both sides. Continue vacuum pumping work until the pressure reaches 756mmHg or lower for one to two hours. After vacuum pumping work, stop the mani-fold valveâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s valve, stop the vacuum pump and leave it for one hour. Check to ensure that the pressure in the manifold gauge does not increase. NOTES: 1. If tools or measuring instruments come into contact with the refrigerant, ensure they are tools specified for use with R410A. 2. If vacuum degree of 756mmHg is not available, it is considered that there is a gas leakage. Check for any gas leakage once again. If no leakage exists, operate the vacuum pump for one to two hours.

5.3 â&#x20AC;˘ Insulate the refrigerant pipes as shown in Fig. 5.4

Stop Valve

Operation of the stop valve should be performed according to the following Table 5.4. Hexagonal Wrench

Ref. Pressure

To open or close spindle valve

Stop Valve

Cap Tighten the cap with a torque below. (Attach this after work)

Spindle Valve

Counterclockwise .....Open Clockwise .....Close Closed before shipment.

Insulation (Field-Supplied)

Check Joint

Refrigerant Piping (Field-Supplied)

Fig. 5.4 Insulation on Pipes After connecting the refrigerant piping, seal the refrigerant pipes by using the field-supplied insulation material. Insulate the unions and flarenuts at the piping connections completely. Insulate the liquid piping and gas piping completely to avoid decreasing of performance and dewing on the surface of the pipe.

O-Ring (Rubber)

Only the charging hose can be connected. Tighten the cap with a torque of 9.8N m

Refrigerant Piping

(N m) HP

Liquid

Gas

8 10 12 14 16 18 20

38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0

44.1 49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0 58.8 58.8

HP 22 24 26 28 30 32

Liquid 38.0 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1

Gas 58.8 58.8 58.8 58.8 58.8 58.8

Table 5.4 Stop Valve Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe. Do not place the pipe directly on the ground. Correct

Incorrect

Attach a cap or vinyl tape.

Hexagonal Wrench Size(mm) Model RAS-8FSNQ RAS-10FSNQ RAS-12FSNQ RAS-14FSNQ RAS-16FSNQ RAS-18FSNQ RAS-20FSNQ RAS-22FSNQ RAS-24FSNQ RAS-26FSNQ RAS-28FSNQ RAS-30FSNQ RAS-32FSNQ

Liquid Valve 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10

Gas Valve 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Do not apply an abnormal big force to the spindle valve at the end of opening (5.0N-m or smaller). The back seat construction is not provided. Do not loosen the stop ring. If the stop ring is loosened, it is dangerous, since the spindle will hop out. At the test run, fully open the spindle. If not fully opened, the devices will be damaged.

5.4

Additional Refrigerant Charge Calculation Table 5.5 Additional Refrigerant Charge Calculation

Additional Charge of Refrigerant R410A (FSN Series) Although refrigerant has been charged into this unit, it is required that additional refrigerant be charged according to piping length. A. Determine an additional refrigerant quantity according to the following procedure, and charge it into the system. B. Record the additional refrigerant quantity to facilitate service activities thereafter.

30HP

φ19.05x20m

φ9.53x5m φ9.53x5m φ9.53x5m φ6.35x10m φ9.53x5m φ9.53x5m φ9.53x5m φ9.53x5m φ9.53x5m 2.5HP 4.0HP 5.0HP 4.0HP 5.0HP 2.5HP 2.5HP 2.5HP 2.0HP No. 2 No. 4 No. 6 No. 8 No. 0 No. 1 No. 3 No. 5 No. 7

φ19.05x5m φ15.88x5m φ19.05x5m φ19.05x5m φ12.7x5m

1. Calculating Method of Additional Refrigerant Charge (W kg) 1.1 Additional Refrigerant Charge Calculation for Liquid Piping (W1 kg) See Example for Model RAS-30FSNQ, and fill in the following table. Pipe Diameter φ22.2 ..... φ19.05 ... φ15.88 ... φ12.7 ..... φ9.53 ..... φ6.35 ..... Example

Total Piping Length (0) (20 + 5 x 3) (5) (5) (5 x 8) (10) Additional Charge W1

Pipe Diameter φ22.2 ..... φ19.05 ... φ15.88 ... φ12.7 ..... φ9.53 ..... φ6.35 ..... This System

Additional Charge (kg) x 0.390 = 0.00 x 0.280 = 9.80 x 0.190 = 0.95 x 0.120 = 0.60 x 0.07 = 2.80 x 0.03 = 0.30

Total Piping Length

Additional Charge W1

Total = 14.45 (kg)

Outdoor Unit

Additional Charge (kg) x 0.390 = x 0.280 = x 0.190 = x 0.120 = x 0.07 = x 0.03 =

RAS-8FSNQ

Total =

(kg)

1.2 Additional Refrigerant Charge Calculation for Indoor Unit (W2 kg) Additional refrigerant charge is 1 kg/unit of 8HP and 10HP indoor unit. Additional refrigerant charge of less than 8HP indoor units are not needed. (Example) This System

(Total Combination unit of 8HP and 10HP.)

W2 = W2 =

unit x 1.0 kg/unit = unit x 1.0 kg/unit =

0.0

kg kg

1.3 Calculation of Additional Charge (W kg) Put weight W1 and weight W2 calculated in items 1.1 and 1.2 into the following formula. Total Volume of Additional Charge W = W1 + W2 (Example) W = 14.45 + 0.0 = 14.45 kg This System W = + = kg

2. Charging Work Charge refrigerant (R410A) into the system according to the instructions described in the "Installation Manual".

W0 Outdoor Unit Ref. Charge (kg) 8.5

RAS-10FSNQ

9.5

RAS-12FSNQ

10.0

RAS-14FSNQ

13.0

RAS-16FSNQ

13.0

RAS-18FSNQ

18.0

RAS-20FSNQ

19.0

RAS-22FSNQ

19.0

RAS-24FSNQ

23.0

RAS-26FSNQ

24.0

RAS-28FSNQ

25.0

RAS-30FSNQ

26.0

RAS-32FSNQ

26.0

NOTE: W0 is outdoor unit ref. charge before shipment.

Total Additional Charge W

Total Ref. Charge of This System

Date of Ref. Charge Work Year

Month

Day

3. Record of Additional Charge Record the refrigerant charging quantity in order to facilitate maintenance and servicing activities. Total refrigerant charge of this system is calculated in the following formula. Total Ref. Charge of This System = W + W0 This System = + = kg

5.5

Refrigerant Piping Work Table 5.6 Piping System

In case that the total piping length is long or the outdoor unit is installed lower than the indoor units by more than 20m, change the pipe size of the main liquid pipe and perform the DSW setting correctly. If not selected correctly, it may cause the compressor failure. < Outdoor Unit to First Branch > Outdoor Unit Capacity

Gas/Liquid (φmm) Equivalent Piping Length < 100m Equivalent Piping Length ≥ 100m *1)

8HP

19.05/9.53

22.2/12.7

10HP

22.2/9.53

25.4(28.6)*/12.7

12 and 14HP

25.4/12.7

28.6/15.88

16HP

28.6/12.7

31.75(34.92)*/15.88

18 to 24HP

28.6/15.88

31.75(34.92)*/19.05

26 to 32HP

31.75(34.92)*/19.05

38.1/22.2 < Multi-kit to Indoor Unit > Pipe Size Indoor Unit Capacity 1.0 to 1.5HP

8 to 10HP

E-102SN

12 to 16HP

E-162SN

18 to 24HP

E-242SN

26 to 32HP

E-302SN

Multi-Kit

8HP 10HP 12 to 16HP 18 to 32HP

E-102SN E-162SN E-242SN E-302SN

15m

15.88/6.35 *2)

15m

2.3 to 6.0HP

15.88/9.53

30m

Indoor Unit

*3) When the Equivalent Piping Length ≥100m, choose as the following table:

Outdoor Unit Capacity

12.7/6.35 *2)

1.8 to 2.0HP

30m 19.05/9.53 30m 22.2/9.53 10HP *2): In the case that liquid piping length is longer than 15m, use φ9.53 pipe and reducer (field-supplied).

< First Branch > *3) Multi-Kit

Max. Length of Liquid Pipe

8HP

Outdoor Unit Capacity

Gas/Liquid (φmm)

Indoor Unit

Indoor Unit L3

Indoor Unit

L3 L2

< Piping Size and Multi-kit after First Branch> Total I.U. Capacity in HP 26~ 18~25.99 16~17.99 13~15.99 9~12.99 6~8.99 lower than 6 *4) Total I.U. Capacity in HP 5~10 5~8

Gas/Liquid (mm) 31.75(34.92)*/19.05 28.6/15.88 28.6/12.7 25.4(28.6)*/12.7 22.2/9.53 19.05/9.53 15.88/9.53 Number of Branches 8 branches 4 branches

Multi-kit Model E-302SN E-242SN E-162SN E-102SN E-84HSN *4) E-108HSN *4)

Item Applicable Range Ref. Pipe Length: L1 Actual within 150m Equivalent within 175m Piping Length from within 40m 1st Branch to each I.U.: L2 Piping Length from within 30m each Multi-kit to I.U.: L3 Lift between O.U. is Higher within 50m I. U. and O.U.: H1 O.U. is Lower within 40m Lift between Indoor Units: H2 within 15m Total Length of I.U. Piping within 300m

Multi-Kit E-108HSN E-84HSN

In the case that the selected multi-kit size is bigger than that of the first branch, use the same size as the first branch. In the case that the selected pipe size after the first branch is bigger than the pipe size before the first branch, use the same size as before the branch. If the pipe length from the O.U. to the first branch is more than 100m, the pipe size must be increased (refer to *1)). In this case, the pipe size from the first branch to the second branch should be selected according to the original pipe size. ( )*: Gas pipe diameters specified in brackets "( )*" are optional for improving machine performance, but pipe reducer are required for interfacing when the optional values are adopted.

Special Attention Regarding Refrigerant Gas Leakage Pay an attention to the critical gas concentration to avoid accidental refrigerant gas leakage before installing air conditioning systems. Totally Charged Refrigerant Quantity in System (kg) â&#x2030;¤ Critical Concentration (kg/m3) Room Space for each Indoor Unit (m3) 0.3 kg/m3 In the case that the calculated critical concentration is bigger than 0.3kg/m3, take the following actions. 1) Provide a gas leakage detector and exhaust fan(s) controlled by its gas leakage detector. 2) Provide each effective opening at the wall or door for ventilation to next door so that the critical gas concentration can be maintained lower than the above value. (Provide an opening more than 0.15% of floor surface at the lower part of a door.) Outdoor Unit Nitrogen Tank (for Nitrogen Blow during Brazing and Air Tight Test) Stop Valve (Liquid Line)

Manifold Gauge

Stop Valve (Gas Line)

Refrigerant Cylinder (R410A) Weigher

Vacuum Pump

Cover the flare nut and unit with thermal insulator.

Gas Line Liquid Line

Indoor Unit

Insulation Multi-Kit

Insulation

Fig. 5.5 Evacuation and Refrigerant Charge

1. Maximum Permissible Concentration of HFC GAS R410A The refrigerant R410A is an incombustible and non-toxic gas. However, if leakage occurs and gas fills a room, it may cause suffocation. The maximum permissible concentration of HFC gas, R410A in air is 0.3kg/m3, according to the refrigeration and air conditioning facility standard (KHK S 0010) by the KHK (High Pressure Gas Protection Association) Japan. Therefore, some effective measure must be taken to lower the R410A concentration in air below 0.3kg/m3, in case of leakage. As for R410A, this consideration is applied similarly. 2. Calculation of Refrigerant Concentration (1) Calculate the total quantity of refrigerant R (kg) charged in the system connecting all the indoor units of objective rooms. (2) Calculate the room volume V (m3) of each objective room. (3) Calculate the refrigerant concentration C (kg/m3) of the room according to the following equation. R: Total Quantity of Charged Refrigerant (kg) V: Room Volume (m3) = C: Refrigerant Concentration â&#x2030;¤ 0.3 (kg/m3) If local codes or regulations are specified, follow them. <Example> British Standard BS4434 1989 Commercial office Building Class D Occupancy C=0.17 (kg/m3)

5.6

Multi-Kit Table 5.7 Multi-Kit for Line Branch (1/2)

Multi-Kit

E-102SN

ID 22.2 ID 19.05

ID 12.7 ID 15.88

ID 15.88

Gas Line

φ25.4 1.2t φ19.05 1.65t ID 15.88 ID 12.7

ID 9.53

ID 19.05 ID 22.2 φ22.22 1.5t

Q'ty: 2

φ12.7 1.0t

ID 9.53

Liquid Line

φ9.53 1.0t ID 9.53 ID 6.35

Multi-Kit

ID 6.35 ID 9.53

OD 6.35

φ9.53 1.0t

E-162SN

φ22.22 1.5t ID 25.4 ID 25.4 OD 28.6

ID 28.6

Gas Line

φ25.4 1.2t φ22.22 1.5t ID 22.2 ID 19.05 ID 15.88 ID 12.7

φ12.7 1.0t

Liquid Line

ID 12.7

ID 25.4

φ28.6 1.2t

ID 12.7 ID 19.05 ID 22.2

φ9.53 1.0t ID 9.53

φ9.53 1.0t ID 12.7 ID 9.53 ID 6.35

ID 28.6

ID 15.88

ID 9.53 ID 12.7

OD 6.35

Unit: mm, ID: Inner Diameter, OD: Outer Diameter

Table 5.8 Multi-Kit for Line Branch (2/2) Multi-Kit

E-242SN ID 25.4 φ22.22 1.5t

ID 28.6

ID 25.4

ID 15.88

OD 28.6

Gas Line

φ25.4 1.2t

ID 28.6

φ22.22 1.5t ID 22.2

ID 12.7 ID 19.05

ID 25.4

ID 19.05

φ28.6 1.2t

ID 22.2

ID 15.88 ID 12.7

φ25.4 1.2t

ID 9.53 ID 12.7

ID 15.88

Liquid Line

φ19.05 1.65t ID 15.88 ID 12.7 ID 9.53

ID 9.53

ID 15.88 ID 19.05

OD 6.35

φ19.05 1.65t

ID 6.35

Multi-Kit

E-302SN

OD 31.75

φ31.75 2.2t ID 32.0 ID 38.1

Gas Line

ID 28.6 ID 22.2

ID 25.4 φ31.75 1.2t ID 38.1

φ31.75 1.2t

ID 32.0

ID 25.4 OD 28.6

ID 15.88 φ38.1

φ28.6 1.9t φ28.6 1.2t

ID 28.6

φ25.4 1.8t ID 22.2 ID 19.05

Liquid Line

Q'ty: 2 ID 34.92

ID 12.7 ID 19.05 ID 22.2

ID 19.05 ID 15.88

ID 9.53

φ19.05 1.65t ID 15.88 ID 12.7 ID 9.53

ID 12.7 ID 22.2

OD 6.35

φ22.22 1.5t

ID 6.35

Unit: mm, ID: Inner Diameter, OD: Outer Diameter 29

Table 5.9 Multi-Kit for Header Branch Multi-Kit

E-84HSN Q'ty: 2 ID 19.1 ID 15.9

Gas Line

ID 15.9

φ19.1

φ12.7

φ15.9

ID 12.7

OD 12.7 Q'ty: 2

ID 15.9 ID 12.7

φ9.5

OD 12.7

Q'ty: 7

φ19.05

ID 9.53

φ9.5

φ6.4

Liquid Line

φ9.5 ID 6.4

OD 6.35

ID 6.4 Q'ty: 2 ID 9.5 OD 6.35

ID 9.5

Multi-Kit

E-108HSN Q'ty: 2

ID 19.1 φ22.2

ID 22.2

ID 15.9

φ12.7

Gas Line

OD 12.7

φ19.1 ID 19.1 ID 15.9

ID 12.7

ID 15.9 φ15.9

φ9.5

OD 12.7

Q'ty: 10

φ19.05

ID 9.53 φ6.4

φ9.5

Liquid Line

Q'ty: 6

OD 6.35 ID 6.4

ID 6.4 Q'ty: 6

ID 9.5 ID 9.5

OD 6.35

ID 12.7

Unit: mm, ID: Inner Diameter, OD: Outer Diameter

Electrical Wiring <RAS-8 to 22FSNQ> Turn OFF the main power switch to the indoor unit and the outdoor unit and wait for more than 3 minutes before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Check to ensure that the indoor fan and the outdoor fan have stopped before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Protect the wires, electrical parts, etc. from rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats may gnaw at unprotected parts and which may lead to a fire. Check the item below before turning ON the main switch. In case that the power source for outdoor unit is 415V (nominal voltage), change CN4 (connector) to CN5 of transformer (TF) in the electrical control box as shown in below figure. Avoid the wirings from touching the refrigerant pipes, plate edges and electrical parts inside the unit. If not do, the wires will be damaged and at the worst, a fire will occur. Use a medium sensing speed type ELB (Electric Leakage Breaker, activation speed of 0.1 sec. or smaller). If not used, it will cause an electric shock or a fire. Fix the cables securely. External forces on the terminals could lead to a fire. Tighten screws according to the following torque. M4: 1.0 to 1.3 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m M6: 4.0 to 5.0 N-m M8: 9.0 to 11.0 N-m M10: 18.0 to 23.0 N-m

Tightly secure the power source wiring using the cord clamp inside the unit.

NOTE Fix the rubber bushes with adhesive when conduit tubes to the outdoor unit are not used.

Earth

Cord Clamp (Fixed on Valve Stay)

Electrical Box

Connection Hole of Power Supply Wiring φ42 Knock-out Hole (5HP Model only) φ52 Knock-out Hole (8HP to 22HP Models only)

Connection Hole of Operation Wiring between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Units φ26.5

Connection Hole of Operation Wiring between Outdoor Unit φ26 Knock-out Hole x 2 Seal hermetically the entry of conduit pipe by using putty or etc. (for Water Protection)

Connection Hole of Power Supply Wiring φ56

Operation Wiring between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit DC 5V (Non-Pole)

Power Source Wiring (AC 380-415V/50Hz)

Operation Wiring between Outdoor Unit and Outdoor Unit DC 5V (Non-Pole)

<RAS-24 to 32FSNQ>

Earth Cord Clamp (Fixed on Valve Stay)

Electrical Box

Connection Hole of Operation Wiring between Outdoor Unit φ26 Knock-out Hole x 2 Seal hermetically the entry of conduit pipe by using putty or etc. (for Water Protection)

Connection Hole of Power Supply Wiring φ70

Power Source Wiring (AC 380-415V/50Hz) Operation Wiring between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit DC 5V (Non-Pole)

Operation Wiring between Outdoor Unit and Outdoor Unit DC 5V (Non-Pole)

Fig. 6.1 Wiring Connection for Outdoor Unit

6.1

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data indicated in the Technical Catalog I. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). • Supply electrical power to each outdoor unit. An ELB and knife switch should be used for each outdoor unit. • Perform electrical wiring by connecting the outdoor unit to the same outdoor unit group indoor unit. Use an ELB and knife switch for each indoor units group. (2) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within ±10% of the rated voltage. (3) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (4) Check to ensure that the ground wire is connected. 31

6.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

6.2.1 For Outdoor Unit The electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit is shown in Fig. 6.1 (1) Connect the power supply wires to L1, L2, L3, N and E (for 380-415V) for the three phase power source on the terminal board. (2) Connect the wires between the outdoor and indoor units to terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal board. (3) Do not wire in front of the fixing screw of the service panel. If do, the screw can not be removed.

Fix the operation shielded wires between the indoor and outdoor unit with a cord band and ground shielded twist pair cable as shown in the figure. TB2

Shielded Wire

Press the metal band by pinchers, after inserting the shielded wire to metal band.

Metal Band

6.2.2 Electrical Wiring Between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit Connect the electrical wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit, as shown in Fig. 6.2. Check to ensure that the terminal for power source wiring (terminals “L1” to “L1” and “N” to “N” of each terminal board: AC380-415V) and intermediate wiring (Operating Line: terminals “1” to “1” and “2” to “2” of each terminal board: DC5V) between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit coincide correctly. If not, some component will be damaged. (1) Use shielded wires (≥0.75mm2) for intermediate wiring to protect noise obstacle at length of less than 1,000m and size complied with local code. (2) Open a hole near the connection hole of power source wiring when the multiple outdoor units are connected from one power source line. (3) The recommended breaker sizes are shown in Table 6.1. (4) In the case that a conduit tube for fieldwiring is not used, fix rubber bushes with adhesive on the panel.

Table 6.1 Electrical Data and Recommended Wiring, Breaker Size/1 Outdoor Unit Model

Power Supply

Max. Running Current

(A) 17 RAS-8FSNQ 18 RAS-10FSNQ 21 RAS-12FSNQ 30 RAS-14FSNQ 33 RAS-16FSNQ 32 RAS-18FSNQ 380-415V /50Hz 37 RAS-20FSNQ 42 RAS-22FSNQ 50 RAS-24FSNQ 54 RAS-26FSNQ 59 RAS-28FSNQ 67 RAS-30FSNQ 70 RAS-32FSNQ ELB: Earthleakage Breaker MLFC: Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire

Power Supply Line (φmm) MLFC0.75SQ MLFC1.25SQ MLFC2.0SQ MLFC2.0SQ MLFC3.5SQ MLFC3.5SQ MLFC3.5SQ MLFC5.5SQ MLFC5.5SQ MLFC5.5SQ MLFC8SQ MLFC8SQ MLFC8SQ

ELB Nominal Current (A) 30 30 30 40 50 50 50 75 75 75 100 100 125

Nominal Sensitive Current (mA) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 100 100 100 100 100

Fuse (A) 15 20 20 40 40 40 40 60 60 60 75 75 75

Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Power Source Cable Size EN60 335-1 MLFC *1 *2 17 RAS-8FSNQ 2.5mm2 0.75mm2 18 RAS-10FSNQ 2.5mm2 1.25mm2 2 21 RAS-12FSNQ 2.5mm 2.0mm2 2 30 RAS-14FSNQ 2.5mm 2.0mm2 2 33 RAS-16FSNQ 6mm 3.5mm2 2 32 RAS-18FSNQ 380-415V 6mm 3.5mm2 37 RAS-20FSNQ /3φ/50Hz 3.5mm2 42 RAS-22FSNQ 5.5mm2 50 RAS-24FSNQ 5.5mm2 54 RAS-26FSNQ 5.5mm2 59 RAS-28FSNQ 8mm2 66 RAS-30FSNQ 8mm2 70 RAS-32FSNQ 8mm2 * Refer to the NOTES for selection of the power source cable size. Model

Power Source

Maximum Current

Transmitting Cable Size EN60 335-1 *1

MLFC *2

0.75mm2

0.5mm2

NOTES: 1) Follow local codes and regulations when selecting field wires. 2) The wire sizes marked with *1 in the table are selected at the maximum current of the unit according to the European Standard, EN60 335-1. Use the wires which are not lighter than the ordinary tough rubber sheathed flexible cord (code designation H05RN-F) or ordinary polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord (code designation H05RN-F). 3) The wire sizes marked with *2 in the table are selected at the maximum current of the unit according to the wire, MLFC (Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire) manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd., Japan. 4) Use a shielded cable for the transmitting circuit and connect it to ground. 5) In the case that power cables are connected in series, add each unit maximum current and select wires below. Selection According to EN60 335-1 Selection According to MLFC (at Cable Temperature of 60oC) Current i (A) Wire Size (mm2) Current i (A) Wire Size (mm2) i≤6 0.75 i ≤ 15 0.5 *3: In the case that 6 < i ≤ 10 1 15 < i ≤ 18 0.75 current exceeds 63A, 10 < i ≤ 16 1.5 18 < i ≤ 24 1.25 use MLFC cables. 16 < i ≤ 25 2.5 24 < i ≤ 34 2 25 < i ≤ 32 4 34 < i ≤ 47 3.5 32 < i ≤ 40 6 47 < i ≤ 62 5.5 40 < i ≤ 63 10 62 < i ≤ 78 8 63 < i *3 78 < i ≤ 112 14 112 < i ≤ 147 22

Install a multi-pole main switch with a space of 3.5mm or more between each phase.

6.3

Dip Switch Setting of Outdoor Unit

NOTE

TURN OFF all power sources before setting. Without turning OFF, the switches do not work and the contents of the setting are invalid. Mark of “ ” indicates the position of dip switches. Set the dip switches according to the Fig.6.3.

DSW1 Ref. Cycle No. Setting

DSW2 Capacity Setting

Setting is required. When wiring connections are H-Link, setting is needed. ON OFF

No setting is required. Model Setting Position

1 2 3 4

Model

Unit No.0 Setting Condition Set the unit number of outdoor unit at each refrigerant cycle. (Setting before shipment is unit 0.)

Setting Position

RAS-5FSNQ ON OFF

Setting is required.

1 2 3 4

RAS-22FSNQ

RAS-20FSNQ ON OFF

* The outdoor unit is located lower than indoor unit. (20 to 40m)

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

Setting before Shipment ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

RAS-18FSNQ ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

RAS-32FSNQ

RAS-30FSNQ

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6

25 ≤

< 25

1 2

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6

Setting is required.

< 50

ON OFF

1 2

<8 to 22HP>

50 ≤

(m)

380V

75 ≤

< 75

220V

ON OFF

1 2

ON OFF

1 2

415V

Short Circuit of Fuse

DSW5

DSW2

DSW3

DSW6

DSW7

PSW1

PSW2

DSW4 PSW3

SEG2 DSW1 DSW2 DSW4

SEG2 PSW10

SEG1

ON OFF

1 2

Setting before Shipment ON OFF

1 2

Push Switches

<24 to 32HP>

DSW1

1 2

ON OFF

DSW7 Power Supply Setting

Dip Switches Location

ON OFF

Operation for Exchange Compressor

Setting before Shipment

Pin No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8

Setting is required for cancellation of end resistance. Cancellation of End Resistance

Combination of Indoor Units more than 16

Compressor Forced Stop

Setting is required.

DSW10 Transmission Setting

DSW6 PSW10

Fig. 6.3 Position of Dip Switch

ON OFF

RAS-28FSNQ

DSW6 Refrigerant Piping Length Setting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

RAS-26FSNQ

Actual Piping Length

Setting Item Except No.1 Comp. Operation Except No.2 Comp. Operation Except No.3 Comp. Operation Except No.4 Comp. Operation Except No.5 Comp. Operation Except No.6 Comp. Operation Selection of Input Signal Function Setting

1 2

1 2 3 4

RAS-24FSNQ

RAS-16FSNQ

RAS-14FSNQ ON OFF

Do not move #3, #5 pins.

1 2

Setting is required, when optional functions are required.

ON OFF

RAS-12FSNQ ON OFF

Test Run for Cooling Test Run for Heating Operation Operation

1 2 3 4 5 6

DSW5 Emergency Operation or Service Setting

Setting before Shipment

RAS-10FSNQ ON OFF

Setting is required, for test operation and operating the compressor.

* Setting before Shipment * The outdoor unit is located ON higher than indoor unit. (0 to 50m) OFF * The outdoor unit is located 1 2 lower than indoor unit. (0 to 20m)

ON OFF

RAS-8FSNQ ON OFF

DSW4 Test Operation and Service Setting

DSW3 Lift Difference Setting

Setting before Shipment

By using switch DSW4, the unit is started or stopped after 10 to 20 seconds after the switch is operated. Number this outdoor unit to distinguish from other outdoor units for service and maintenance. And write the number in the space right.

SEG1 DSW3 PSW1 DSW5

DSW7

PSW3

PSW2

PSW1

Manual Defrost

PSW2

Checking by

PSW3

7-Segment

• Setting for Transmitting It is required to set the refrigerant cycle Nos. and end terminal resistance for this H-link system. • Setting of Refrigerant Cycle No. In the same refrigerant cycle, set the same refrigerant cycle No. for the outdoor unit and the indoor units as shown below.

H-LINK Connection DSW1

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

No.0 Unit Set each outdoor unit from No. 0, 1, 2, etc. at site. (factory set: No. 0) • Setting of End Terminal Resistance Before shipment, No. 1 pin of DSW10 is set at the “ON” side. In the case that the outdoor units quantity in the same H-link is 2 or more, set No. 1 pin of DSW10 at the “OFF” side from the 2nd unit. If only one outdoor unit is used, no setting is required. Unit No.

Setting

Unit No.

Setting

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

Setting of End Terminal Resistance DSW10 Before Shipment Cancellation

ON 1 2 OFF

• Indoor Unit Quantity Smaller than 16 (including 16) Central Station, PSC-5C, CS-NET

Outdoor Units

Set Dip SW to the same Refrigerant Cycle No.

Indoor Units Remote Control Switch

NOTE: Refrigerant System setting is available on the following dip switches. Outdoor Unit: DSW1 Indoor Unit: DSW5 • Indoor Unit Quantity more from 17 to 32 As indoor unit No. setting is currently available up to 16. Therefore, the following setting is required. (1) Set No.5 pin of DSW4 at the “ON” side in the outdoor unit PCB. (2) Regarding indoor units Nos. up to 16, set the same refrigerant system No. of the outdoor unit. (3) Regarding indoor unit Nos. from 17 to 32, set the refrigerant system No. by adding 1(one) to the above (2). If not set, malfunction will occur. NOTE: Do not use the above refrigerant system No. in other refrigerant systems. <Dip Switch Setting Example (32 Indoor Units)> DSW4 1) Set No.5 of DSW4 to "ON".

1 2 3 4 5 6

Central Station, PSC-5S, CS-NET

2) Set Dip SW to the same Refrigerant Cycle No.

3) Set Dip SW to the same Refrigerant Cycle No. +1

Indoor Units Remote Control Switch Up to 16

Remote Control Switch from 17 to 32

â&#x20AC;¢ Function Setting Turn OFF all power source before setting. Start Turn ON DSW4 - No.4 Turn ON DSW5 - No.8 SLo Defrost Setting

The next indication is shown by pressing PSW. PSW2: PSW3:

Not Prepared

Write the set function number in the below space.

Circulator Function at Heating Thermo-OFF

SET

Turn OFF DSW5 - No.8 Turn OFF DSW4 - No.4

SEG2

PSW1

Cancellation of Outdoor Hot-Start Limit.

END of Setting

Not Available

Available

Not Available

PSW1 Available

Not Available

PSW1

SET

Available

Long Piping Setting

Not Available

SEG1 Not Available

PSW1

SET

Available

SET

Available

Night-Shift (Low Noise)

Not Available

Low Noise Setting

Not Available

PSW1

SET Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient Temp. Limit of Heating

SET Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient Temp. Limit of Cooling

Available

SET

Available

Not Available

Fixing of Demand Function

Not Available

PSW1 Available

Not Available

SET Wave Function Setting

PSW1

SET

Available

Change of Defrost Condition

Not Available

SET

PSW1

PSW1 Available

Not Available

PSW1

SET Not Prepared

Available

Not Available

PSW1 Available

SET

â&#x20AC;¢ Selection of Input Signal Setting Table SEG1

Turn OFF all power source before setting. Start

Turn ON DSW4 - No.4 Turn ON DSW5 - No.7

The next indication is shown by pressing PSW. PSW2: PSW3:

Input

Output

Fixing Heating Mode

Operation Signal

Fixing Cooling Mode

Alarm Signal

Demand

Comp. ON Signal

Outdoor Fan Run

Defrost Signal

Forced Stoppage

Demand (Current Limit 60%)

Demand (Current Limit 70%)

Demand (Current Limit 80%)

Demand (Current Limit 100%)

Do not set same function to multiple input port.

END of Setting

Turn OFF DSW5 - No.7 Turn OFF DSW4 - No.4 Input Setting 3 CN18 1-2

Write the set function number in the below space.

PSW1

Setting Details are according to Setting Table.

SEG2 Input Setting 1 CN17 1-2

SEG1

Factory Setting

SET Output Setting 1 CN16 1-2

PSW1

SET Input Setting 2 CN17 2-3

SET

Factory Setting

PSW1

SET Factory Setting

Output Setting 2 CN16 1-3

Factory Setting

PSW1

SET

Test Run

When installation is completed, perform test run according to the following procedure, and hand over the system to the customer. Perform test run regarding indoor units one by one in order, and confirm that the electrical wiring and the refrigerant piping are correctly connected. Start the indoor units one by one in order to confirm that they are correctly numbered. Test run should be performed according to the Table 7.2. And use the Table 7.1 for recording test run.

Do not operate the system until all the check points have been cleared. (A) Check to ensure that the unit appearance and inside of the unit are not damaged. (B) Check to ensure that the fan is placed on the center of the fan casing and do not touch with the fan casing. (C) Check whether or not the electrical wiring of the indoor units and the outdoor units are connected as shown in the chapter “6. ELECTRICAL WIRING”. Confirm that the screw does not loose and each wiring is connected correctly. Check for fixing screw in detail. (D) Confirm that the leakage of the refrigerant does not exist. The flare nuts are sometimes loosened by vibration during transportation. (E) Check that the refrigerant piping and the electrical wiring conform to the same system, and check that the dip switch setting of the refrigerant cycle No. (DSW1 [O.U.], DSW5 [I.U.]) and the unit number (RSW) for the indoor units apply to the system. Confirm that the dip switch setting on the printed circuit board of the indoor units and the outdoor units are correct. Especially, pay attention to the setting of lift between indoor units and outdoor unit, the refrigerant No. and the end terminal resistance. Refer to the chapter “6. ELECTRICAL WIRING”.

(F) Check to ensure that the electrical resistance is more than 1 megohm, by measuring the resistance between ground and the terminal of the electrical parts. If not, do not operate the system until the electrical leakage is found and repaired. Do not impress the voltage on the terminals for transmission 1 and 2. (G) Check to ensure that the stop valves of the outdoor unit are fully opened, and then start the system. (H) Check to ensure that each wire, L1, L2, L3, N and E is correctly connected at the power source. If incorrectly connected, the unit will not operate and the remote control switch will indicate the alarm code “05”. In this case, check and change the phase of the power source according to the attached seat on the reverse side of the service cover. (I) Check to ensure that switch on the main power source has been ON for more than 12 hours, to warm the compressor oil by the oil heater. FSN series does not operate within 4 hours after power supply (Stoppage Code: d1-22). In case of operating within 4 hours, release the protection control as follows: 1. Supply power to the outdoor and indoor units. 2. Wait for 30 seconds. 3. Push PSW1 and PSW3 on PCB more than 3 seconds at the same time. Pay attention to the following items while the system is running. (A) Do not touch any of the parts by hand at the discharge gas side, since the compressor chamber and the pipes at the discharge side are heated higher than 90°C. (B) DO NOT PUSH THE BUTTON OF THE MAGNETIC SWITCH(ES). It will cause a serious accident. Do not touch any electrical components for more than three minutes after turning OFF the main switch.

Caution for Insulation Resistance If total unit insulation resistance is lower than 1 megohm, the compressor insulation resistance may be low due to retained refrigerant in the compressor. This may occur if the unit has not been used for long periods. 1. Disconnect the cables to the compressor and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor itself. If the resistance value is over 1 megohm, then insulation failure has occurred of other electrical parts. 2. If the insulation resistance is less than 1 megohm, disconnect the compressor cable from the inverter PCB. Then, turn on the main power to apply current to the crankcase heater. After applying current for more than 3 hours, measure insulation resistance again. (Depending on the air conditions, pipe length or refrigerant conditions, it may be necessary to apply the current for a longer period of time.) Check the insulation resistance and reconnect the compressor. If the leakage breaker is activated, check the recommended size shown in Table 6.1.

NOTE 1. Confirm that field-supplied electrical components (main switch fuse, fuse-free breaker, earthleakage breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in the Technical Catalog I of the unit and ensure that the components comply with national and local codes. 2. Use shielded wires (≥0.75mm2) for field wiring to protect noise obstacle. (Total length of shielded wire shall be less then 1000m, and size of shielded wire shall comply with local codes.) 3. Check to ensure that the terminal for power source wiring (terminals “L1” to “L1” and “N” to “N” of each terminal board: AC380-415V). If not, some component will be damaged.

Table 7.1 Test Run and Maintenance Record MODEL:

SERIAL. No.

COMPRESSOR MFG. No.

CUSTOMER'S NAME AND ADDRESS:

DATE:

1. Is the rotation direction of the indoor coil fan correct? 2. Is the rotation direction of the outdoor coil fan correct? 3. Are there any abnormal compressor sounds? 4. Has the unit been operated at least twenty (20) minutes? 5. Check Room Temperature Inlet: No. 1 DB /WB Outlet:

/WB

Inlet: No. 5 DB Outlet: DB

/WB /WB

C, o C, o C, o

6. Check Outdoor Ambient Temperature o Inlet: DB C, Outlet: DB

No. 2 DB DB No. 6 DB DB

/WB /WB /WB /WB

WB WB

C, o C, o C, o

No. 3 DB DB No. 7 DB DB

/WB /WB /WB /WB

C, o C, o C, o

No. 4 DB DB No. 8 DB DB

/WB /WB /WB /WB

C C o C o o

7. Check Refrigerant Temperature: Operating Mode (Cool or Heat) o Discharge Gas Temperature: Td= C Liquid Pipe Temperature:

Te=

8. Check Pressure Discharge Pressure: Suction Pressure:

Pd= Ps=

9. Check Voltage Rated Voltage:

Operating Voltage:

L1-L2

Starting Voltage: Phase Imbalance:

kg/cm2G kg/cm2G

L1-L3

L2-L3

V 1-

V = Vm

10. Check Compressor Input Running Current Input: Running Current:

kW A

11. Is the refrigerant charge adequate? 12. Do the operation control devices operate correctly? 13. Do the safety devices operate correctly? 14. Has the unit been checked for refrigerant leakage? 15. Is the unit clean inside and outside? 16. Are all cabinet panels fixed? 17. Are all cabinet panels free from rattles? 18. Is the filter clean? 19. Is the heat exchanger clean? 20. Are the stop valves open? 21. Does the drain water flow smoothly from the drain pipe?

Table 7.2 Checking of Wire Connection by Test Run NOTE: "TEST RUN" shall be performed with each refrigerant cycle (each outdoor unit). (1) Turn ON the power source of the units. (2) Procedure for "TEST RUN" mode of remote control switch. Depress the "MODE" and the "CHECK" switches together for more than 3 seconds.

Counting Number of Connected Units

SET TEMP.

HIGH COOL

UNIT

A/C CHECK

If "TEST RUN" and the counting number of the connected units with the remote control switch (for example "05") are indicated on the remote control switch, the connection of remote control cable is correct.

(3)

Operation Lamp

MODE FAN SPEED

TEMP.

ON/OFF TIMER

RESET

MODE VENTI LOUVER

CHECK TIME

CHECK

If no indication appears or the number of the units indicated is smaller than the actual number of the units, some abnormalities exist.

Remote Control Switch Indication No Indication

RUN / STOP

Remote Control Switch

Wrong Portions

Inspection Points after the Power Source OFF

* The power source of outdoor unit is not turned ON. * The connection of the remote control cable is incorrect. * The connecting wires of power supply line are incorrect or loosed.

* The power source of outdoor unit is not turned ON. Counting * The operating line wiring between indoor unit and number of outdoor unit is not connected. connected units * The setting of unit number is incorrect. is incorrect. * The connection of control cables between each indoor units are incorrect. (When one remote control switch controls multiple units.)

1. Connection between the connector and the wires: Red Wire - No.1, Black Wire - No.2, White Wire - No.3 2. Connecting Points of Remote Control Cable 3. Contact of Connectors of Remote Control Cable 4. Connecting Order of each Terminal Boards 5. Screw Fastening of each Terminal Boards

6. RSW Setting on Printed Circuit Board 7. Connection on the PCB 8. This is the same as items 1 to 3.

Back to (1) after checking (4) Select TEST RUNNING MODE by depressing MODE switch. (COOL or HEAT) (5) Depress "RUN/STOP" switch. The "TEST RUN" operation will be started. (The 2 hours OFF-TIMER will be set and the "TEST RUN" operation will be finished after 2 hours unit operation or by depressing the "RUN/STOP" switch again.) NOTE: The "TEST RUN" operation ignores the temperature limitation and ambient temperature during heating operation to have a continuous operation, but the protections are alive. Therefore, the protection may activate when the heating "TEST RUN" operation is performed in high ambient temperature.

(6)

If the units do not start or the operation lamp on the remote control switch is flashed, some abnormalities exist. Remote Control Switch Indication

The operation lamp flashes. (1 time/1 sec.) And the Unit No. and Alarm Code "03" flash.

Unit Condition The unit does not start.

Wrong Portions

Inspection Points after the Power Source OFF

The power source of outdoor unit is not turned ON. The connecting wires of operating line are incorrect or loosed.

1. Connecting Order of each Terminal Boards. The fuse on the PCB may be blown out due to miswiring. (Can be recovered only once by the DSW on the PCB) Procedures for Recovery When Transmitting Circuit Fuse is Blown Out 1. Correct the wiring for the terminal board. 2. Setting position of the model code are shown below. Indoor PCB DSW7 1 2 ON OFF

Outdoor PCB DSW10 ON OFF

1 2

2. Screw Fastening of each Terminal Boards. 3. Connecting Order of Power Line Between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit. The operation lamp flashes. (1 time/2 sec.)

The unit does not start.

Remote control cable is broken. Contact of connectors is not good. The connection of remote control cable is incorrect.

Indication or flash except above.

The unit does not The connection of the thermistors Check by the abnormality mode table 7.3. start, or starts once or other connectors are incorrect. (Do it by service people.) and then stops. Tripping of protector exists, or elses.

The operation lamp flashes. (1 time/1 sec.) And the Unit No. 00. Alarm Code dd and Unit Code E.00 flash.

The unit does not start.

The connection of the remote control cable between indoor units is incorrect.

Back to (1) after checking

This is the same as items (3)-1, 2 and 3.

Check by the abnormality mode table 7.3. (Do it by service people.)

Table 7.3 Alarm Code Code No. 01

Indoor Unit

Tripping of Protection Device

Outdoor Unit

Tripping of Protection Device

Transmission

Inverter

Abnormality between Indoor and Outdoor (or Indoor) Inverter Trip of Outdoor Unit

Category

04 (*) 05 06

Abnormality of Fan Controller Transmission Voltage Drop

07 08 09 11 12 13 14 19 21 22 23 24 29 31 32 35 38

Cycle Outdoor Unit

Sensor on Indoor Unit

Sensor on Outdoor Unit

System

39 43 44 45

Pressure

47 51 52 53 54

Content of Abnormality

Inverter

Abnormality of Power Source Wiring Voltage Drop in Outdoor Unit Excessively Low or High Voltage to Outdoor Unit Decrease in Discharge Gas Superheat Increase in Discharge Gas Temperature Tripping of Protection Device Inlet Air Thermistor Outlet Air Thermistor Freeze Protection Thermistor Gas Piping Thermistor Tripping of Protection Device High Pressure Sensor Outdoor Air Thermistor Discharge Gas Thermistor Evaporating Thermistor Low Pressure Sensor Incorrect Setting of Outdoor and Indoor Unit Abnormal Transmission of Other Indoor Unit Incorrect Setting in Indoor Unit No. Abnormality of Protective Circuit in Outdoor Unit Abnormality of Running Current at Constant Compressor Pressure Ratio Decrease Protection Activating Low Pressure Increase Protection Activating High Pressure Increase Protection Activating Low Pressure Decrease Protection Activating Abnormality of Current Sensor for Inverter Thermal Protection Activating Overcurrent Protection Activating ISPM Protection Activating Increase in Inverter Fin Temperature

Outdoor Fan

Abnormality of Detection for Fan Motor Position Fan Controller Protection Activating

58 EE

Compressor

Abnormality of Fan Controller Compressor Protection

Leading Cause Failure of Fan Motor, Drain Discharge, PCB, Relay. Failure of Compressor, Refrigerant Quantity, Inverse Phase. Incorrect Wiring. Failure of PCB. Tripping of Fuse. Failure in Transmission of PCB for Inverter. Failure in Transmission of Fan Controller. Reverse Phase Incorrect Wiring. Voltage Drop. Incorrect Wiring. Tripping of Fuse. Excessive Refrigerant Charge. Failure of Thermistor, Wiring. Insufficient Refrigerant. Failure of Thermistor, Wiring. Failure of Fan Motor, Incorrect Wiring. Failure of Thermistor, Sensor, Connection.

Failure of Fan Motor, Incorrect Wiring. Failure of Thermistor, Sensor, Connection.

Incorrect Setting of Capacity Code. Failure of Power Supply, PCB in Other Indoor Unit. Existence of the same Indoor Unit No. Incorrect Connection to PCB in Outdoor Unit. Incorrect Wiring. Failure of Compressor, Inverter, Power Supply. Overload to Indoor in Cooling. High Temperature or Outdoor Air. Overload Operation. Excessive Refrigerant. Vacuum Condition in Cycle Failure of Expansion Valve. Insufficient Refrigerant. Failure of Current Sensor. Overload, Overcurrent, Locking to Compressor. Overheating of Inverter. PCB. Abnormal Inverter Fin Thermistor, Abnormal Outdoor Fan Abnormal Detection Circuit of Transmission Overcurrent, Abnormal Fan Controller Fin Abnormal Fan Speed Failure of Compressor.

(*) " " flashes.

Safety and Control Device Setting

• Compressor Protection The compressor is protected by the following devices and their combinations. (1) High Pressure Switch: This switch cuts out the operation of the compressor when the discharge pressure exceeds the setting. (2) Oil Heater: This band type heater protects against oil foaming during cold starting, as it is energized while the compressor is stopped. RAS-8FSNQ RAS-10FSNQ RAS-12FSNQ

Model For Compressor Pressure Switches High

RAS-18FSNQ

Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable (each one for each compressor) MPa

Cut-In

MPa

3.20+0.15

20 x 4

20 x 6

40 x 2

40 x 3 Non-Adjustable

40 x 4

min.

3 Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable

Capacity CCP Timer Setting Time

4.15

-0.05 -0.15

For Condenser Fan Motor Internal Thermostat Cut-Out Cut-In For DC Fan Module Fuse Capacity

4.15

-0.05 -0.15

4.15

-0.05 -0.15

130+5

(each one for each motor) 130+5

130+5

83+15

RAS-20FSNQ RAS-22FSNQ

RAS-24FSNQ RAS-26FSNQ

RAS-28FSNQ RAS-30FSNQ RAS-32FSNQ

o o

Model For Compressor Pressure Switches

Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable (each one for each compressor)

Cut-Out

MPa

-0.05 4.15 -0.15

4.15

Cut-In

MPa

3.20+0.15

20 x 8

20 x 10

20 x 12

40 x 5

40 x 6 Non-Adjustable

40 x 7

min.

3 Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable

Fuse Capacity 3φ 380/415V 50Hz Oil Heater Capacity CCP Timer Setting Time For Condenser Fan Motor Internal Thermostat

-0.05 -0.15

4.15

-0.05 -0.15

130+5

(each one for each motor) 130+5

130+5

83+15

Cut-Out

Cut-In

For DC Fan Module Fuse Capacity

RAS-14FSNQ RAS-16FSNQ

Cut-Out

Fuse Capacity 3φ 380/415V 50Hz Oil Heater

High

• Fan Motor Protection Internal Thermostat: Embedded in the fan motor winding, this internal thermostat cuts out the operation of the fan motor when the fan motor winding temperature exceeds the setting.

Common

9.1

Installation Space

Air Outlet

(1) Basic Space Rear Air Intake Space

Min. 500mm

Front Air Intake Space

Min. 500 to *900mm

Air Inlet

Top View

Side View

*) A space of 900mm is recommended for easier service work.

(2) Installation Space for Single Unit (a) In case that the front side and either of the sides are open. No Limit to Wall Height

Min

0mm

. 30

â&#x20AC;˘ In case that the surrounding wall exists. Min. 300 + h1/2 mm

No Limit to Wall Height

h1 (mm)

Min. 10mm

Front

Min. 10mm

500mm h2 (mm)

Min. 1500mm

Min. 300 + h1/2 mm Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Top View *) A space of 900mm is recommended for easer service work.

â&#x20AC;˘ In case that the upper side obstacles exists.

A = Min. 1500mm

Open Space

Surrounding space; front, rear, left & right sides should be open

In case that dimension A is shorter than 1500mm or the surrounding space of the unit is not open, provide the air outlet duct to prevent the air short-circuiting. See pages 50 to 58 for further information. 45

(3) Multiple Installation Space Keep the upper side open to prevent air short-circuiting. (a) In case that the front and either of the sides are open. 1 Installation in the same Direction

(Top View)

Min. 900mm

No Limit to Wall Height

Front Min. 500mm

Min. 10mm Min. 20mm

Front

Min. 20mm

Min. 1000mm

Min. 900mm Provide a distance of min.1000mm to the next unit.

Min. 500mm

Min. 10mm

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

Rear to Rear Installation (Top View) No Limit to Wall Height Min. 900mm Front

Min. 900mm

Min. 10mm Min. 20mm Min. 20mm Min. 900mm Provide a distance of min.1000mm to the next unit.

Min. 20mm

Front

Min. 20mm

Min. 1000mm

Min. 900mm Min. 10mm

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

(b) In case that the surrounding wall exists. 1 Installation in the same Direction

(Top View) Min. 300 + h1/2 mm

No Limit to Side Wall Height

h1 (mm)

Min. 10mm

Min. 20mm

Min. 10mm

Front Min. 900mm

500mm

h2 (mm) Min. 300 + h1/2 mm

Min. 10mm

Min. 20mm

Min. 10mm

Front

Min. 900mm

1500mm

Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm *) A space of 900mm is recommended for easier service work.

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

Rear to Rear Installation (Case 1)

(Top View)

No Limit to Side Wall Height

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm Front

h2 (mm)

1500mm Min. 200mm

h2 (mm) 1500mm

Min. 400mm

Min. 400mm Min. 200mm Min. 900mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm Min. 900mm Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

*) A space of 900mm is recommended for easier service work.

Front Min. 200mm

Min. 400mm

Min. 200mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

Rear to Rear Installation (Case 2) (Top View)

No Limit to Side Wall Height

Min. (500 to *900) + h2/2 mm

h2 (mm)

1500mm

Min. 10mm

Front Min. 20mm

Min. 20mm

Min. 1600mm

h2 (mm) Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm 1500mm

Front

Min. 10mm

Min. 1600mm

Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Min. 10mm Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

*) A space of 900mm is recommended for easier service work. Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

Rear to Rear Installation (Case 3) (Top View)

No Limit to Side Wall Height Fence (Field-Supplied)

Min. (500 to *900) + h2/2 mm Front

h2 (mm)

1500mm

Min. 10mm Min. 900mm

h2 (mm)

Min. 10mm Min. 20mm

Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm Min. 10mm

Min. 900mm

1500mm

Front Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Min. 10mm Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

*) A space of 900mm is recommended for easier service work.

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

*) In case that the rear space is less than 1600mm and the side space is less than 400mm, apply a field-supplied fence for each unit. Refer to the explanation of the hood on pages 51 to 58. Fence

Min. 300mm

NOTE: In case of 18 to 32 HP, there are two(2) air outlets. 48

(4) Serial Installation Space (a) In case that the front and either of the sides are open. No Limit to Wall Height

No Limit to Wall Height

Min. 20mm

Min. 10mm

Min. 400mm Min. 20mm Min. 400mm

Min. 900mm Min. 300mm

Provide a distance of min.1000mm to the next unit.

No Limit to Number of Units

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

(b) In case that the surrounding wall exists.

(Top View)

No Limit to Wall Height

Min. 300 + h1/2 mm

h1 (mm) 500mm h2 (mm)

Min. 10mm

Min. 10mm Min. 20mm

Min. 1500mm

Min. 20mm

Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Min. 300 + h1/2 mm Min. (500 to *900)+ h2/2 mm

Max. 3 Units in a row (Max. 2 units in a row for 18 to 32 HP)

*) A space of 900mm is recommended for easier service work.

(5) Consideration to Seasonal Wind Avoid the installation that the air intake side (Rear) of the unit is faced directly against a seasonal strong wind.

Correct Seasonal Wind Air Intake Side (Rear)

Air Intake Side (Rear)

Incorrect

Windbreak Fence

Air Intake Side (Rear)

Seasonal Wind

Min. 300mm

Correct

Air Intake Side (Rear) (In this case, defrosting time extends.)

(6) Consideration to Snow Apply an air discharge hood, an air intake hood and a higher foundation to prevent accumulation of snow on the air outlet and air inlet. Incorrect

Correct Air Discharge Hood (Field-Supplied) Seasonal Wind

Seasonal Wind

Air Intake Hood (Field-Supplied)

Foundation Height with a consideration to a snowfall.

NOTES: 1. See pages 51 to 58 for the reference of the dimension of the hood. 2. Install the unit on a sunny place such as east or south side of the building rather than north side. (7) Prevention of Short-circuiting For prevention of short-circuiting between suction air and discharge air, apply a field-supplied air discharge hood shown on pages 51 to 58.

(8) Dimensions of the Hood (Field-Supplied) • Following figures show the recommended dimensions of air discharge hood and air intake hood for the outdoor unit. • Apply steel plate of thickness 1mm for hood part, and of thickness 1.6mm for flange part and stay part. • Apply steel plate with holes for hood part of air intake hood. • Apply munsell code 2.5Y 8/2 beige color for painting the hood • Apply M5 tapping screws for fixing the hood. • Reinforce the hood with supports, if they are necessary in consideration of the weather such as a strong wind.

(a) Hoods for RAS-8FSNQ, RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ Snow Protection Hood for RAS-8FSNQ, RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ 898

758

5 2

1 6 789

5-φ60

3 10

2-Slotted Hole

880

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

This Snow Protection Hood is field-supplied. The details on the specifications are found in Technical Bulletin. Please contact your local agent, as the occasion arises.

Rear Suction Hood

205

Details of Slotted Hole 12 R

364

Enlarged View of A 7 R

364

Q'ty Part Name 1 Right Plate 1 Left Plate 1 Front Panel 1 1 Front Panel 2 1 Front Panel 3 1 Side Plate 1 Left Fixing Plate for Front Right Fixing Plate for Front 1 1 Left Fixing Plate for Rear Right Fixing Plate for Rear 1

926

4-Slotted Hole

8.5

4-φ8 Safety Plate Fixing Hole to Prevent Overturning

200

A 400

φ15

400

1086

4-φ6.5

No. 1 2 3 4

2 933 400

Part Name Right Plate Left Plate Upper Front Plate Lower Front Plate

Q'ty 1 1 1 1

949

Right and Left Suction Hood

400 190 210

360 200

400

Details of Slotted Hole

400

1012

2-Slotted Hole 2 Locations

200

φ15

380

Enlarged View of A 8.5

for RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ

400

for RAS-8FSNQ

No. 1 2 3 4

Part Name Right Plate Left Plate Upper Front Plate Lower Front Plate

Q'ty 1 1 1 1

Attaching Example of Snow Protection Hood for RAS-8FSNQ, RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ 898

Snow Protection Hood Right Suction Hood

Left Suction Hood

Safety Wire Rope to Prevent Overturning

2330

Rear Suction Hood

200

950

200

750

Enlarged View of A 2-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw

Before attaching the Snow Protection Hood, remove marked with "∗" screws of the unit and use them when fix the Snow Protection Hood as shown in the figure.

400

View from B 2-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

(b) Hoods for RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ Snow Protection Hood for RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ 1 165

Screw

758

5 1

6 789

5-φ60

3 9 59

4-φ8

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

This Snow Protection Hood is field-supplied. The details on the specifications are found in Technical Bulletin. Please contact your local agent, as the occasion arises.

Part Name Q'ty 1 Right Plate 1 Left Plate 1 Front Panel 1 1 Front Panel 2 1 Front Panel 3 1 Side Plate 1 Left Fixing Plate for Front Right Fixing Plate for Front 1 1 Left Fixing Plate for Rear 1 Right Fixing Plate for Rear

205

Details of Slotted Hole 12 R

494

Enlarged View of A 27

494

1193

1147

Rear Suction Hood

10 2-Slotted Hole

7 R

8.5

200

Hole for Fixing Plate (to Prevent Overturning)

A φ15

400

1086

4-φ6.5

No. 1 2 3 4

1 1193

Part Name Right Plate Left Plate Upper Front Plate Lower Front Plate

Q'ty 1 1 1 1

1209

400

Right and Left Suction Hood

φ15

Details of Slotted Hole 7 R

360 200

380

400

1012

2-Slotted Hole 2 Locations

8.5

400

Enlarged View of A

No. 1 2 3 4

Part Name Right Plate Left Plate Upper Front Plate Lower Front Plate

Q'ty 1 1 1 1

Attaching Example of Snow Protection Hood for RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ 1165

Snow Protection Hood

Right Suction Hood

2330

Left Suction Hood

200

1210

Rear Suction Hood

750

200

Enlarged View of A 2-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw

Before attaching the Snow Protection Hood, remove marked with "∗" screws of the unit and use them when fix the Snow Protection Hood as shown in the figure.

Safety Wire Rope to Prevent Overturning

400

View from B 2-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

758

789

Left Side Plate

Front Panel 1

Front Panel 2

Front Panel 3

Center Pole

Side Plate

Left Fixing Plate for Front

Right Fixing Plate for Front

Center Fixing Plate for Front

Left Fixing Plate for Rear

Right Fixing Plate for Rear

Center Fixing Plate for Rear

205

364

Details of Slotted Hole 12 R

Enlarged View of A

Details of Slotted Hole 7

R 12

377

Right Side Plate

φ15

400

377

Q'ty

205

12 946

8.5

This Snow Protection Hood is field-supplied. The details on the specifications are found in Technical Bulletin. Please contact your local agent, as the occasion arises.

364

Part Name

No.

924 1848

Rear Suction Hood

946

200

924

4-φ6.5

400

1086

No.

1 6

4-Slotted Hole 932

932

Part Name

Q'ty

Right Plate

Left Plate

Right Upper Front Plate

Left Upper Front Plate

Right Lower Front Plate

Left Lower Front Plate

Center Pole

28 400

1909

Right and Left Suction Hood

Enlarged View of A

φ15

400

Details of Slotted Hole 7 R

400

1012

2-Slotted Hole 2 Locations

No.

360 200

8.5

7 R

380

Part Name

Q'ty

Right Plate

Left Plate

Upper Front Plate

Lower Front Plate

Attaching Example of Snow Protection Hood for RAS-18FSNQ, RAS-20FSNQ and RAS-22FSNQ 1866

758

Snow Protection Hood

Left Suction Hood Right Suction Hood

Safety Wire Rope to Prevent Overturning Rear Suction Hood

2330

1910

750

Enlarged View of A 2-Fixing Screw

View from B

4-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw ∗3-Fixing Screw

Before attaching the Snow Protection Hood, remove marked with "∗" screws of the unit and use them when fix the Snow Protection Hood as shown in the figure.

400

2-Fixing Screw

Fixing Scrwew

4-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

Fixing Scrwew ∗3-Fixing Screw

(d) Hoods for RAS-24FSNQ, RAS-26FSNQ, RAS-28FSNQ, RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ Snow Protection Hood for RAS-24FSNQ, RAS-26FSNQ, RAS-28FSNQ, RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ 2386

758

6 2

1 789

1184

200

1184

9 No.

2368

This Snow Protection Hood is field-supplied. The details on the specifications are found in Technical Bulletin. Please contact your local agent, as the occasion arises.

1206

Part Name

1206

Q'ty

Right Side Plate

Left Side Plate

Front Panel 1

Front Panel 2

Front Panel 3

Center Pole

Side Plate

Left Fixing Plate for Front

Right Fixing Plate for Front

10 Center Fixing Plate for Front

11 Left Fixing Plate for Rear

12 Right Fixing Plate for Rear

13 Center Fixing Plate for Rear

Details of Slotted Hole 12 R

10 8

Rear Suction Hood 507

507

205

494

Enlarged View of A

Details of Slotted Hole 7

8.5

400

φ15

205

494

1086

4-φ6.5

400

No.

1 6

4-Slotted Hole 1192

1192

400

Part Name

Q'ty

Right Plate

Left Plate

Right Upper Front Plate

Left Upper Front Plate

Right Lower Front Plate

Left Lower Front Plate

Center Pole

2430

Right and Left Suction Hood 3

Enlarged View of A

Details of Slotted Hole 7 R

8.5

400

2-Slotted Hole 2 Locations

400

1012

φ15

360 200

No.

Part Name

Q'ty

Right Plate

Left Plate

Upper Front Plate

Lower Front Plate

380

Attaching Example of Snow Protection Hood for RAS-24FSNQ, RAS-26FSNQ, RAS-28FSNQ, RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ 2386

758

Left Suction Hood

Snow Protection Hood

Right Suction Hood

Safety Wire Rope to Prevent Overturning

2330

Rear Suction Hood

2430

750

Enlarged View of A 2-Fixing Screw

View from B

4-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

∗2-Fixing Screw ∗3-Fixing Screw

Before attaching the Snow Protection Hood, remove marked with "∗" screws of the unit and use them when fix the Snow Protection Hood as shown in the figure.

400

2-Fixing Screw

Fixing Screw

4-Fixing Screw

2-Fixing Screw

Fixing Screw ∗3-Fixing Screw

9.2

Piping System and Multi-kit

(1) A maximum piping length of 150 meters and maximum lift of 50 meters between indoor units and outdoor unit is applicable. (2) Utilizing the SD (suction/discharge air temperature) control to maintain the most appropriate refrigerant flow, a maximum lift of 50 meters, which is almost equivalent to a 20 floor height, between indoor units is available. 9.2.1 Piping System Example In addition to the epoch-making “Uni-Piping System”, where the same size pipe as the main refrigerant pipe can be utilized, the “Down-Size Piping System” is also available for piping cost reduction.

Line Branch 1 (Uni-Piping)

(Only for 8 to 10HP)

Piping System Outdoor Unit

1st Multi-Kit to Last Multi-Kit

Indoor Unit

E-102SN

Indoor Unit

Outdoor Unit to 1st Branch Outdoor Unit

Pipe Size (φmm) (Gas / Liquid)

RAS - 8FSNQ

19.05 / 9.53

RAS - 10FSNQ

22.2 / 9.53

Line Branch 2 (Down-Size Piping)

Gas/Liquid (φmm) Equivalent Piping Length < 100m Equivalent Piping Length ≥ 100m *1)

8HP

19.05/9.53

22.2/12.7

10HP

22.2/9.53

25.4(28.6)*/12.7

12 and 14HP

25.4/12.7

28.6/15.88

16HP

28.6/12.7

31.75(34.92)*/15.88

18 to 24HP

28.6/15.88

31.75(34.92)*/19.05

26 to 32HP

31.75(34.92)*/19.05

38.1/22.2 < Multi-kit to Indoor Unit > Pipe Size Indoor Unit Capacity 1.0 to 1.5HP

8 to 10HP

E-102SN

12 to 16HP

E-162SN

18 to 24HP

E-242SN

26 to 32HP

E-302SN

Multi-Kit

8HP 10HP 12 to 16HP 18 to 32HP

E-102SN E-162SN E-242SN E-302SN

15m

15.88/6.35 *2)

15m

2.3 to 6.0HP

15.88/9.53

30m

Indoor Unit

*3) When the Equivalent Piping Length ≥100m, choose as the following table:

Outdoor Unit Capacity

12.7/6.35 *2)

1.8 to 2.0HP

30m 19.05/9.53 30m 22.2/9.53 10HP *2): In the case that liquid piping length is longer than 15m, use φ9.53 pipe and reducer (field-supplied).

< First Branch > *3) Multi-Kit

Max. Length of Liquid Pipe

8HP

Outdoor Unit Capacity

Gas/Liquid (φmm)

Indoor Unit

Indoor Unit L3

Indoor Unit

L3 L2

< Piping Size and Multi-kit after First Branch> Total I.U. Capacity in HP 26~ 18~25.99 16~17.99 13~15.99 9~12.99 6~8.99 lower than 6 *4) Total I.U. Capacity in HP 5~10 5~8

Gas/Liquid (mm) 31.75(34.92)*/19.05 28.6/15.88 28.6/12.7 25.4(28.6)*/12.7 22.2/9.53 19.05/9.53 15.88/9.53 Number of Branches 8 branches 4 branches

Multi-kit Model E-302SN E-242SN E-162SN E-102SN E-84HSN *4) E-108HSN *4)

Multi-Kit E-108HSN E-84HSN

Header Branch

Model of Multi-Kit Outdoor Unit RAS-8FSNQ

Outdoor Unit

RAS-10FSNQ

2 to 4 Branches

2 to 8 Branches

E- 84HSN

E- 108HSN

Gas Piping Size A φ19.05 or φ22.2

Indoor Unit

9.2.2 Directions for Refrigerant Piping Work (1) Total System of SET-FREE (FSN Series)

Outdoor Unit

Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit

Height Difference between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit

Gas/Liquid (φmm) Equivalent Piping Length < 100m Equivalent Piping Length >100m

RAS-8FSNQ

19.05/9.53

22.2/12.7

RAS-10FSNQ

22.2/9.53

25.4(28.6)/12.7

RAS-12FSNQ, RAS-14FSNQ

25.4/12.7

28.6/15.88

RAS-16FSNQ RAS-18FSNQ, RAS-20FSNQ RAS-22FSNQ, RAS-24FSNQ RAS-26FSNQ, RAS-28FSNQ RAS-30FSNQ, RAS-32FSNQ

28.6/12.7

31.75(34.92)/15.88

28.6/15.88

31.75(34.92)/19.05

38.1/22.2

*Refer to the next page.

Max. 50m (When the outdoor unit is installed lower than the indoor unit.) Max. 40m

Actual Length: Max. 150m (Equivalent Length: Max. 175m)

Height Difference between Indoor Units Max. 15m

Install Multi-kits Horizontally Max. 30m

ATTENTION 1. The liquid piping and the gas piping shall be the same piping length and run along the same route. 2. Install multi-kit as close to the indoor unit as possible. 3. The HITACHI’s multi-kits (Optional Accessory as system parts) shall be used for the branch pipe to the indoor unit. 4. Install multi-kits at the same horizontal level.

(2) Applicable Height Difference According to Piping Length NOTES: 1. Piping: The piping sizes are as shown below (* Conditions). 2. DSW: Dip Switch on Outdoor Unit PCB1 (DSW3 shall be set when the outdoor unit is installed lower than indoor unit with height difference over 20m and when longer piping is required.) 50 Height Difference (m) When the outdoor unit is installed higher than the indoor unit

40 30 20 10 0

Total length between outdoor unit and each indoor units. 50

When the outdoor unit is installed lower than the indoor unit

n tti se 3 . W ed DS g e an th ch e e er b wh d to e e ng uir Ra req is

-10 -20 -30

100

150

Piping Length (m)

(Refer to FIg.2)

-40

*Conditions: Diameter of Liquid Piping

Outdoor Units RAS-8FSNQ, 10FSNQ

φ9.53

RAS-12FSNQ, 14FSNQ, 16FSNQ

φ12.7

RAS-18FSNQ, 20FSNQ, 22FSNQ, 24FSNQ

φ15.88

RAS-26FSNQ, 28FSNQ, 30FSNQ, 32FSNQ

φ19.05

Dip Sw3: Not Set (Factory-Supplied) Dip Sw3: Set

ON OFF

Fig. 1

50 Height Difference (m) When the outdoor unit is installed higher than the indoor unit

40 30 20 10 0

Total length between outdoor unit and each indoor units. 50

When the outdoor unit is installed lower than the indoor unit

100

150

Piping Length (m)

-10 -20 Range where the DSW3 setting is required to be changed.

-30 -40

*Conditions: Outdoor Units

Diameter of Liquid Piping

RAS-8FSNQ, 10FSNQ

φ12.7

RAS-12FSNQ, 14FSNQ, 16FSNQ

φ15.88

RAS-18FSNQ, 20FSNQ, 22FSNQ, 24FSNQ

φ19.05

RAS-26FSNQ, 28FSNQ, 30FSNQ, 32FSNQ

φ22.2

Dip Sw3: Not Set (Factory-Supplied) Dip Sw3: Set

ON OFF

Fig. 2 63

9.2.3 Distribution Method (1) Line Distribution With line distribution method, it is possible to make the first or the second main pipe distribution within the third branch. And do not make the main pipe distribution, at or after the fourth branch. (a) Branch Method Correct

3rd

(recommended)

Incorrect

3rd

2nd OU

2nd

1st

Correct

1st

Incorrect

(acceptable)

Incorrect

2nd

3rd

1st

3rd

2nd 1st

1st

2nd

Main Pipe Distribution

2nd

Main Pipe Distribution

Incorrect

Main Pipe Distribution: Distribution from One Multi-kit to Two Multi-kits (b) Installation Position 1 Horizontal Installation â&#x20AC;˘ Locate the branch pipes on the same horizontal plane. â&#x20AC;˘ Make the straight length a minimum of 0.5m after the vertical bend. Correct

Incorrect

Upward

Straight Length Min. 0.5m

Downward

A o

Keep horizontal. Maximum inclination no more than 30o 2

Max. 30o Inclination

View from A

Vertical Installation Correct

Correct

Upward Branch

Downward Branch

Upward

Upward Straight Length Min. 0.5m

Straight Length Min. 0.5m

4th

Downward

Main Pipe Distribution

(2) Header Distribution (a) Branch Method Do not connect two header branches consecutively. Correct

Indoor Unit

Incorrect

Header

Header Main Pipe Main Pipe

Indoor Unit Main Pipe Header

(b) Installation Position Install the header horizontally. Gas Piping

Liquid Piping

To Outdoor Unit Horizontally

Horizontally

To Indoor Unit To Outdoor Unit

To Indoor Unit

Seal the end of branch pipes which are not connected, by brazing factory-supplied closing pipes. (3) Combination Branch â&#x20AC;˘ It is possible to connect the header to the second line branch, when the first branch is also the line branch. â&#x20AC;˘ Do not connect a line branch to a header branch. Correct

Correct

Incorrect

9.2.4 Installation (1) Piping Connection When connecting liquid piping for the unit with a capacity of 1.0HP and 2HP where the piping length is 15 meters or longer, apply a piping size of Ď&#x2020;9.53. Fix the connecting pipe as shown in the following figure. Utilize the insulation attached to the indoor unit.

1. Slide the flare nut onto the connecting pipe. 2. Flare the tip of the connecting pipe. 3. Connect the pipes with the flare nut.

Fixed with Cord or Vinyl Tape Insulate this part with the attached insulation.

Insulation Attached to Indoor Unit Field-Supplied Refrigerant Piping

Indoor Unit Field-Supplied Insulation

Connecting Pipe

Brazing

Utilize clean copper pipes without any moisture or foreign material on the internal surface of pipes. When connecting refrigerant piping, cut copper pipes with a pipe cutter and blow the pipes with nitrogen. Do not utilize a saw and a grindstone or others which cause copper powder. When cutting pipes, secure the part for brazing as shown below. B: Minimum Depth (mm) 6 7 8 10 12 14

A: Outer Diameter of Pipe (mm) Over 5, Below 8 Over 8, Below 12 Over 12, Below 16 Over 16, Below 25 Over 25, Below 35 Over 35, Below 45

Cautions for Refrigerant Pipe Ends When installing pipe through the wall, secure a cap at the end of the pipe. Incorrect

Correct

Hole

Correct

Incorrect

Incorrect Rain water can enter.

Hole Attach a cap or vinyl tape.

Do not place the pipe directly on the ground.

Attach a cap or vinyl tape.

Attach a cap or vinyl bag with rubber band.

(2) Insulation Attach insulation packed with Multi-Kit to each branch utilizing vinyl tape. Also attach insulation to piping supplied in the field.

NOTE When polyethylene foam is applied, a thickness of 10mm for the liquid piping and 15mm to 20mm for the gas piping is recommended. Use the insulation with the heat resistance to 100Â°C, as the temperature of the gas piping is high. For Line Branch

For Header Branch

Factory-Supplied Insulation

Factory-Supplied Insulation Do not leave a gap between the insulation.

Field-Supplied Insulation

Do not leave a gap.

Perform insulation work after the surface temperature decreases to the room temperature, If not, insulation material may melt. If the ends of the piping system are open after accomplishing piping work, securely attach caps or vinyl bags to the ends of the piping, avoiding the invasion of moisture and dust. For Line Branch

For Header Branch Field-Supplied Piping

Gas Piping

Field-Supplied Piping

Cap

Cap Cap

Cap Field-Supplied Piping

Caps

Field-Supplied Piping

Liquid Piping

Cap Field-Supplied Piping

Caps Field-Supplied Piping

9.2.5 Suspension of Refrigerant Piping

Use refrigerant R410A in the refrigerant cycle. Do not charge oxygen, acetylene or other flammable and poisonous gases into the refrigerant cycle when performing a leakage test or an air-tight test. These types of gases are extremely dangerous and can cause an explosion. It is recommended that compressed air, nitrogen or refrigerant be used for these types of tests. (1) Piping Materials (a) Prepare field-supplied copper pipes. (b) The piping size should be selected using the following figures. (c) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside. Before connecting pipes, blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air, to remove any dust and foreign materials. (2) Suspension of Refrigerant Piping Suspend the refrigerant piping at certain points and prevent the refrigerant piping from touching the weak part of the building such as wall, ceiling, etc. (If touched, abnormal sound may occur due to the vibration of the piping. Pay special attention in case of short piping length.)

(a) Do not fix the refrigerant piping directly with the metal fittings (The refrigerant piping may expand and contract). Some examples for suspension method are shown below.

For Suspending Heavies

For Piping Along Wall

For Instant Installation Work

There are 2 kinds of surface treatment such as; standard chromating and ceramic coating treatment (*). <Ceramic Coating> Coating Treatment with triple strong coating on the iron material surface, and has the following characters. â&#x20AC;˘ Corrosion Resistance: Superior in adhesion and corrosion resistance due to triple coating â&#x20AC;˘ Weather Resistance and Heat Resistance: Strong resistance to ultra-violet rays and solar heat due to ceramic coating â&#x20AC;˘ Surface Hardness: Superior in excoriation resistance due to high hardness of the surface 68

9.3

Electrical Wiring

All the field wiring and electrical components must comply with local codes. 9.3.1 Electrical Wiring of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit Connect the electrical wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit, as shown in Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 of each indoor unit content. Check to ensure that the terminal for power source wiring (terminals “L1” to “L1” and “N” to “N” of each terminal board: AC380-415V) and intermediate wires (Operating Line: terminals “1” to “1” and “2” to “2” of each terminal board: DC5V) between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit coincide correctly. If not, some component will be damaged. (1) Follow local codes and regulations when performing electrical wiring. (2) Connect the power source wiring to each outdoor unit and ELB and knife switch should be used for each outdoor unit. (3) Connect the power source wiring to each indoor unit and perform an ELB and knife switch per indoor units with the refrigerant piping connected to the same outdoor unit. (4) Connect the operation wiring to the units in the same refrigerant cycle (The refrigerant piping and the control wiring should be connected to the same indoor units). If the refrigerant piping and the control wiring are connected to the units in the different refrigerant cycle, it may cause a abnormal operation. (5) Use shielded twist pair wire (more than 0.75mm2) for operation wiring between outdoor unit and indoor unit, and operation wiring between indoor unit and indoor unit. (Total Wiring Length ≤ 1000m) (6) Use 2-core wire for the operating line (Do not use wire with more than 3 cores). (7) Use shielded wires for intermediate wiring to protect the units from noise obstacle at length of less than 300m and size complied with local code. <In Case of Non-used H-LINK> Connect the operating line for the units in the same refrigerant cycle (The operating line shall be connected to the indoor units with the refrigerant piping connected to the same outdoor unit) In the case that each of the refrigerant piping and the operating line is connected to the units of different refrigerant cycle, it may cause an abnormal operation. (8) Open a hole near the connection hole of power source wiring when multiple outdoor units are connected from one power source line. (8 to 10HP Only) (9) The recommended breaker sizes are shown in Table 6.1. (10) In the case that a conduit tube for field-wiring is not used, fix rubber bushes with adhesive on the panel.

9.3.2 H-LINK System

NOTE The H-LINK system can not be applied to the cycle with the old model unit or the unit with old tranmission. (1) Application The new H-LINK wiring system requires only two (2) transmission wires connecting each indoor unit and outdoor unit for up to 16 refrigerant cycles, and connecting wires for all indoor units and all outdoor units in series. This H-LINK system can be applied to the following models. • Indoor Unit • Outdoor Unit RPIFSNQ RASFSNQ RPIFSNQL RPIFSNQH RPIZFSNQ RCIFSNQ RCDFSN RPKFSNSM(1) RPFFSNE RPFIFSNE RPCFSN (2) Features The H-LINK has the following features; FEATURES: • The total wiring length is remarkably reduced. • Only one (1) connection is required for the wiring between the indoor unit and outdoor unit. • Easy wiring connection to the central controllers

SPECIFICATIONS: • Transmission Wire: 2-Wire • Polarity of Tranmission Wire: Non-Polar Wire • Maximum Outdoor Units To Be Connected: 16 Units per system • Maximum Indoor Units To Be Connected: 128 Units per cycle and 128 Units per H-LINK system • Maximum Wiring Length: Total 1000m (including CS-NET) • Recommended Cable: Twist Pair Cable with Shield, over 0.75mm2 (Refer to Item (5)) • Voltage: DC5V

NOTE Other cables except for Twist Pair Cable can not be used for H-LINK system. 70

(3) System Example of H-LINK (a) Using H-LINK System For Only Air Conditioners There are two typical cases of using H-LINK system; (1) Using H-LINK System For Only Air Conditioners, and (2) Using H-LINK System For Air Conditioners with Central Control Device, and the system examples are as shown below. 1

Line Connection with All Units

Line Connection for Each Floor Outdoor Units

Outdoor Units

DO NOT make a wiring loop

Indoor Units

Connection with One Main Line and Branch Lines for Units Outdoor Units

Indoor Units

(b) Using H-LINK System For Air Conditioners with Central Control Device 1

In case that H-LINK is applied when electrical wiring is performed.

In case that H-LINK is not applied when electrical wiring is performed.

NOTE 1. The maximum quantity of units to be connected is 16 outdoor units and 128 indoor units. 2. Do not make a wiring in a loop. 3. In the case of (b)- 2 as shown above, H-LINK is applied after the instrument wiring is completed. Therefore, the dip switches are required to be set according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Setting of Dip Switches on PCBâ&#x20AC;?.

(4) Dip Switch Setting of Indoor PCB and Outdoor PCB It is required to set dip switches of every indoor unit and outdoor unit and match of the transmission circuit impedance. (a) Dip Switch Setting <Dip Switch Setting Example> Cycle No. 0

DSW10 End Terminal Resistance

Cycle No. 1 ON

ON 1

DSW1 Refrigerant Cycle

Cycle No. 2

ON 2

1 2 3 4

Outdoor Units

Indoor Units DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle

1 2 3 4

(1)

(2)

(3)

Ref. Cycle No. RSW Indoor Unit Address

Name of Dip Switch

Mark

Refrigerant Cycle

DSW1

Outdoor Unit DSW10-1P

Setting Before Shipment ON 1 2 3 4

Refrigerant Cycle

DSW5

Indoor Unit

End Terminal Resistance

Indoor Unit Address

ON 1 2 3 4

RSW

Function For setting refrigerant cycle address of outdoor unit. Set the DSW1 not to overlap the setting of other outdoor units in the same H-LINK system. For matching impedance of transmission circuit. Set the DSW10 according to the quantity of outdoor units in the H-LINK system. For setting refrigerant cycle address of indoor units. Set the DSW5 corresponding to the address of outdoor unit in the same refrigerant cycle. For setting indoor unit address. Set the RSW not to overlap the setting of other indoor units in the same refrigerant cycle. (If not set, the automatic address function is performed.)

(b) Setting of End Terminal Resistance Before shipment, No.1 pin of DSW10 is set at the “ON” side. In the case that the outdoor units quantity in the same H-LINK is 2 or more, set No.1 pin of DSW10 to the “OFF” side at the 2nd unit. If only one outdoor unit is used, no setting is required.

(5) Electrical Cable Model Maker With Shield (Copper Foil) With Shield (Braiding)

NIHON DENSEN KOGYOKAI JKEV-S JKEV-SB

HITACHI DENSEN

NIHON DENSEN INDUSTRIES

KPEV-S

KNPEV-S

KPEV-SB

KNPEV-SB

9.4

Test Run Procedure by Wireless Remote Control Switch (PC-LH3A)

AUTO H E AT DRY COOL FA N

MODE RESET

°C

TIMER ON OFF RUN/STOP

TEMP.

Hi Me Lo

FAN

LOUVER

CANCEL

SET

OFF TIME

ON TIME TIMER

(1) Perform the test run after the installation work is completed. (a) Set the batteries for the controller. (b) Turn ON the power supply for the indoor and outdoor units. (c) “ ” lamp (yellow) on the receiver of the indoor unit flashes (0.25 seconds ON 0.25 seconds OFF), and then turns OFF. While the lamp is flashing, the unit will not operate because it is initialising.

Slide toward the arrow direction by pushing.



(2) Set the test run mode by pressing “SET” and “OFF TIME” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds. The LCD should be as shown in the figure on the right.

(3) Set the operation mode by pressing the “MODE” switch.

Test Run Mode is under suspension.

Test Run Mode is under operating.

(4) Operate the Test Run by pointing the transmitter towards the receiver of the indoor unit and press the “ RUN/STOP” switch. When the commands are received by the indoor unit, the “ ” lamp (yellow) of the receiver will come on briefly. Check the commands are received well and the mode selected 3) is set correctly. In the test run mode, the red lamp (RUN) of the receiver is turned ON and the green lamp (TIMER) flashes (0.5 seconds ON 0.5 seconds OFF). And then set off timer for 2 hours. NOTE: In the case that the “ ” lamp (yellow) does not turn ON, the controls may not have reached the receiver. Send the commands again. (5) Adjust the angle of the air louver as follows. The air louver has a mechanism for the auto-swing function. Do not move the louver by hand forcefully. (a) Select the FAN mode by pressing the “MODE” switch. (b) Set the louver angle by pressing the “LOUVER” switch. (6) Stop the Test Run (a) Test Run is stopped after 2 hours automatically. (b) Test Run is stopped by pressing “ RUN/STOP” switch again. After Test Run is finished, check that the red lamp (RUN) and the green lamp (TIMER) turn OFF.



In Case of Using Receiver Kit (PC-ALHD, PC-ALHP OR PC-ALHZ) The unit No. with alarm occurrence, the alarm code and the unit code are indicated at the 7-segment indicator of the receiver part as follows. Check the unit according to the Service Manual.

Malfunctioning unit number is displayed (approx. 1 sec.).

Turns OFF (approx. 1 sec.)

The alarm code is displayed (approx. 1 sec.).

Turns OFF (approx. 1 sec.)

The unit code is displayed (approx. 1 sec.).

Turns OFF (approx. 1 sec.) The above sequence is indicated for each malfunctioning unit and displayed in order of the unit number.

ATTENTION 1. The setting of the indoor unit No. and the unit No. set by the auto-address can not be checked by the remote control switch. In case of setting the unit No., perform the setting according to the â&#x20AC;&#x153;Dip Switch Settingâ&#x20AC;? of the indoor unit. 2. Install the cable for the remote control switch and cable between units with a distance more than 30cm away from the power line. In case of installing the cables within 30cm from the power line, insert the cables into the metal conduit tube and ground the one end of the tube. If the above treatment is not performed, the control failure may occur due to the noise. 3. Check the hole for leading cables of the remote control switch case mainly, close the clearance of the hole and the cables for prevention from entering of the insects and water.

Table 9.1 Test Run and Maintenance Record MODEL:

SERIAL. No.

COMPRESSOR MFG. No.

CUSTOMER'S NAME AND ADDRESS:

DATE:

No. 1 DB

/WB

Outlet: DB Inlet: No. 5 DB Outlet: DB

/WB /WB /WB

No. 2 DB

/WB

C, o C,

DB No. 6 DB

/WB /WB

/WB

6. Check Outdoor Ambient Temperature o Inlet: DB C, Outlet: DB

WB WB

No. 3 DB

/WB

C, o C,

DB No. 7 DB

/WB /WB

/WB

o o

No. 4 DB

/WB

C, o C,

DB No. 8 DB

/WB /WB

C C

/WB

C C

7. Check Refrigerant Temperature: Operating Mode (Cool or Heat) Discharge Gas Temperature: Liquid Pipe Temperature:

Td= Te=

8. Check Pressure Discharge Pressure:

Pd=

Suction Pressure:

Ps=

kg/cm2G kg/cm2G

9. Check Voltage Rated Voltage: Operating Voltage:

L1-L2

Starting Voltage: Phase Imbalance:

V 1-

V = Vm

10. Check Compressor Input Running Current Input: Running Current: 11. Is the refrigerant charge adequate? 12. Do the operation control devices operate correctly? 13. Do the safety devices operate correctly? 14. Has the unit been checked for refrigerant leakage? 15. Is the unit clean inside and outside? 16. Are all cabinet panels fixed? 17. Are all cabinet panels free from rattles? 18. Is the filter clean? 19. Is the heat exchanger clean? 20. Are the stop valves open? 21. Does the drain water flow smoothly from the drain pipe?

V V,

kW A

L1-L3

L2-L3

9.5

Test Run from Outdoor Unit Side

The procedure of test run from the outdoor unit side is indicated below. Setting of this dip switch is available with the power source ON. Setting of Dip Switch (Before Shipment)

Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board (PCB1)

DSW4 Switch for Setting of Service Operation and Function 1. Test Run ON 2. COOL/HEAT Setting (ON: Heating Operation) 1 2 3 4 5 6 3. OFF (Fixed) 4. Manual Compressor OFF OFF 5. OFF (Fixed) 6. OFF (Fixed)

For Service DSW4

Do not touch any other electrical parts when operating switches on the PCB. Do not attach or detach service cover when the power source for the outdoor unit is ON and the outdoor unit is operated. Turn all the dip switches of DSW4 OFF when the test run operation is completed. Dip Switch Setting 1. Setting of Operation Mode Cooling: Set DSW4-2 OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6

ON OFF

Heating: Set DSW4-2 ON. 1 2 3 4 5 6

ON OFF

Test Run

Operation 1. The indoor unit automatically start to operate when the test run of the outdoor unit is set. 2. The ON/OFF operation can be performed from the remote control switch or DSW4-1 of the outdoor unit. 3. Continuous operation during 2 hours is performed without Thermo-OFF.

Take care that the indoor units operate in accordance with the test run operation of the outdoor unit. The test run is started from the outdoor unit and stopped from the remote control switch, the test run function of the remote control switch is cancelled. However, the test run function of the outdoor unit is not cancelled. In case that the plural indoor units are connected with one remote control switch, all the units start test run operation at the same time, therefore, turn the power source OFF for the indoor units not to operate test run. In this case, the "TEST RUN" indication of the remote control switch may flicker, and this is not abnormal. The setting of DSW4 is not required for the test run from the remote control switch.

1. When DSW4-4 is ON during compressor operation, the compressor stops to operate immediately and the indoor unit is under the condition of Thermo-OFF. 2. When DSW4-4 is OFF, the compressor starts to operate after the cancellation of 3-minutes guard.

Do not repeat compressor ON/OFF frequently.

1. Defrost operation is available regardless of frosting condition and total time of heating operation. 2. Defrost operation in not performed when the temperature of outdoor heat exchanger is higher than 10oC, high pressure is higher than 2.0MPa (20 kgf/cm2G) or Thermo-OFF.

Do not repeat defrost operation frequently. When manual defrost operation is accepted by PSW1, the time left before starting defrost operation is indicated at the 7-segment indicator on the PCB.

2. Starting Test Run Set DSW4-1 ON and the operation is started after a few~20 seconds. When heating operation, leave DSW4-2 at ON. ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

OFF

1. Setting * Compressor Manual OFF: Set DSW4-4 ON. Manual OFF of Compressor

1 2 3 4 5 6

OFF

* Compressor ON: Set DSW4-4 OFF. ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

Remarks

OFF

Manual Defrost

1. Manual Defrost Operation Starts Press PSW1 for more than 3 seconds during heating operation, the defrost operation is started after 2 minutes. This function is not available within 5 minutes after starting heating operation. 2. Manual Defrost Operation Finishes Defrost operation is automatically ended and the heating operation is started.

Time left (every 4 seconds)

(1) During the test run mode, the following default indication will appear. (a) Cooling

(b) Heating HIGH

COOL

SET TEMP

HIGH

°C

HEAT

A/C

SET TEMP

°C

A/C

(2) If the remote control switch is set to a different mode, the test run function will not start. In this case perform the following actions before the test run. • Remote Control Switch: STOP • Central Station: STOP and Remote Control Switch is available mode. During the test run mode do not change the remote control switch setting or the central station setting. (3) If an alarm code is indicated during the test run, reset the system by turning the main power supply off then back on. The system should then operate. (4) Check to ensure that the indoor fan and the outdoor fan rotate correctly and that the air flow is smooth. (5) Check the power supply, if the power supply is abnormal, contact with electric power company. In general, voltage drop will occur when starting as shown in the figure.

Initial Voltage (V1)

Operating Voltage (V3)

Starting Voltage (V2)

(6) Check to ensure that the refrigerant charge is correct by referring to pages 80 and 81 the normal operating pressure. (7) Check the safety device (high pressure switch). When the following procedure is performed, the high pressure will be increased. In case of cooling, cover the outdoor unit heat exchanger.

In case of heating, over the air inlet of the indoor unit.

When the high pressure retry control is activated, the outdoor unit PCB shows “P13”. Alarm code “45” will be indicated when the code “P13” has indicated more than 3 times in one hour. In case of performed from PC-AR. (a) Alarm code “45” will be indicated. (b) The operation lamp is flickered.

ABNML

(b)

(a)

NOTE Depends on a temperature condition, the high pressure could not be increased before the activation of the high pressure switch.

Models: RAS-8FSNQ 10FSNQ, 12FSNQ, 18FSNQ, 20FSNQ, 22FSNQ Piping Length: 7.5m

Piping Length:50m

C o o l i n g O p e ra t i on

C o ol i n g O pe r at i o n 3.3

30 2.5

Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

2.0

35 30

20 25 Indoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB oC)

30 2.5

1.0 Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB C) o

0.9

0.8

2.0

1.0

0.7

Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

3.0

Suction Pressure (MPa)

Discharge Pressure (MPa)

Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

3.0

35 30

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

Suction Pressure (MPa)

3.3

0.6

Indoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB C) o

H e a t i ng O pe ra t i o n

H ea t i n g O pe r a t i o n 3.5

3.3

3.0

3.0 Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

2.0 Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

1.8

27 24 20

0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2

-5

5 10 15 Outdoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB oC)

Discharge Pressure (MPa)

Suction Pressure (MPa)

Discharge Pressure (MPa)

0.1

2.5 20 0.9 Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

2.0

0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2

-5

5 10 15 Outdoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB oC)

Fig. 9.1 Normal Operating Pressure

NOTE 1. The above curves indicate pressures under the following conditions. Indoor Fan Tap: HIGH Indoor Total Capacity: 100% compared with the capacity of the outdoor unit. 2. Do not use the above data for the refrigerant charge procedure. These data should be used as a reference for the checking of operating conditions. 80

27 24 20

0.1

Suction Pressure (MPa)

2.5

Models: RAS-14FSNQ, 16FSNQ, 24FSNQ, 26FSNQ, 28FSNQ, 30FSNQ, 32FSNQ Piping Length: 7.5m

Piping Length:50m

C o o l i ng O p e ra t i on

C oo l i n g O pe r a t i o n

3.5

Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC) Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

Discharge Pressure (MPa)

3.0

25 2.5 35

1.0

25 2.5 1.0

Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

2.0

0.8 25 0.7

Outdoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

Suction Pressure (MPa)

0.9 30

2.0

0.8 25

0.7

0.6

0.9

0.5

20 25 Indoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB oC)

Indoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB oC)

H e a ti n g Op r at i o n

Suction Pressure (MPa)

3.0

0.5

H e a t i n g Op e r a t io n

3.3

3.0

Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC) Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

27 24

0.9

2.0 27 24 20

Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

1.8

0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3

0.9

2.0 Indoor Unit Temp. (DB oC)

1.8

27 24 20

0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3

0.2 -5

0.8 Suction Pressure (MPa)

Discharge Pressure (MPa)

2.5 24

Suction Pressure (MPa)

Discharge Pressure (MPa)

2.5

0.2

0.1

-5

Outdoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB C) o

0.1

Outdoor Unit Inlet Temp. (WB oC)

Fig. 9.2 Normal Operating Pressure

9.6

Checking of the Refrigerant Quantity for System

An excess or deficiency of the refrigerant can be checked by using data from 7-segments display check mode. This checking procedure, as follows, is useful at test run or maintenance. Before Checking: 1. Operate all the indoor units at the “TEST RUN” mode and operate all the indoor units at the “HIGH” speed. 2. Check the following items to ensure that the refrigeration cycle is stable. 1) The continuous operation is for more than 20 min. 2) Td.SH is 15 to 45 degree in Celsius. 3) Pd is 2.2 to 3.2 MPa. Ps is 0.2 to 1.1MPa. Pd is 1.0 to 3.5 MPa. (In case of high outdoor temperature, Pd is high.) [Td.SH: Discharge Gas Temperature Superheat] [Ps: Suction Pressure] [Pd: Discharge Pressure] 3. Collect the checking data by the 7-segment display check mode. Refer to “Table 9.2 HITACHI Air Conditioner SET-FREE Maintenance Record”. 4. Perform checking as the following procedures. Applicable Operating Conditions of Air Temperature for Checking [Cooling] * Room Air Temperature: 20 to 30°C (DB) * Outdoor Air Temperature: 15°C or Higher than 15°C (DB) [Heating] * Room Air Temperature: 20 to 30°C (DB) * Outdoor Air Temperature: 0 to 15°C (DB) Checking Procedures: Cooling Operation 1. Calculate iE (Indoor Unit Expansion Valve Opening). (Details are indicated below.) 2. Sum up the converted values of iE. 3. Compare the total of iE with the normal value. * Normal Value: Outdoor Unit Capacity (HP) x 6 to Outdoor Unit Capacity (HP) x 27 * Tendency: In the case that the room air temperature is high within the above normal value, the value of iE will be big. * Judgement: The sum of converted value of iE > Normal Value L This means insufficient refrigerant. The sum of converted value of iE < Normal Value L This means excessive refrigerant. Heating Operation 1. Detect oE1 to oE2* (Outdoor Unit Expansion Valve Opening). 2. Compare oE1 to oE2 with the normal value. * Normal Value: 20 to 75 * Tendency: When oE1 to oE2 is within the above normal value and 1) In the case that the room air temperature is high, the value of oE1 to oE2 will be small. 2) In the case that the outdoor air temperature is high, the value of oE1 to oE2 will be big. * Judgement: oE1 to oE2 > Normal Value L This means insufficient refrigerant. oE1 to oE2 < Normal Value L This means excessive refrigerant. * Conversion Value at Cooling Indoor Unit Capacity (HP) 0.8 to 2.3 2.5 to 4.0 5.0 to 6.0 8.0 10.0

Indication at Check Mode 06 to 16 18 to 32 40 to 48 64 80

(1) 0< iE < 50% (2) 50% < iE < 100% 1) 0.8 to 2.3HP: As indicated 1) 0.8 to 2.3HP: As indicated 2) 2.5 to 4.0HP: 0.7 x iE 2) 2.5 to 4.0HP: 2 x iE - 60 3) 5.0 to 6.0HP: 0.7 x iE 3) 5.0 to 6.0HP: 2.7 x iE - 100 4) 8HP: 1.4 x iE 4) 8HP: 4 x iE - 120 5) 10HP: 1.4 x iE 5) 10HP: 5.4 x iE - 200 82

Example: * Cooling Operation Indoor Unit (HP) iE (%) (from the checking data) Converted Value of iE

1.0

2.5

4.0

20 (As indicated)

21 (0.7 30)

50 (2 55-60)

28 (0.7 40)

Sum of Converted Value of iE

(A)

119 (20+21+50+28)

Normal Value

(B)

78 to 351 (13 x 6 to 13 x 27)

Judgement

OK [(A) is within the range (B).]

* Heating Operation Indoor Unit (HP) Ti (Indoor Suction Temp.)

( C) o

Average of Ti

1.0

2.5

4.0

RAS-10FSNQ

24 (To be added depending on the indoor unit capacity.)

To (Outdoor Air Temp.)

(oC)

oE1 + oE2 (%)

(A)

74 (37+ 37)

Normal Value

(B)

OK [(A) is within (B)+15]

Judgement

The cases where this method is not applicable : This checking method is not applicable under such conditions as indicated below. In such cases, remove the causes of the conditions before checking. No. 1

Short-circuited Air at Indoor Unit

Short-circuited Air at Outdoor Unit

Resistance of Connecting Pipe is Big (Due to Smashed Pipe or Small Liquid Pipe)

Indoor Unit Expansion Valve Failure

Tendency of Indoor/Outdoor Expansion Valve Opening Cooling Heating

Conditions

Outdoor Unit Expansion Valve Failure

Locked (Fully Open) Locked (Fully Closed) Locked (Fully Open) Locked (Fully Closed)

Tends to be Excessively Open Tends to be Excessively Open Tends to be Excessively Open Tends to be Excessively Closed Tends to be Excessively Open Tends to be Excessively Open

Tends to be Excessively Closed Tends to be Excessively Open Tends to be Excessively Closed Tends to be Excessively Open

Remarks: In case of cooling operation, the curves of â&#x20AC;&#x153;Expansion Valve Openingâ&#x20AC;? for indoor unit is not available due to the following reasons. a) The range of indoor unit valve opening for stability is wide due to balancing control (*3) even if Td.SH is the same. b) Indoor Units Expansion Valve Opening is slightly changed depending on the total indoor unit quantity and capacity to be connected. c) Indoor Unit Expansion Valve Opening slightly changed depending on the piping length. d) In the case that the additional refrigerant charge is required, the correct quantity of refrigerant to be charged should be calculated, measured and charged.

NOTE (*3) Balancing Control Depending on the operating conditions of indoor units, the expansion valve opening of each indoor units is adjusted to keep the balance of refrigerant flow in the cycle. 83

Table 9.2 HITACHI Air Conditioner SET-FREE Maintenance Record Customer's Name

DATE: Outdoor Unit Model (Serial No.

RAS-

)

(Serial No.

)

RAS-

(Serial No.

)

(1) Operation Mode (2) Test Run Start Time (3) Data Collect Start Time (4) Read Out Data from 7-Segment in Outdoor Unit Protection Control Code Outdoor Microcomputer Output

SC 52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 52C5 52C6 FAN2 RS 20A 211

Indoor Total Operating Capacity

Inverter Frequency

Compressor Running Quantity

Outdoor Fan Step Outdoor Unit Expansion Valve Opening

Fo oE1 oE2 oE3 oE4 oEb

Discharge Pressure

Suction Pressure

Discharge Gas Temperature

Td1 Td2 Td3 Td4 Td5 Td6

Heat Exchanger Liquid Pipe Temperature

TE1 TE2 TE3

Outdoor Temperature

Compressor Running Current

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

Indoor Unit (Unit No.) Expansion Valve Opening

Heat Exchanger Liquid Temp.

Heat Exchanger Gas Temp.

Intake Air Temp.

Outlet Air Temp.

Capacity (x 1/8HP)

Indoor Unit Stoppage Cause Code

Accumulated Operation Time of Comp.1

UJ1

Accumulated Operation Time of Comp.2

UJ2

Accumulated Operation Time of Comp.3

UJ3

Accumulated Operation Time of Comp.4

UJ4

Accumulated Operation Time of Comp.5

UJ5

Accumulated Operation Time of Comp.6

UJ6

Outdoor Alarm Code

Inverter Stoppage Cause Code

iTC

Fan Motor Controller Stoppage Cause Code

FTC

Total Indoor Unit Capacity (x 1/8HP)

Total Indoor Unit Quantity

Refrigerant System Address

Fan1 212

52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 52C5 52C6

CH FAN2 RS 20A 211

Fan1 212

Expansion Valve Opening RAS-8FSNQ (Heating Operation)

RAS-10FSNQ and RAS-12FSNQ (Heating Operation)

(oE1)

35 Outdoor Temperature (oC)

Outdoor Temperature (oC)

(oE1) 65

RAS-18FSNQ, RAS-20FSNQ and RAS-22FSNQ (Heating Operation) (oE1 + oE2) *1)

0 20 25 Indoor Temperature (oC)

20 25 30 Indoor Temperature (oC)

Outdoor Temperature (oC)

(oE1) 35

RAS-14FSNQ and RAS-16FSNQ (Heating Operation) 40

20 25 30 Indoor Temperature (oC)

145 135 125

95 45

0 20 25 30 Indoor Temperature (oC)

RAS-24FSNQ, RAS-26FSNQ, RAS-28FSNQ, RAS-30FSNQ and RAS-32FSNQ (Heating Operation)

Outdoor Temperature (oC)

(oE1 + oE2) *1) 15

75 45

0 20 25 30 Indoor Temperature (oC)

oE: Outside Expansion Valve Temperature *1) The value of oE1 and oE2 on the diagrams indicate outdoor expansion valve opening, not the sum of oE1 and oE2. (The values of oE1 and oE2 are equal.)

NOTE 1. These curves should be used by referring to the data during the CHECK mode. 2. In the case that data by the CHECK mode operation is within +15%, refrigerant charging amount is appropriate. 85

INDOOR UNIT

Page RPI

RPIZ

RCI

RCD RPK

89 89 89 91 91 91 91 91 91 93 94 97 97 97 99 100 100 100 102 102

103 103 103 104 105 105 105 105 105 106 106 108 108 109 110 111 111 111 112 112

113 113 113 114 114 114 114 115 115 116 117 119 119 119 120 122 122 123 124 124

125 125 125 126 126 126 126 127 127 128 129 131 131 131 132 134 134 135 136 136 177 177 178 182 183 184 184 187 190 191 203 208 216 233 245 245 245 246 246 250 257 257

137 137 137 140 140 140 140 141 141 142 144 149 149 149 151 152 152 152 154 154

RPF RPC RPFI 155 165 155 165 155 165 156 166 156 166 156 166 156 166 157 167 157 167 158 168 158 169 160 170 160 170 160 170 161 172 162 173 162 174 163 174 164 175 164 175

Indoor Unit / RPI 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

2.1

Unit: mm

Structure 2

d 15

8 10

h L 12

(Models: RPI-1.0~5.0FSNQ, RPI-1.0~6.0FSNQL and RPI-1.0~6.0FSNQH)

No. 1A

Fan

Fan (Only for 1.8 to 6.0HP) Fan Motor Heat Exchanger

2 3

Part Name

Model

1.0HP 1.5HP 1.8HP 2.0HP 2.3HP 2.5HP 3.0HP 4.0HP 5.0HP 6.0HP

650 650 900 900 900 900 900 900 1,300 1,300

720 720 720 720 720 720 800 800 800 800

270 270 270 270 270 270 350 350 350 350

12.7 12.7 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88

6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 9.53 9.53 9.53 9.53 9.53 9.53

Remarks

No. 8

Part Name Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection

Remarks with φa Flare Nut

Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection

with φb Flare Nut

10 11

Drain Pipe Connection Float Switch

Distributor

Drain Pan

5 6

Strainer Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve

13 14

Air Outlet Air Inlet

Electrical Control Box

Drain Discharge Mechanism (Optional Accessory)

Unit: mm Air Inlet 14

7 4 5 1120

6 11

470 Air Outlet

(Models: RPI-8FSNQ and RPI-10FSNQ)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Part Name Fan Fan Motor Heat Exchanger Distributor Strainer Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection φ A Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection φ B Drain Pipe Connection Float Switch Drain Pan Air Outlet Duct Flange Air Inlet Duct Flange

Dim.

RPI-8FSNQ

19.05

9.53

1060

RPI-10FSNQ

19.05

9.53

1250

Model

Remarks

Blazing Blazing VP25

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation No.

Tool

No.

Tool

Handsaw

Spanner

Phillips Screwdriver

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Gauge Manifold

Refrigerant Gas Hose

Cutter for Wires

Megohmmeter

Gas Leak Detector

Copper Pipe Bender

Leveller

Manual Water Pump

Clamper for Solderless Terminals

Pipe Cutter

Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Brazing Kit

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Voltage Meter

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

Transportation and Handling

3.1

Indoor Unit Installation

Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

Do not put any material on the product.

3.2

Handling of Indoor Unit

Do not put any foreign material into the indoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the indoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Be careful not to damage on insulation materials of unitâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s surface when lifting.

Do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

Check to ensure that the ceiling slab is strong enough. If not strong enough, the indoor unit may fall down on you. Do not install the indoor unit outdoors. If installed outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will occur. It is recommended that indoor units be installated higher than 2.3 meters from the floor level.

4.1

Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the indoor unit.

NOTE If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories

<1.0HP to 6.0HP> Accessory Washer

Q'ty

Purpose

For Unit Suspension

For Fixing Flanges

For Drain Hose Connection

Insulation (Small Size)

For Refrigerant Liquid Piping

Insulation (Middle Size)

For Refrigerant Gas Piping

For Fixing Thermal Insulation for Refrigerant Pipings

Screw

Hose Clamp

Cord Clamp

<8HP and 10HP> Accessory

Purpose

Insulation (Small Size)

For Refrigerant Liquid Piping Connection

Insulation (Middle Size)

For Refrigerant Gas Piping Connection

Cord Clamp (Short Size)

Cord Clamp (Long Size)

Washer Wire Clamp

Q'ty

For Fixing Thermal Insulation for Refrigerant Pipings

For Installation of Indoor Unit

For Drain Hose Connection

4.2

Initial Check

• Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it for operation and maintenance working space, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Electrical Box

Min. 1000

Front Side

Min. 600

In case that the ceiling board can not be detected for servicing, prepare a service access door below the indoor unit for removing the indoor unit.

Min. 1000

Rear Side

Service Access Door (Min. 450)

(B) Install the indoor unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the indoor unit in an acid or alkaline environment.

(130) Min. 600

View from Top (1.0 to 6.0HP)

Check to ensure that the number of below is within 0.3kg/cm3. Otherwise it may cause danger situation if the refrigerant in the Outdoor Unit leaks into the room where this Indoor Unit is installed. (Total Refrigerant Quantity per one Outdoor Unit)

(

(8 and 10HP)

Volume of the room where this Indoor Unit is installed.

)

≤0.3kg/m3

In detail, refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit.

Fig. 4.1 Operation and Installation Space • Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install the indoor unit in a machine shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the indoor unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the indoor unit. • Pay attention to the following points when the indoor unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment. (A) Do not install the indoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote control cable or remote control switch. 93

Installation

4.3.1 Suspension Bolts Step 1 Select final location and installation direction of the indoor unit paying careful attention to the space for the piping, wiring and maintenance. Step 2 Mount suspension bolts, as shown in Fig. 4.2

For Steel Beam

a (for Suspension Bolt) b 4 - 40 x 12 (for Suspension Bolt)

For Concrete Slab

4.3.2 Marking of the Positions of the Sling Bolts and Piping Connections (1) Mark the positions of the sling bolts, refrigerant piping connections and drain connection. (2) Installation dimensions are shown in Fig. 4.3.

4.3

Concrete Steel Anchor Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

I Beam

Suspension Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

c d (for Suspension Bolt)

Insert (100 to 150kg)

150 to 160mm

For Wooden Beam Suspension

Nut Wooden Beam

Square Washer Square Washer Suspension Bolt

Fig. 4.2 Mounting of Suspension Bolts

Nut

Wooden Bar (60 to 90mm Square)

1.0 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

730

650

720

676

980

900

720

676

980

900

800

756

1,380

1,300

800

756

Fig. 4.3 Suspension Bolts (3) Ceiling Work: It basically varies according to the building structure. Consult with the architect or interior finish worker for more information on this. (a) To maintain the appropriate levelness of the ceiling and preventing from the vibration, the additional reinforcement in the ground of ceiling (Building Frame) is essential. Also, rubber cushion can be applied for the insufficient strength of the frame around the sling part on the ceiling. (b) Provide a space for the air inlet grille, air outlet grille and maintenance work. (d) Do not suspend the indoor units and electric light units from the same auxiliary supporting beams, and do not connect the suspension bolts on the indoor units to the light units. If connected, the light may flicker or the light unit may be rattled by vibration of the indoor units. 94

4.3.3 Mounting the Indoor Unit Hang the indoor unit as shown in Fig. 4.4. Field-Supplied Parts *Sling Bolts 4-M10 or W3/8 *Nut 8-M10 or W3/8 Sling Bolts (4-M10 or W3/8) (Field-Supplied) Nut & Washer (4-M10 or W3/8) t (Field-Supplied) asher (Accessory)

Unit

False Ceiling Side

Suspension Bracket

* Piping and wiring work will be required in the ceiling after hanging the unit. Therefore, determine the drawing direction of pipe after selecting the installation location, particularly if the ceiling was existed. Piping and wiring work should be carried out up to the connecting positions before hanging the unit. (3) For reasons of the disaster prevention, the distance between under the roof and wall surface should be followed as shown in the below figure. * Use the nonflammable material for the duct.

Fig. 4.4 Hanging Indoor Unit (1) How to put Nuts or Sling Bolts Put nuts on each of the four hanging bolts, as shown in Fig. 4.5.

Unit

Material of the Wall, Frame A B

Retaining Nut

Flammable Min.100cm Min. 60cm

Nonflammable Min. 10cm Min. 5cm

Indoor Unit

Washer Nut

Fig. 4.5 Sling Bolts and Nut (2) Hanging the Indoor Unit * Hook suspension bracket to the nut and washer of each hanging bolt, as shown, starting at the opposite side to service cover side. * After checking that the nut and washer are correctly fixed by the retainers of the suspension bracket, hook the suspension bracket of the service cover side to the nut and washer. (Put the sling bolts away from the unit when hooking.) Sling Bolt Suspension Bracket

Suspension Bracket

Nut & Washer

Left Side

Right Side (Service Cover Side)

Fig. 4.6 Hanging Indoor Unit

4.3.4 Adjusting of the Unit Level (1) Check to ensure that the foundation is flat, taking into account the maximum foundation gradient. If not, it will occur malfunction of float switch or not operation. Then it will drop the drain water from the ceiling. 5mm

Approx. 50

Washer

Fig. 4.7 Foundation Gradient (2) The unit should be installed so that the rear side of the unit is slightly (0mm to 5mm) lower than the front side, in order to avoid the incorrect position of the drain discharge. (3) Tighten the bolts of the sling nuts with the suspension brackets after adjustment is completed. Special plastic paint must be applied to the bolts in order to prevent them from loosening.

NOTE Keep the unit as well as relevant equipment covered with the vinyl cover during installation work. 95

4.3.5 Connecting Return Duct and Supply Duct (1) The return duct should be connected with the indoor unit through canvas ducts between inlet side of the indoor unit and ceiling of the room. The supply duct should be connected with the indoor unit through canvas ducts, in order to avoid abnormal sound vibration (Refer to Fig. 4.8). The unit is equipped with a pre-drilled duct flange for the return and supply duct connection. (2) Attach the vibration proof rubber to Sling Bolt in order to avoid abnormal sound vibration. (3) Undamped natural frequency is shown as below. HP 1.0 to 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 to 6.0

Undamped Natural Frequency 9 to 21 Hz 12 to 23 Hz 11 to 22 Hz 11 to 23 Hz

(4) Duct material should be non-flammable material. (5) Perform the heat insulation work over the duct and the duct flange for dew protection. (6) Indoor unit does not attach the air filter. Please install the air filter onto the air inlet grille that is easy for maintenance.

If a lower sound level is further required, install silencer (field-supplied). The facility design should be “Unit External Static Pressure = Duct Pressure Loss Suction / Discharge Pressure Loss”. If the duct pressure loss becomes under to the unit external static pressure, air speed will get larger and lead to the occurrence of louder noise, splashing water and activation of motor protection circuit, and if the unit external static pressure becomes under to the duct pressure loss, some problems such as inability to change the air speed may occur. Set the airflow control damper or shift the static pressure control switch to adjust to get almost equal level between the external static pressure and the duct pressure loss. (See “Setting of External Pressure” section for the details.) Basically this unit is designed to install the ducts on the inlet side and the outlet side. Ask for more information for using the return ducts in the ceiling. 4.3.6 Setting of External Pressure Refer to 10.4 “Setting of High Speed Tap”.

<In Case of 1.0HP to 6.0HP> (Example: RPI-2.0FSNQ)

<In Case of 8HP and 10HP> Canvas Duct

Canvas Duct

Duct

Air Filter (Field-Supplied)

Air Outlet

Air Inlet Service Access Panel

Ceiling

Fig. 4.8 Duct Connection 96

Refrigerant Piping Work

NOTE

5.1

mm (in.) HP

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select clean copper tubes making sure there is no dust and moisture inside the tubes. Before connecting pipes, blow the inside of the tubes with nitrogen or dry air, to remove any dust or foreign materials.

5.2

When the drain-up mechanism is equipped, the position of the drain pipe connection is as shown in Fig.5.1, and the lower connection hole shall be closed with the rubber plug.

Gas Piping

Liquid Piping

1.0 and 1.5 1.8 and 2.0

φ12.7 (1/2) φ15.88 (5/8)

φ6.35 (1/4) φ6.35 (1/4)

2.3 to 3.0

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

4.0 to 6.0

φ15.88(5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

(2) When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners as shown in Fig. 5.2.

Piping Connection

Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe. Correct

Incorrect

Pipe Size φ6.35mm φ9.53mm

Tightening Torque (N.m) 20 40

φ12.7mm

60 80 *1) φ15.88mm φ19.05mm 100 *1) In case of 4.0 to 6.0HP, tighten the flare nut with a torque of 100N.m.

Fig. 5.2 Tightening Work of Flare Nut An excess or a shortage of refrigerant is the main cause of trouble to the units. Charge the correct refrigerant quantity. <RPI-1.0 to 5.0 FSNQ / RPI-1.0 to 6.0 FSNQL / RPI-1.0 to 6.0 FSNQH> (1) Position of piping connection is shown below. Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection

Drain Pipe Connection

(3) After connecting the refrigerant piping, seal the refrigerant pipes by using the factorysupplied insulation material as shown in Fig 5.3. Cord Clamp (Accessory)

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Accessory)

Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied)

Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection

188

Unit Side

A 90 B

Drain Pipe Connection

246 321 377 402

Fig. 5.3 Insulation on Pipes (mm)

HP 1.0 and 1.5 2.3 and 2.5 3.0

A 70 77 77 78

B 92 92 95 95

C 182 182 182 204

D 222 222 222 244

4.0 to 6.0

204

244

1.8 and 2.0

Insulation Material (Factory-Supplied)

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied)

Fig. 5.1 Position of Piping Connection

(4) Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedures should be performed according to “Installation & Maintenance Manual” of the outdoor unit. In relation to the additional refrigerant quantity, refer to “Common”. 97

<RPI-8FSNQ and RPI-10FSNQ> (1) Position of piping connection is shown Fig. 5.4 Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection

6x50=300

Drain Pipe Connection

Air Inlet

Thermal Insulation Air Outlet

Unit: mm mm(in.) Moel RPI-8FSNQ RPI-10FSNQ

(3) After blazing, insulate the pipes after checking that there is no leakage. At that time, be sure to cover the space between two insulating peaces by insulation pipe (factory-supplied accessory).

Gas Pipe

Drain Pipe

φ19.05(3/4) φ22.2(7/8)

φ9.53(3/8) φ9.53(3/8)

VP25

Pull

Thermal Insulation

as before No Gap

Fig. 5.4 Position of Piping Connection

Thermal Insulation Pipe Liquid Pipe

 Cut the pipe end before blazing to remove the cap, and discharge gas inside the pipe. If not discharged, blazing material will be blown off.

Indoor Unit Gas pipe

Field Installation Pipe Thermal Insulation Pipe

Discharge gas inside and remove the cap.

Cut

 Pay attention so that the flame does not come into contact with the main body itself. (2) When brazing the refrigerant pipes, be sure to blaze, after covering the part with shown below a wet cloth to the insulation pipes of the units in order to prevent the thermistors on liquid and gas pipes from damaging by heating.

Thermal Insulation Pipe No Gap for Protection Short Band 20 Thermal Insulation Pipe

20 Thermal insulation pipe shall be attached so that the joining part comes to the top.

20 20

Long Band

Fig. 5.6 Insulating Pipes

Fig. 5.5 Blazing Pipes

Drain Piping

Common

(1) The position of the drain piping connection is shown in Fig. 6.1. (2) Prepare polyvinyl chloride pipe with a 32mm outer diameter. (3) Fasten the tube to the drain hose with the adhesive agent and the factory-supplied clamp. The drain piping must be performed with a DOWN-SLOPE pitch of 1/25 to 1/100. (4) Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain hose. 1.0HP to 6.0HP <Drain pump is applied>

Drain Piping (PVC Tube, VP25) (Field-Supplied)

(Max.) 374 to 500 (Drain-Up Length)

(Max.) 50 to 176 291

Rubber Boss

Drain Pump

Correct Common Drain Piping

Fig. 6.1 Drain Piping

NOTE When the relative humidity of inlet or ambient air exceeds 80%, apply an (field-supplied) auxiliary drain pan beneath the indoor unit as shown in Fig. 6.2.

Indoor Unit

235 380

<Drain pump is not applied> Electrical Box

Thermal Insulation (Field-Supplied) Seal (Vinyl Chloride Type Adhesive)

Drain Hose

1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope Thermal Insulation (Field-Supplied)

Clamp(Accessory) Polyvinyl Chloride Tube (Field-Supplied)

â&#x20AC;˘ Completely fasten the tubing to the drain hose with the adhesive agent.

RPI-8FSNQ and RPI-10FSNQ Support

1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

188

Drain Pan

Drain Piping Connection

1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

Flexible Hose (300L) (Accessory)

Indoor Unit

Incorrect

Rising Part

This drain pipe shall be separating from other pipes.

Lift Piping for Drain-Up (PVC Tube, VP25) (Field-Supplied)

Unit

Suspension Bracket (Field-Supplied) 90o Elbow Pipe (VP25) (Field-Supplied)

Incorrect: Upward Slope

1.5 to 2m

25cm

Long Band

Drain Hose

Drain Pipe Wire Clamp Thermal Insulation Short Band Use vinyl chloride type adhesive.

Do not use adhesive.

â&#x20AC;˘ Do not connect the drain-hose to the drain outlet pipe of indoor unit BY ADHESIVE. If used, the servicing of drain-up mechanism is not available, and drain outlet pipe of indoor unit may be cracked due to invasion of the adhesive. But other pipe connecting part, use vinyl chloride type adhesive.

Auxiliary Drain Pan (Field-Supplied)

To the Atmosphere

Fig. 6.2 Auxiliary Drain Pan (1) Do not create an upper-slope or rise for the drain piping, since drain water can flow back to the unit and leakage to the room will occur when the unit operation is stopped. (2) Do not connect the drain pipe with sanitary or sewage piping or any other drainage piping. (3) When the common drain piping is connected with other indoor units, the connected position of each indoor unit must be higher than the common piping. The pipe size of the common drain pipe must be large enough according to the unit size and number of units. (4) After performing drain piping work and electrical wiring, check to ensure that water flows smoothly as in the following procedure. (5) Checking with the Float Switch a. Switch ON the power supply. b. Pour 2 or 2.5 liters of water into the drain pan. c. Check to ensure that the water flows smoothly or whether no water leakage occurs. When water cannot be found at the end of the drain piping, pour another 2 liters of water into the drain. 99

Electrical Wiring

7.1

Turn OFF the main power switch to the indoor unit and the outdoor unit before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Check to ensure that the indoor fan and the outdoor fan have stopped before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Protect the wires, drain pipe, electrical parts, etc. from rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats may gnaw at unprotected parts and at the worst, a fire will occur. Check the item below before turning ON the main switch. In case that the power source for indoor unit is 240V (nominal voltage), change CN28 (connector) to CN27 of transformer (TF) in the electrical control box as shown in Fig. 7.1. 240V 12V 12V CN27 CN28

PCN1

CN1

Fig. 7.1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transformer (TF) Tighten screws according to the following torque. M3.5: 1.2 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m

Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box. 100

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in â&#x20AC;&#x153;Technical Catalog Iâ&#x20AC;?. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Use twist pair cable with shielded for control cable between outdoor unit and indoor unit, control cable between indoor units and remote control switch cable of PC-AR. (3) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +10% of the rated voltage. (4) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (5) Check to ensure that the earth wire is connected.

7.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is shown in Fig. 7.2. (1) Connect the cable of an optional remote control switch or an optional extension cable to the terminals inside the electrical box through the connecting hole in the cabinet. (2) Connect the power supply and earth wires to the terminals in the electrical box. (3) Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box. (4) Tightly clamp the wires using the cord clamp inside the electrical box.

Remove the fixing screws for electrical box cover.

Electrical Box Cover

(ex.: RPI-5.0FSNQ) Air Inlet

Air Outlet

PCB TB

Control Cable

Power Source Cable Remote Control Switch Cable

Control Cable of Cable Remote Control Switch

Power Source Cable 1N ~ 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz (3N ~ )

Control Cable of Cable Remote Control Switch

Power Source Cable 1~ 220V 60Hz (3 ~ )

Wiring Connection at Terminal Board (TB) Enlarged View of P

Fig. 7.2 Electrical Wiring Connection

101

Test Run

Test run should be performed according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Maintenance Manualâ&#x20AC;? of the outdoor unit.

Pay attention to the following items while the system is running. (A) Do not touch any of the parts by hand at the discharge gas side, since the compressor chamber and the pipes at the discharge side are heated higher than 90oC. (B) DO NOT PUSH THE BUTTON OF THE MAGNETIC SWITCH(ES). It will cause a serious accident.

Safety and Control Device Setting Indoor Unit RPI-1.0~5.0FSNQ RPI-1.0~6.0FSNQL RPI-1.0~6.0FSNQH

Model

RPI-8FSNQ RPI-10FSNQ

For Evaporator Fan Motor Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

For Control Circuit Fuse Capacity

130+5

83+15

Freeze Protection Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Thermostat Differential

102

Indoor Unit / RPIZ 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

2.1

Structure Unit: mm

(Models: RPIZ-1.0 ~ 1.5FSNQ) Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection φa

Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection φb

RPIZ-1.0/1.5FSNQ

12.7

6.35

RPIZ-2.0FSNQ

15.88

6.35

RPIZ-2.5FSNQ

15.88

9.53

Model

Unit: mm

(Models: RPIZ-2.0 ~ 2.5FSNQ) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Part Name Fan Fan Motor Heat Exchanger Distributor Strainer Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection (With φa Flare Nut)

No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Part Name Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection (With φb Flare Nut) Drain Pipe Connection Float Switch Drain Pipe Air Outlet Air Inlet Drain Discharge Mechanism Coupling(Only For 2.0/2.5HP)

103

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

104

Accessory

Q'ty

Purpose

105

106

Ho rse-Po we r 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5

107

108

Horse-Power 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5

Flaring Dimension Perform the flaring work as shown below. A

+0 -0.4

Diameter D

R410A

6.35

9.1

R407C 9.0

9.53

13.2

13.0

12.7

16.6

16.2

15.88

19.7

19.4

19.05

(*)

23.3

(*)It is impossible to perform the flaring work with 1/2H material. In this case, use an accessory pipe(with a flare).

109

Drain Pump(Operational)

Standard

110

111

Operating Cable of Wires Remote Control Switch

Operating Wires

RPIZ-1.0FSNQ RPIZ-1.5FSNQ RPIZ-2.0FSNQ RPIZ-2.5FSNQ

112

Indoor Unit / RCI 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

2.1

Structure

10 Unit: mm

11 12

950

5 4

19 16 15

17 18 14 950

(Models: RCI-1.0 ~ 6.0FSNQ)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Part Name Fan Fan Motor Heat Exchanger Distributor Strainer Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection Drain Pipe Connection Drain Discharge Mechanism Float Switch Drain Pan Air Panel P-G23WA2 Air Inlet Grille Air Filter Air Outlet Air Inlet Cover for Corner Pocket

Remarks

Model RCI-1.0FSNQ

6.35

248

RCI-1.5FSNQ

12.7

6.35

248

RCI-1.8FSNQ RCI-2.0FSNQ

15.88

6.35 6.35

248 248

RCI-2.3FSNQ

15.88 15.88

9.53

248

9.53

248

RCI-3.0FSNQ

15.88 15.88

9.53

298

RCI-4.0FSNQ

15.88

9.53

298

RCI-5.0FSNQ

15.88 15.88

9.53

298

9.53

298

RCI-2.5FSNQ

With φa Flare Nut With φb Flare Nut VP25

a 12.7

RCI-6.0FSNQ

Optional

(P-G23WA2)

113

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation No.

Tool

N o.

Tool

Handsaw

Spanner

Phillips Screwdriver

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Gauge Manifold

Refrigerant Gas Hose

Cutter for Wires

Megohmmeter

Gas Leak Detector

Copper Pipe Bender

Leveller

Manual Water Pump

Clamper for Solderless Terminals

Pipe Cutter

Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Brazing Kit

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Voltage Meter

Wrench

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

3. 3.1

Transportation and Handling Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

Do not put any material on the product or the air panel.

3.2

Handling of Indoor Unit

Do not put any foreign material into the indoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the indoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Do not hold the resin covers when holding or lifting the indoor unit. â&#x20AC;˘ To avoid damage to the resin covers, before lifting or moving the indoor unit, put a cloth on the resin covers.

114

Indoor Unit Installation

Do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

Check to ensure that the ceiling is strong enough. If not strong enough, the indoor unit may fall down on you. Do not install the indoor unit outdoors. If installed outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will occur.

4.1

Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the indoor unit.

NOTE If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories

Accessory Paper Pattern (Carton Board)

Level Scaler (Cut and Take Out it from the Carton Board)

Q'ty 1

Cross Recessed Head Screws (M6)

Washer with Insulation Material (M10)

Purpose For Adjusting Space of False Ceiling Opening and Position of the Unit

For Fitting Paper Pattern

For Unit Installation Washer (M10)

Drain Hose

1 For Drain Hose Connection

Hose Clamp

Insulation

1 For Refrigerant Piping Connection

Insulation

Cord Clamp

Packing (5Tx50x200)

For Covering Wiring Connection

Packing (5Tx270x270)

For Covering Drain Connection

For Fixing Remote Control Switch Wiring, Louver Sensor and Insulation of Piping

Applicable Air Panel (Option): P-G23WA2

115

4.2

Initial Check

Min. 1500mm

Min. 3000mm

Min. 1500mm

Piping Connection Service Access Door

Min. 1500mm

• Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it for operation and maintenance working space, as shown in Fig. 4.1. • Provide a service access door near the unit piping connection area on the ceiling. • Check to ensure that the ceiling has a sufficient strength to hang the indoor unit. • Check the ceiling surface is flat for the air panel installation work.

Piping Connection Service Access Door

Distance from Wall Side Piping Connection Side

Min. 500mm

Min. 100mm

Min. 500mm Min. 1000mm

Service Space

Fig. 4.1 Space around Indoor Unit • Select the installation location as follows: (A) Minimum Space (B) Down Slope Pitch of Drain Piping: 1/25 to 1/100

Clearance 10 to 20mm

248mm (1.0 to 2.5HP) 298mm (3.0 to 6.0HP) Unit Height in False Ceiling

• Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. It is recommended that the indoor unit be installed 2.3 to 3 meters from the floor level. If the unit is installed higher than 3 meters, it is also recommended that the setting of increasing fan speed or 3-way Outlet Parts Set (Option) be utilized so that uniform air distribution is available. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install the indoor unit in a machinery shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the indoor unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the indoor unit. • Pay attention to the following points when the indoor unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment, etc. (A) Do not install the indoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote control cable or remote control switch. (B) Install the indoor unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the indoor unit in an acid or alkaline environment.

Drain Piping Down Slope Pitch: 1/25 to 1/100

Fig. 4.2 Installation Location of Indoor Unit

(

Volume of the room where this Indoor Unit is installed.

)

≤0.3kg/m3

In detail, refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit.

116

4.3.2 Mounting Position of the Indoor Unit

Installation

4.3.1 Opening of False Ceiling and Suspension Bolts (1) Determine the final location and installation direction of the indoor unit paying careful attention to the space for the piping, wiring and maintenance. (2) Cut out the area for the indoor unit in the false ceiling and install suspension bolts, as shown in Fig. 4.3.

(3) Check to ensure that the ceiling is horizontally level, otherwise drainage can not flow. (4) Strengthen the opening parts of the false ceiling. (5) Mount suspension bolts, as shown in Fig. 4.4.

10 Min. a

Gas Pipe Connection

Drain Pipe Connection

118 (Drain Pipe)

Wiring Hole ( 32.5 Hole) (for Spare) Wiring Hole (30x30) (for Cable)

Fig. 4.6 Indoor Unit and Air Panel 4.3.3 Mounting the Indoor Unit (1) Mount the nuts and washers to the suspension bolts. Suspension Bolt (Field-Supplied)

(mm)

Nut (Field-Supplied)

â&#x20AC;˘ For Concrete Slab 150 to 160mm

(mm)

Liquid Pipe Connection

36 31

840 (Unit Size)

Dimension of Opening 860 to 910

Opening of False Ceiling and Suspension Bolts

a 248 298

Insert (100 to 150kg)

*Washer with Insulation (Accessory)

Approx. 50

Fig. 4.3

Drain Piping Connection Side

HP 1.0 to 2.5 3.0 to 6.0

Fig. 4.5 Mounting Position

127 (Liquid Pipe Connection)

Piping Connection Side

* indicates the dimension between lower face of indoor unit and surface of ceiling.

4-Positions of Suspension Bolts

Optional Panel

102

Surface of Ceiling

(mm)

760 (Dimension of Suspension Bolts)

W-Nut (Field-Supplied) Washer (Accessory)

Dimension of Opening 860 to 910 840 (Unit Size)

(mm)

4-Suspension Bolts M10 or W3/8 (Field-Supplied)

102 (Gas Pipe Connection)

4.3

Suspension Bracket (Attached Indoor Unit) *Washer (Accessory)

Surface of Ceiling

Anchor Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

â&#x20AC;˘ For Steel Beam

102

Steel

Nut (Field-Supplied) Approx. 52

Concrete

Fig. 4.7 Mounting Nuts and Washers * Put the washer so that the surface with insulation can faces downwards.

(2) Lift the Indoor Unit by hoist, and do not put any force on the drain pan. I Beam

Suspension Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

Fig. 4.4 Mounting the Suspension Bolts 117

(2) Adjust the position of indoor unit, as shown below by using checking scale. 10 to 35

Suspension Bolt

(mm) Slab

Surface of Flange

Suspension Bracket Drain Pan

Fig. 4.8 Mounting the Indoor Unit

NOTE If a false ceiling has already been installed, complete all piping and wiring work inside the ceiling before hooking-up the indoor unit. 4.3.4 Adjusting the Space between Indoor Unit and False Ceiling Opening

Check the level of the drain pan using a water level to avoid incorrect operation of the drain discharge mechanism in the indoor unit. Tighten the nuts of the suspension brackets after the adjustment is completed. Apply LOCK-TIGHT paint* to the bolts and nuts in order to prevent them from loosening. If not done, abnormal noises or sounds may occur and the indoor unit may fall down.

Indoor Unit

10 to 35

Surface of Ceiling

(3) Secure the indoor unit using the nuts, washers.

Indoor Unit (Viewed from Bottom Side)

a) For Ceiling already Completed with Panels Attach the scale to the bottom side of the unit.

Attach the scale to the face of ceiling.

Checking Scale for Dimension of Opening

Adjust the height of the ceiling and the unit at each corner. Check the dimension of opening at each side.

b) Ceiling Not Completed with Panels yet Pattern Paper for Installation Dimension for Opening

Dimension for Opening

Suspension Bolt LOCK-TIGHT paint*: Paint the lock bolts and nuts. Adjust the indoor unit to the correct position while checking with the checking scales (factory-supplied).

(1) Pattern Board for installation is printed on the packing. Cut off the checking scale for dimension of opening from packing.

Indoor Unit

Surface of Ceiling

Screw (M6) Pattern Board for Installation

Installation Details for Air Panel â&#x20AC;˘ The details of installation work for air panel shall be according to the Installation Manual for Air Panel. â&#x20AC;˘ Check to ensure that the connection of connectors between the indoor unit and the air panel.

118

Refrigerant Piping Work (2) When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners as shown in Fig. 5.2.

5.1

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select the piping size from the following table. mm (in.) Model RCI-1.0FSNQ RCI-1.5FSNQ RCI-1.8FSNQ RCI-2.0FSNQ RCI-2.3FSNQ RCI-2.5FSNQ RCI-3.0FSNQ RCI-4.0FSNQ RCI-5.0FSNQ RCI-6.0FSNQ

Gas Piping

Liquid Piping

φ12.7 (1/2)

φ6.35 (1/4)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ6.35 (1/4)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

(3) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside. Blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air, to remove any dust or foreign materials before connecting pipes.

5.2

Piping Connection

840 (Unit) 180 (Liquid Pipe)

Tightening Torque (N.m)

φ6.35mm

φ9.53mm

φ12.7mm

φ15.88mm

80 *1)

φ19.05mm

100

*1) In case of 4.0 to 6.0HP, tighten the flare nut with a torque of 100N.m.

Fig. 5.2 Tightening Work of Flare Nut (3) Insulate the refrigerant pipes as shown in Fig. 5.3. Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Accessory)

Cord Clamp (Accessory)

Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied) Unit Side Insulation Material (Factory-Supplied)

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied)

Fig. 5.3 Insulation on Pipes

(mm)

840 (Unit)

18 (Gas Pipe)

25 (Liquid Pipe)

(1) Position of piping connection is shown in Fig. 5.1. (Indoor Unit)

Pipe Size

Liquid Pipe Connection

Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe. Correct

Incorrect

102 (Gas Pipe Connection)

127 (Liquid pipe Connection)

110 (Gas Pipe)

Gas Pipe Connection

(4) Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedures should be performed according to “Installation & Maintenance Manual” of the outdoor unit.

Fig. 5.1 Position of Piping Connection 119

Drain Piping In case of pouring water through the access door. Insert the end of hose between heat exchanger and drain pan.

Access Door Pump Water (1500cc to 2000cc)

In case of pouring water through the air outlet. Insert the end of hose between heat exchanger and drain pan. Drain Pan Pump Water (1500cc to 2000cc)

(1) The position of the drain pipe connection is shown in Fig. 6.1.

(mm)

Do not create an upper-slope or rise for the drain piping, since drain water can flow back to the indoor unit and leakage into the room will occur when the system operation is stopped. Do not connect the drain pipe with sanitary or sewage piping or any other drainage piping. When the common drain piping is connected with other indoor units, the connected position of each indoor unit must be higher than the common piping. The pipe size of the common drain pipe must be large enough according to the unit size and number of units. After performing drain piping work and electrical wiring, check to ensure that water flows smoothly as in the following procedure. Checking with the Float Switch (A) Switch ON the power supply. (B) Pour 1.5 to 2.0 liters of water into the drain pan. (C) Check to ensure that the water flows smoothly or whether no water leakage occurs. When water cannot be found at the end of the drain piping, pour another 1.5 to 2.0 liters of water into the drain.

130 Fig. 6.1 Position of Drain Pipe Connection (2) Prepare a polyvinyl chloride pipe with a 32mm outer diameter. (3) Connecting Drain Piping (A)Insert the drain hose to the end of the drain pipe connecion fully and fasten the hose with hose band (Accessory). (B)Insulate the drain hose and band using the packing (5T x 270 x 270: Accessory). (C)The drain piping must be performed with a down-slope pitch of 1/25 to 1/100. (D)Completely fasten the tubing to the drain hose with the adhesive agent to avoid the drainage leakage. 120

Hose Band (Accessory) c (Max. 50mm)

Hose Band (Accessory) 1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

118

Max. 850mm

a (Max. 300mm)

(4) Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain hose.

Drain Hose (Accessory)

P Drain Hose

Packing (5Tx270x 270) (Accessory)

Horizontal or Upper-Slope The drain hose must be performed with a horizontal or upper-slope to prevent the airpocket inner the hose. If the airpocket occurs, the drain water will flow back to the unit and the abnormal noise and leakage to the room will occur when the unit is stopped.

Fully insert the hose to the end of the drain Hose Band pipe connection. (Accessory) Tightening Torque: 2.5 to 3.4N-m Drain Pipe Connection

20+5

Drain Hose Elbow or (Accessory) Vinyl Chloride VP25 (Field-Supplied)

Upward Slope

Rising Part

Drain Piping Connection 1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

Min. 100mm

Unit

Common Drain Piping This drain pipe shall be separating from other pipes.

â&#x20AC;˘ The total length of a+b+c shall be within 1,100mm. â&#x20AC;˘ In case of lifting the drain pipe at the outlet part, perform the drain piping work as shown in the above figure.

Fig. 6.2 Drain Piping 121

Electrical Wiring

Turn OFF the main power switch to the indoor unit and the outdoor unit before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Check to ensure that the indoor fan and the outdoor fan have stopped before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Protect the wires, drain pipe, electrical parts, etc. from rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats may gnaw at unprotected parts and at the worst, a fire will occur. Tighten screws according to the following torque. M3.5: 1.2 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m

122

Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit. Lead the wires through the knockout hole in the side cover when using conduit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box.

7.1

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in “Technical Catalog I”. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Use twist pair cable with shielded for control cable between outdoor unit and indoor unit, control cable between indoor units and remote control switch cable of PC-AR. (3) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within ±10% of the rated voltage. (4) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (5) Check to ensure that the earth wire is connected.

7.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is shown in Fig. 7.2. The intermediate connection between the indoor unit and the air panel should be referred to “Installation of Optional Air Panel”. (1) Connect the cable of an optional remote control switch or an optional extension cable to the terminals inside the electrical box through the connecting hole in the cabinet. (2) Connect the power supply and earth wires to the terminals in the electrical box. (3) Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box.

Electrical Box Stopper (Metal) Power Source Cable Control Cable Remote Control Switch Cable

Screw Printed Circuit Board Terminal Board (TB2) Earth Screw Terminal Board (TB1) Printed Circuit Board

Control Cable (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) Remote Control Switch Cable

Power Source Cable Control Cable (between Indoor Unit and Indoor Unit)

< Power Source >

TB1 L

Power Source Wiring Operating Wiring Remote Control Switch Cable

1N 220-240V/50Hz 220V/60Hz

< Transmission Wiring > Terminal Board

2 A B

Transmission

R.C.S

Cord Clamp Hole for Wiring Connection 32.5 (for Spare) (Knock-out Hole)

Control Cable (Outdoor Unit to Indoor Unit and Indoor Unit to Indoor Unit)

Hole for Wiring Connection 30x39 (for Cable)

Remote Control Switch Cable (In case of group control operation by using a remote control switch)

 Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Refer to the item “10. Common”.

Remote Control Switch Cable

Fig. 7.2 Electrical Wiring Connection for Indoor Unit

123

Test Run

Test run should be performed according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Maintenance Manualâ&#x20AC;? of the outdoor unit.

Safety and Control Device Setting Indoor Unit RCI-1.0FSNQ, RCI-1.5FSNQ, RCI-1.8FSNQ, RCI-2.0FSNQ, RCI-2.3FSNQ, RCI-2.5FSNQ, RCI-3.0FSNQ, RCI-4.0FSNQ, RCI-5.0FSNQ and RCI-6.0FSNQ

Model For Control Circuit Fuse Capacity

Freeze Protection Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Thermostat Differential

124

Indoor Unit / RCD 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II. Unit: mm

Structure

6 15

5 9

710

8 4

18 17

1100

298

(Models: RCD-1.0FSN, RCD-1.5FSN, RCD-2.0FSN, RCD-2.5FSN and RCD-3.0FSN) 10

9 16

710

2.1

8 4

18 17

1660

298

(Model: RCD-4.0FSN and RCD-5.0FSN) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Part Name Fan Fan Motor Heat Exchanger Distributor Strainer Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection Drain Pipe Connection Drain Discharge Mechanism Float Switch Drain Pan Air Panel P-G23DWA1: For 1.0 to 3.0FSN, P-G46DWA1: For 4.0 and 5.0FSN Air Inlet Grille Air Filter Air Outlet Air Inlet

Remarks AC

With φa flare nut With φb flare nut VP 25

Model RCD-1.0FSN RCD-1.5FSN RCD-2.0FSN RCD-2.5FSN RCD-3.0FSN RCD-4.0FSN RCD-5.0FSN

a 12.7 12.7 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88 15.88

b 6.35 6.35 6.35 9.53 9.53 9.53 9.53

Optional

125

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation No.

Tool

No .

Tool

Handsaw

Spanner

Phillips Screwdriver

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Gauge Manifold

Refrigerant Gas Hose

Cutter for Wires

Megohmmeter

Gas Leak Detector

Copper Pipe Bender

Leveller

Manual Water Pump

Clamper for Solderless Terminals

Pipe Cutter

Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Brazing Kit

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Voltage Meter

9 10

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

3. 3.1

Transportation and Handling Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

Do not put any material on the product or the air panel.

3.2

Handling of Indoor Unit

Do not put any foreign material into the indoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the indoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Be careful not to damage on insulation materials of unitâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s surface when lifting.

126

Indoor Unit Installation

Do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

4.1

Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the indoor unit.

NOTE Check to ensure that the ceiling is strong enough. If not strong enough, the indoor unit may fall down on you. Do not install the indoor unit outdoors. If installed outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will occur.

If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories Accessory Paper Pattern (Carton Board) Level Scaler

Q'ty

Purpose

For Adjusting Space of False Ceiling Opening and Position of the Unit

(Cut and Take Out it from the Carton Board)

Cross Recessed Head Screws (M6)

For Fitting Paper Pattern

Washer (M10)

For Unit Suspension

Drain Hose

1 For Drain Hose Connection

Hose Clamp

Insulation

Cord Clamp

Packing (5Tx50x200)

For Covering Wiring Connection

Packing (5Tx270x270)

For Covering Drain Connection

Flare Nut (3/4 in.)

For Ď&#x2020;19.05 piping (Only for 4.0 and 5.0HP)

For Refrigerant Piping Connection

For Fixing Remote Control Switch Wiring, Louver Sensor and Insulation of Piping

Applicable Air Panel (Option) Indoor Unit

Applicable Air Panel (Option)

RCD-1.0FSN RCD-1.5FSN RCD-2.0FSN RCD-2.5FSN RCD-3.0FSN

P-G23DWA1

RCD-4.0FSN RCD-5.0FSN

P-G46DWA1

127

4.2

Initial Check

Min. 1500 Min. 100 Min. 500 Min. 1500

Piping Connection

Separated Installation

Min. 1500

Service Access Panel

Min. 100 Min. 500 Min. 3000

Service Access Panel

Min. 100 Min. 500

Min. 1500

Piping Connection

Closed Installation of Two Units

Distance from Wall Side 10 to 20mm 298mm Unit Height in False Celling

Unit Height in False Celling Min. 100

Min. 500

Piping Connection Side Min. 500 Min. 500 Min. 1000

Service Space Fig. 4.1 Space around Indoor Unit 128

• Select the installation location as follows: (A) Minimum Space (B) Down Slope Pitch of Drain Piping: 1/25 to 1/100 • Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. It is recommended that the indoor unit be installed 2.3 to 3 meters from the floor level. If the unit is installed higher than 3 meters, it is also recommended that a circulator be utilized so that uniform air distribution is available. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install the indoor unit in a machinery shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the indoor unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the indoor unit. • Pay attention to the following points when the indoor unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment, etc. (A) Do not install the indoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote control cable or remote control switch. (B) Install the indoor unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the indoor unit in an acid or alkaline environment.

(

Volume of the room where this Indoor Unit is installed.

)

≤0.3kg/m3

In detail, refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit.

4.3.2 Mounting the Suspension Brackets (Factory-Supplied) Mount the suspension brackets to the suspension bolts and secure them with nuts (*Field-Supplied), as shown in Fig. 4.4.

Suspension Bolt (Field-Supplied) Nut (Field-Supplied) *Washer (Accessory) Suspension Bracket

View from Above

Ceiling

Min.10

540 (Suspension)

298

Washer (Accessory)

1,060

890

1,620

1,450

For Concrete Slab

For Steel Beam

285 205

Drain Piping Connection

298 30

Wiring Hole (30x39) Wiring Hole (Ď&#x2020;32.5 Knockout Hole)

Air Suction Grille

95 (Gas Piping) 95 (Liquid Piping) 55 (Drain Piping)

Insert (100 to 150kg)

150 to 160mm

Optional Air Panel

445

115

(3) Check to ensure that the ceiling is horizontally level, otherwise drainage can not flow. (4) Strengthen the opening parts of the false ceiling. (5) Mount suspension bolts, as shown in Fig. 4.3.

410

Gas Piping Connection Liquid Piping Connection

Opening of False Ceiling and Suspension Bolts

*28

*Distance between Bottom of Unit and Ceiling Surface

260

Ceiling

Position of Receiver Part In Case of Installing Optional Receiver Kit

Fig. 4.2

Nut (Field-Supplied)

115

670 (Opening)

4 Suspension Bolts (M10 or W3/8) (Field-Supplied)

Piping Connection Side

Position of Suspension Bolts

115

Nut (Field-Supplied)

B (Suspension)

Model RCD-1.0FSN, RCD-1.5FSN, RCD-2.0FSN, RCD-2.5FSN, RCD-3.0FSN RCD-4.0FSN, RCD-5.0FSN

Approx. 65

*Washer (Accessory)

(mm)

A (Opening)

Optional Air Panel

Approx. 50

Installation

125 50

4.3

Concrete Steel

90 Anchor Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

I Beam

Ď&#x2020;32.5 Hole

Suspension Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

For Wooden Beam Suspension

View from B

Wooden Bar (60 to 90mm Square) Nut

Nut Wooden Beam

Long Hole (30x39)

Square Washer

Fig. 4.4 Mounting the Suspension Brackets

Square Washer Suspension Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

Fig. 4.3 Mounting the Suspension Bolts 129

4.3.3 Mounting the Indoor Unit (1) Lift the indoor unit by hoist, and do not put any force on the drain pan. (2) Hook the indoor unit on the suspension brackets, by setting the mounting bolts on the notches of the bracket, as shown in Fig. 4.5.

LOCK-TIGHT paint*: Paint the lock bolts and nuts. Adjust the indoor unit to the correct position while checking with the checking scales (factory-supplied).

Suspension Bolt

Piping Connection Side Suspension Bracket

Drain Pan

Fig. 4.5 Mounting the Indoor Unit

NOTE If a false ceiling has already been installed, complete all piping and wiring work inside the ceiling before hooking-up the indoor unit. (3) Secure the indoor unit using the nuts and flat washers. 4.3.4 Adjusting the Space between Indoor Unit and False Ceiling Opening

Check the level of the drain pan using a water level to avoid incorrect operation of the drain discharge mechanism in the indoor unit. The drain piping side of the indoor unit must be approximately 5mm lower than the other part. Tighten the nuts of the suspension brackets after the adjustment is completed. Apply LOCK-TIGHT paint* to the bolts and nuts in order to prevent them from loosening. If not done, abnormal noises or sounds may occur and the indoor unit may fall down.

(Accessory)

Refrigerant Piping Work

(2) When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners as shown in Fig. 5.2.

5.1

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select the piping size from the following table. Model RCD-1.0FSN RCD-1.5FSN RCD-2.0FSN RCD-2.5FSN RCD-3.0FSN RCD-4.0FSN RCD-5.0FSN

mm (in.) Liquid Piping

Gas Piping φ12.7 (1/2)

φ6.35 (1/4)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ6.35 (1/4)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

Tightening Torque (N.m) 20 φ6.35mm 40 φ9.53mm 60 φ12.7mm 80 *1) φ15.88mm 100 φ19.05mm *1): In the case of 4.0 and 5.0HP, tightening torque is 100N.m.

Fig. 5.2 Tightening Work of Flare Nut (3) Insulate the refrigerant pipes as shown in Fig. 5.3. Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Accessory)

Cord Clamp (Accessory)

Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied)

(3) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside. Blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air, to remove any dust or foreign materials before connecting pipes.

5.2

Pipe Size

Unit Side Insulation Material (Factory-Supplied)

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied)

Fig. 5.3 Insulation on Pipes

Piping Connection

(1) Position of piping connection is shown in Fig. 5.1. (Indoor Unit) (mm) Gas Piping Liquid Piping

205

Do not place the pipe directly on the ground.

125

298

260

Drain Piping

Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe.

410 285

Optional Air Panel

Correct

Incorrect

95 (Gas Piping) 95 (Liquid Piping) 55 (Drain Piping)

Fig. 5.1 Position of Piping Connection

Attach a cap or vinyl tape.

(4) Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedures should be performed according to “Installation & Maintenance Manual” of the outdoor unit. 131

Drain Piping (1) The position of the drain pipe connection is shown in Fig. 6.1.

132

55 (Drain Piping)

410 285

260

(mm)

205

125

Drain Piping (PVC Tube VP25) 298

Optional Air Panel

Fig. 6.1 Position of Drain Pipe Connection (2) Prepare a polyvinyl chloride pipe with a 32mm outer diameter. (3) Connecting Drain Piping (A)Insert the drain hose to the end of the drain pipe connecion fully and fasten the hose with hose band (Accessory). (B)Insulate the drain hose and band using the packing (5T x 270 x 270: Accessory). (C)The drain piping must be performed with a down-slope pitch of 1/25 to 1/100. (D)Completely fasten the tubing to the drain hose with the adhesive agent to avoid the drainage leakage.

Ceiling Suspension Bracket

1 to 1.5m c

(Max. 300)

(Max. 50: As Short As Possible)

Hose Band (Accessory) 1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

260

Max.850

(4) Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain hose.

(mm) Drain Hose

Packing (5Tx270x 270) (Accessory)

Drain Hose

Drain Hose Hose Band (Accessary) (Accessory) Elbow or Tightening Torque: Vinyl Chloride VP25 2.5 to 3.4N-m (Field-Supplied) Drain Pipe Connection

20+5 Fully insert the hose to the end of the drain pipe connection.

Use Adhesive Tape.

Adhesive is no necessary.

Upward Slope

Rising Part

Drain Piping Connection 1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

Min. 100mm

Unit

Common Drain Piping This drain pipe shall be separating from other pipes.

â&#x20AC;˘ The total length of a+b+c shall be within 950mm. â&#x20AC;˘ In case of lifting the drain pipe at the outlet part, perform the drain piping work as shown in the above figure.

Fig. 6.2 Drain Piping 133

Electrical Wiring

Connector for 220V

12V CN27 Connector for 240V

CN28

PCN1

CN1

Fig. 7.1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transformer (TF) Tighten screws according to the following torque. M3.5: 1.2 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m

134

Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit. Lead the wires through the knockout hole in the side cover when using conduit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box.

7.1

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in â&#x20AC;&#x153;Technical Catalog Iâ&#x20AC;?. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Use twist pair cable with shielded for control cable between outdoor unit and indoor unit, control cable between indoor units and remote control switch cable of PC-AR. (3) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +10% of the rated voltage. (4) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (5) Check to ensure that the earth wire is connected.

7.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is shown in Fig. 7.2. The intermediate connection between the indoor unit and the air panel should be referred to “Installation of Optional Air Panel”. (1) Connect the cable of an optional remote control switch or an optional extension cable to the connectors on the printed circuit board inside the electrical box through the connecting hole in the cabinet. (2) Connect the power supply and earth wires to the terminals in the electrical box. (3) Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box.

Wiring Hole (30x39 Long Hole)

φ32.5 (Knockout Hole) Cut out the Knockout Hole before using.

Wiring Connection Holes for Power Wires, Control Wires and Cable for Remote Control Switch

A Slide the closing plate downward to close the hole after leading wires.

View form A

Cable of Remote Control Switch

Control Cable Power Source Cable PCB4

Terminal Board Gas Piping Connection

410 285

Liquid Piping Connection

(mm) Fan Motor Cable

205

Drain Piping Connection

CA 2 CA 1 PCN7

CN17 (Red)

125

260

298

Louver Motor Cable

Wiring Hole (30x39) Wiring Hole ( 32.5 Knockout Hole)

Air Suction Grille

95 (Gas Piping) 95 (Liquid Piping) 55 (Drain Piping)

PCB2

PCB1

Optional Air Panel

445

Cable of Remote Control Switch

1N 220-240V/50Hz 220V/60Hz (3N )

Control Cable

Earth Screw

TB2

115

Power Source Cable

TB1

B 90

R L1

S L2

Mp N

1 220V/60Hz (3 )

Cable of Remote Control Control Cable Switch Earth Screw

Power Source Cable

TB2

Wiring Hole (30x39) Wiring Hole ( 32.5 Knockout Hole)

TB1

R L1

S L2

Mp N

View from B Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Refer to the item “10. Common”.

Fig. 7.2 Electrical Wiring Connection for Indoor Unit

135

Test Run

Test run should be performed according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Maintenance Manualâ&#x20AC;? of the outdoor unit.

Safety and Control Device Setting Indoor Unit RCD-1.0FSN, RCD-1.5FSN, RCD-2.0FSN, RCD-2.5FSN, RCD-3.0FSN, RCD-4.0FSN, RCD-5.0FSN

Model For Evaporator Fan Motor Thermostat

130+5

83+15

Cut-Out

Cut-In

For Control Circuit Fuse Capacity Freeze Protection Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Thermostat Differential

136

Indoor Unit / RPK 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

2.1

Structure Unit: mm

14 780 1

280

210

Left Drain Pipe Connection

(Models: RPK-0.8FSNSM1, RPK-1.0FSNSM1 and RPK-1.5FSNSM1) No. 1

Part Name

Remarks

Fan

2 3 4 5

Motor for Indoor Fan Heat Exchanger Strainer Expansion Valve

6 7 8 9 10

Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection Drain Pipe Connection Motor for Auto Swing Louver

11 12 13 14

Drain Pan Air Filter Air Outlet Air Inlet

Wireless Receiver Part

With φ12.7 Flare Nut With φ6.35 Flare Nut VP16

137

1019

1030 3

183 16

6 5 2

8 295

Left Drain Pipe Connection 17

15 450

265

Back Side Drawing

410 470

150 Wall Hole Place

(Model:

138

RPK-2.0FSNSM)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Part Name Fan Motor for Indoor Fan Heat Exchanger Distributor Strainer Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box Bearing Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection Drain Pipe Connection Motor for Auto Swing Louver

13 14 15 16 17

Drain Pan Air Filter Air Outlet Air Inlet Wireless Receiver Part

Remarks

With φ15.88 Flare Nut With φ6.35 Flare Nut VP16

1390

225

6 5

360

4 12

Left Drain Piping Connection 8

(Models: RPK-2.5FSNSM, RPK-3.0FSNSM, RPK-3.5FSNSM and RPK-4.0FSNSM)

No. 1

Fan

Part Name

Remarks

Model RPK-2.5FSNSM

a 15.88

b 9.53

2 3

Motor for Indoor Fan Heat Exchanger

RPK-3.0FSNSM RPK-3.5FSNSM

15.88 15.88

9.53 9.53

4 5

Distributor Strainer

RPK-4.0FSNSM

19.05 *1)

9.53

6 7

Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box

8 9

Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection

With φa Flare Nut With φb Flare Nut

10 11

Drain Pipe Connection Motor for Auto Swing Louver

VP20

Drain Pan

13 14

Air Filter Air Outlet

15 16

Air Inlet Wireless Receiver Part

*1) If using R410A, then remove the adaptor and use φ15.88 piping.

139

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation No.

Tool

No .

Tool

Handsaw

Spanner

Phillips Screwdriver

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Gauge Manifold

Refrigerant Gas Hose

Cutter for Wires

Megohmmeter

Gas Leak Detector

Copper Pipe Bender

Leveller

Manual Water Pump

Clamper for Solderless Terminals

Pipe Cutter

Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Brazing Kit

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Voltage Meter

9 10

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

3. 3.1

Transportation and Handling Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

Do not put any material on the product or on the air panel.

3.2

Handling of Indoor Unit

Do not put any foreign material into the indoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the indoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Do not hold the resin covers when holding or lifting the indoor unit. â&#x20AC;˘ To avoid damage to the resin covers, before lifting or moving the indoor unit, put a cloth on the resin covers.

140

Indoor Unit Installation

4.1

Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the indoor unit.

Do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

NOTE If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Check to ensure that the wall is strong enough. If not strong enough, the indoor unit may fall down on you. Do not install the indoor unit outdoors. If installed outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will occur.

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories Q'ty

Accessory

RPK-0.8 RPK-2.5 RPK-2.0 to 1.5 to 4.0

Mounting Bracket

Screw (φ4 x 25L)

Purpose

For Mounting Indoor Unit

For Mounting Bracket Screw (φ4 x 40L)

Plate

Thermal Insulation Pipe

For Drain Hose Setting

1 For Refrigerant Pipe

Thermal Insulation

Flare Nut (5/8) Union (Attached Refrigerant Gas Pipe)

φ15.88

For Refrigerant Gas Pipe (Only 4.0HP) φ15.88

φ19.05

Harness with Connector

Closed-End Terminal (CE Type)

Ring Core

0.8 to 1.5HP Only for Using Maintenance Service 2.0 to 4.0HP For Using Wired Remote Controller or Wireless Receiver Kit (PC-ALHZ)

Only 2.0 to 4.0HP Cord Clamp

Ultra-Red Light Filter

Only 2.5 to 4.0HP

141

4.2

Initial Check

• Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it for operation and maintenance working space, as shown in Fig. 4.1.

Unit: mm

Min. 100

Min. 1000

Min. 150

RPK-0.8FSNSM1, RPK-1.0FSNSM1 and RPK-1.5FSNSM1

Unit: mm

Min. 100

Min. 1000

Min. 50

RPK-2.0FSNSM

Unit: mm

Min. 100

Min. 200

Min. 1000

Min. 50

RPK-2.5FSNSM, RPK-3.0FSNSM RPK-3.5FSNSM and RPK-4.0FSNSM

Fig. 4.1 Operation and Installation Space

Indoor Side

2 to 5mm

(

Volume of the room where this Indoor Unit is installed.

)

≤0.3kg/m3

In detail, refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit. Outdoor Side

Fig. 4.2 Hole for Piping on the Wall 142

Wall

Hole for Piping

INDOOR UNIT

• Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install the indoor unit in a machinery shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the indoor unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the indoor unit. • Pay attention to the following points when the indoor unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment, etc. (A) Do not install the indoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote control cable or remote control switch. (B) Install the indoor unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the indoor unit in an acid or alkaline environment. • In the case of using wireless remote controller, do not install the indoor unit within approximately 1 meter from lighting in order to receive the signal correctly.

RPK-0.8FSNSM1, RPK-1.0FSNSM1 and RPK-1.5FSNSM1 Flange Part for Inserting Suspension Bracket Outline of the Unit 190

400 15

37.5 7.5 5

8 34

23 20

30 30 20 20 15

20 30

20 23 42

8 37

Service Space

7.5

280

Min. 100

190

Min.100

Min. 50

Service Space

20 20 25 25

20 30

20 20 20 25 25 25

20 20x3=60

50 25

20 38

38 20

115

530

780 This Line Indicates Unit Exterior Contour.

Hole (φ65) Left Rear Side Connection for Pipe and Wiring

Hole (φ65) Right Rear Side Connection for Pipe and Wiring

RPK-2.0FSNSM Outline of the Unit

Min. 100

314 25

450 13.1 25

21.9

38.1 20 50 50 40

266 13.1 22

38.1 24.9 50 50

20 20

20 20 30 30

40 40

30 30

20 12

8.5

150

55 20

21.9 15 8.5

200

Hole (φ65) Left Rear Side Connection for Pipe and Wiring

15 15x4=60

1030

45 49

48.5

20x5=100 20

298

9.5

Min. 50

Service Space

Flange Part for Inserting Suspension Bracket Min. Service 100 Space

6.5 48.5 20

12.5 8.5

This Line Indicates Unit Exterior Contour.

Hole (φ65) Right Rear Side Connection for Pipe and Wiring

RPK-2.5FSNSM, RPK-3.0FSNSM RPK-3.5FSNSM and RPK-4.0FSNSM Flange Part for Inserting Suspension Bracket 279 25

Min. 100 Min. 50

Service Space

450

45 75

450

211

100 5050100 75 75 100 5050 100

Service Space

75 45

148

8.5 450

65 360

127

50.5 63 214

107 20

80 86 62

Min. 200

8.5 450

125 132

1390 Hole (φ110) Left Rear Side Connection for Pipe and Wiring

This Line Indicates Unit Exterior Contour.

Hole (φ110) Right Rear Side Connection for Pipe and Wiring

Fig. 4.3 Mounting Bracket 143

4.3

RPK-0.8 to 1.5

Installation

The dimensions of the mounting bracket and the unit installation are indicated in Fig. 4.3.

Fixing Screw for Utilize at Least Four Screws. Mounting Bracket

4.3.1 Before Installation (Only for 2.5 to 4.0HP) Remove the mounting bracket after removing three(3) fixing screws. Keep three screws for installation.

Mounting Bracket

Piping Connection

RPK-2.0

3 Fixing Screws

4.3.2 Mounting Bracket onto Wall When the mounting bracket is directly attached to a wood wall or a concrete wall, check to ensure that the wall is strong enough to support a weight of 2000N. 4.3.3 Mounting the Unit between Pillars (1) Screws for wood marked with * should be tightened utilizing the upper hole. (2) It is not recommended that the mounting bracket be installed on one pillar. (3) The location where the indoor unit is to be installed should be so selected that an unbalanced weight distribution is avoided. (4) The mounting bracket should be installed so that the side of drain piping connected is slightly (about 3mm) lower than the other side, in order to avoid the incorrect position of the drain discharge. (Drain piping connection can be performed both right side and left side of the unit.)

Mounting Bracket

Piping Connection Fixing Screw for Mounting Bracket

Utilize at Least Four Screws.

RPK-2.5 to 4.0 Screws marked with * should be tightened utilizing upper holes. Pillar

Mounting Bracket

Screws for Mounting Bracket Utilize at Least Six Screws.

Piping Connection

Three screws for lower position should be fixed.

Fig. 4.4 Correct Mounting on Pillars

Fig. 4.5 Incorrect Mounting on Pillar 144

4.3.4 Mounting on a Concrete Wall or a Concrete Block Wall Attach the mounting bracket to the wall with anchor bolts as shown in Fig. 4.6. Utilize at least four plugs (M5).

RPK-2.0 Catch Mounting Bracket

Mounting Bracket

Extrusion

Screw

RPK-2.5 to 4.0

Plug

Fig. 4.6 Mounting on Concrete Wall or Concrete Block Wall • In Case of RPK-0.8 to 1.5 The bottom cover can be removed as shown below. Pull the bottom cover while pushing A and B, and remove it.

Hook the indoor unit to the mounting bracket, maintaining the indoor unit upright. Fix the bottom cover and the mounting bracket by three(3) screws. Catch Mounting Bracket

Lower Panel

A B

4.3.5 Mounting the Indoor Units Hook the indoor unit to the mounting bracket, maintaining the indoor unit upright.

Fix three M4 screws (Accessories).

Fig. 4.7 Mounting of the Indoor Units

RPK-0.8 to 1.5 When removing the indoor unit, press the “PUSH” part on the bottom side and pull the unit to the front side. Therefore, detach the catch from the mounting bracket.

Check to ensure that the unit is completely hooked onto the mounting bracket. If not, it may drop from the bracket, resulting in a serious accident.

Catch Mounting Bracket

Catch

Cutout Slowly hold up and press the unit downward.

145

4.3.6 Removing Front Panel In order to connect the refrigerant piping, wiring and to check drain water flow, removing the front panel is needed. Perform these work according to the following instructions. Pay attention to the resin components not to scratch. In Case of RPK-0.8 to 1.5 (1) Hold both sides of the flat panel and open it, and pull the right arm toward the inner side. Slight close the flat panel and pull it, then remove the flat panel. Flat Panel

(2) Remove the air filter and two (2) screws. Slowly pull the lower side of the front panel and release the catch by paying attention to the air outlet part without touching the outlet grille. Slightly lift the front panel upward in order to release the combined parts (three parts) of upper side of the front panel.

(4) Tighten two (2) screws and attach the air filter. Unit Body

Square Hole

Front Panel

Unit Body

(5) Insert the left and right arm of the front panel inside the hole according to the unit body step. Check to ensure that there is no gap between the front panel and the unit body and close the front panel.

Front panel

Shaft

Hole Step

(3) For attaching the front panel, firstly attach the front panel at the air outlet side, and attach three (3) catches at the upper part of the front panel. And then fix the catch on the bottom center part.

NOTE If the gap exists between the front panel and the air outlet, it may cause air leakage and dewing may occur at the front panel and the dew may drop.

146

When removing front panel, do not apply strong forces by hitting, etc. It may break the unit body. Front Panel

Unit Body

In Case of RPK-2.0 (1) Remove three (3) bushes at the lower side of the air outlet and remove the screws. (2) Open the flat panel and draw the center of the front panel. And release the catch of the drain pan. (3) Hold both sides of the front panel and draw the front panel forward slowly. And lift up the front panel carefully without breaking the horizontal louver at the air outlet.

Front Panel

(5) For attaching the front panel, firstly attach the front panel at the air outlet side, and attach three (3) catches at the upper part of the front panel. (6) There are stoppers inside of the front panel. Hold the stoppers by hands and check to ensure that there is no gap between the front panel and the outlet.

Unit Body

Flat Panel

Bush (3 pcs.)

NOTE

Screw

If the gap exists between the front panel and the air outlet, it may cause air leakage and dewing may occur at the front panel and the dew may drop.

Catch of Drain Pan

Front Panel

(4) Slightly lift the front panel upward in order to release the projecting parts (three parts) of upper side of the front panel and pull the front panel.

(7) After attaching the front panel, tighten three (3) screws fixing the lower side of the air outlet and attach the bushes.

When removing front panel, do not apply strong forces by hitting, etc. It may break the unit body.

Unit Body

Front Panel Square Hole

Front Panel

Unit Body

147

In Case of RPK-2.5 to 4.0 (1) Press the intake grille as shown below.

Release Catch

Remove Screw.

(2) Slowly pull the lower side of the intake grille at your side.

4.3.7 Putting back Front Panel (Only for Models RPK-2.5 to 4.0) (1) Firstly put back the lower side of the front panel, and then combine three parts of upper side of the front panel. (2) Open the inlet grille as shown 4.3.6-(1), (2), and fix the screw at the center of the inlet grille. (3) There are three stoppers inside of the front panel. Check to ensure that there is no gap between front panel and unit body. Stoppers

No Gap

Catch

Any gap may cause air leakage or dewing. Catch

Lift upward.

Square Hole

Right Side Cover

(3) Slowly pull the lower side of the front panel at your side by paying attention to the air outlet part without touching the outlet grille.

When removing front panel, do not apply strong forces by hitting, etc. It may break the unit body. Front Panel

Unit Body

148

• Right Side Piping Cut the corner by plastic cutter as shown below and remove a sharp edge completely.

Refrigerant Piping Work

5.1

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select the piping size from the following table. Table 5.1 Piping Size Model Gas Piping RPK-0.8FSNSM1 RPK-1.0FSNSM1 φ12.7 (1/2) RPK-1.5FSNSM1 RPK-2.0FSNSM φ15.88 (5/8) RPK-2.5FSNSM RPK-3.0FSNSM φ15.88 (5/8) RPK-3.5FSNSM RPK-4.0FSNSM φ19.05 (3/4) *1) *1) If using R410A, then remove the use φ15.88 piping.

• Left Side Piping Cut the corner at the left side by plastic cutter as same as the right side piping. Left Side Cover

mm (in.) Liquid Piping φ6.35 (1/4) φ6.35 (1/4) φ9.53 (3/8) φ9.53 (3/8) adaptor and

• Rear Side Piping Right Side Cover

(3) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside. Blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air to remove any dust or foreign materials before connecting pipes.

5.2

Piping Connection

(1) Position of piping connection is shown in Fig. 5.1 and Fig. 5.2. (2) Piping Direction for the Indoor Unit Three directions of piping connection to the indoor unit can be performed; to the rear side, the right side and the left side of the unit, respectively. Therefore, most appropriate piping for a room can be selected.

NOTE In the case of models RPK-2.5 to 4.0, remove 4 screws fixed the stopper and remove the pipe and the drain hose.

Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe. Do not place the pipe directly on the ground.

Correct

Incorrect

Fixing Screw (4 pcs.)

Attach a cap or vinyl tape.

149

• When bending the tubes, firmly fix the tube at the heat exchanger side. Contour of the Unit

Insulation

For Right Side Piping

50 R

For Left Side Piping

Tightening Torque (N.m) 20 40 60 80 100

Pipe Size A

C For Rear Side Piping

Model RPK-0.8 to 1.5 RPK-2.0 RPK-2.5 to 4.0

Unit: mm B C 108 330 142 328 125 575

A 480 470 480

Fig. 5.1 Liquid Piping

φ6.35mm φ9.53mm φ12.7mm φ15.88mm φ19.05mm

Fig. 5.3 Tightening Work of Flare Nut (4) Insulate the refrigerant pipes as shown in Fig. 5.4. Thermal Insulation Pipe (Accessory)

• Bend the gas pipe at the flexible pipe part. Contour of the Unit

Insulation

For Right Side Piping

For Left Side Piping

Fig. 5.4 Insulation on Pipes (5) Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedures should be performed according to “Installation & Maintenance Manual” of the outdoor unit.

For Rear Side Piping

Model RPK-0.8 to 1.5 RPK-2.0 RPK-2.5 to 3.5 RPK-4.0

A 410 440 550 585

Unit: mm B C 108 310 142 298 125 645 125 680

Fig. 5.2 Gas Piping

An excess or a shortage of refrigerant is the main cause of trouble to the units. Charge the correct refrigerant quantity. (6) Fix the plate of pipes (factory-supplied) as shown in Fig. 5.5. In Case of RPK-0.8 to 2.0 Stopper

When bending the tubes, pay attention to the dew protection heater covered with insulation.

Plate for Pipe

In Case of RPK-2.5 to 4.0 Stopper

(3) When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners as shown in Fig. 5.3. Fixing Screw (4 pcs.)

Fig. 5.5 150

Drain Piping

(1) The standard direction of drain piping connection is right side as viewed from the discharge grilles. However, it can be performed from the left side or rear side. Contour of Unit B Drain Pipe Connection (D)

(3) Provide a vinyl chloride pipe, VP16(RPK0.8 to 2.0) or VP20(RPK-2.5 to 4.0). (4) Connect a drain piping as shown in Fig. 6.3. Use adhesive tape for connecting the drain pipe. Provide a downward slope to flow drain water smoothly.

φE Hole for Rear Side Connection for Wiring and Piping

Use Adhesive Tape C

24mm

VP16(RPK-0.8 to 2.0)

Model RPK-0.8 to 1.5 RPK-2.0 RPK-2.5 to 4.0

A 560 550 800

B 115 150 125

C 45 45 65

Unit: mm D E VP16 65 VP16 65 VP20 110

Fig. 6.1 Direction of Drain Piping

Change Drain Piping Connection

Drain Hose

Drain Outlet Cap Insert until This Line

Fig. 6.3 Connection of Drain Piping (5) Pour water onto the drain pan and check to ensure that water can flow smoothly.

NOTE

(2) When the left side drain piping connection is performed, remove the cap of left side drain pipe, and then attach this cap to the right side drain pipe in order to change drain piping connection from right side to left side. If the cap is fastened tightly, remove the cap by using the plier.

Drain Outlet Cap

VP20(RPK-2.5 to 4.0)

Drain Hose

• When installing the pipe, do not tie the drain pipe and refrigerant pipe together. • Pay attention to the thickness of the insulation when the left side piping is performed. If it is too thick, piping can not be installed in the unit.

Insert until This Line

Fig. 6.2 Left Side Connection

151

7.1

Electrical Wiring

Connector for 220V

12V 24V

CN27 Connector for 240V

CN28

PCB1(P)

PCB1(M) CN1

PCN1

Fig. 7.1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transformer (TF)

Tighten screws according to the following torque. M3.5: 1.2 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box.

152

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in “Technical Catalog I”. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Use twist pair cable with shielded for control cable between outdoor unit and indoor unit, control cable between indoor units and remote control switch cable of PC-AR. (3) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +10% of the rated voltage. (4) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (5) Check to ensure that the earth wire is connected. (6) Power Source Main Switch Install a multi-pole main switch with a space of 3.5mm or more between each phase.

7.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is shown in Fig. 7.2. (1) Connect the cable of an optional remote control switch or an optional extension cable to the connectors on the printed circuit board inside the electrical box through the connecting hole in the cabinet. (2) Connect the power supply and earth wires to the terminals in the electrical box. • Attach the ring core (accessory) to the power source line as shown in Fig. 7.2. (Only for RPK-2.0 to 4.0FSNSM) • Fix the ring core by using the band (accessory). (3) Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box.

NOTE In the case of using PC-AR, RPK-0.8 to 1.5FSNSM1 Set SW1 of Wireless Receiver Part to Wired RPK-2.0FSNSM Remove CN25 wiring. RPK-2.5 to 4.0FSNSM Remove CN12 and CN25 wiring. If not, PC-AR can not function.

RPK-0.8 to 1.5FSNSM1 Electrical Box Cover (Opening this cover, PCB1 is in it.)

Wireless Receiver Part

Terminal Board

2-Wires Non-Polarity

Control Cable

Faston cord by clamp.

2-Wires Non-Polarity

Power Source Cable

PC-AR

Control Cable

1N~ 220-240/50Hz 220V/60Hz (3N~)

Screw for Earth Wire

Power Source Cable

PC-AR

1~ 220-240/50Hz 220V/60Hz (3~)

Release Right Side Screw and Connect Terminal Board to Power Source Line, Transmitting Line between Indoor and Outdoor and Remote Control Switch Line.

RPK-2.0FSNSM

RPK-2.5 to 4.0FSNSM Electrical Box

Electrical Box Remote Control Switch Connecting Cable for PC-AR Connecting by CN13 on PCB1

Terminal Board Power Source Line

Remote Control Switch Connecting Cable for PC-AR Connecting by CN13 on PCB1

Power Source Line

Terminal Board

Faston Cord by Clamp

Hole for Unit Right Side Ｒ

Ｓ

Ｔ

Hole for Unit Right Side

１２Ｒ

Ｓ

Ｔ

１２

Hole for Piping and Wiring Operating Line Hole for Electrical Box Screw for Earth Wire

Remote Control Switch

Operating Line Hole for Piping and Hole for Electrical Box Wiring

Remote Control Switch

Screw for Earth Wire

Red

Black

PC-AR

Power Source Control Cable Cable

(Accessory)

Fig. 7.2 Wiring Connection for Indoor Unit 153

(4) Connecting the wires to TB1 • The screws of terminal board can not be removed from the terminal board to protect the screws from falling. When fastening the terminal, ensure that the screw is fastened through the hole of terminal. Screw

•

Check to ensure that the terminal specification, shall be applied to the screw (M4 for power supply, M3.5 for operating line) of the terminal box. Use the crimping terminal when the stranded wire. If a single wire is used, connect the wire direct shown in the below figure. Connect it with Crimping Terminal.

Connect it Direct As Shown Below.

Stranded Wire

Single Wire

Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Refer to the item “10. Common”.

Test Run

Test run should be performed according to “Installation & Maintenance Manual” of the outdoor unit.

Do not operate the system until all the check points have been cleared. (A) Check to ensure that the electrical resistance is more than 1 megohm, by measuring the resistance between ground and the terminal of the electrical parts. If not, do not operate the system until the electrical leakage is found and repaired. (B) Check to ensure that the stop valves of the outdoor unit are fully opened, and then start the system. (C) Check to ensure that the switch on the main power source has been ON for more than 12 hours, to warm the compressor oil by the crankcase heater. Pay attention to the following items while the system is running. (A) Do not touch any of the parts by hand at the discharge gas side, since the compressor chamber and the pipes at the discharge side are heated higher than 90oC. (B) DO NOT PUSH THE BUTTON OF THE MAGNETIC SWITCH(ES). It will cause a serious accident.

Safety and Control Device Setting Indoor Unit RPK-0.8FSNSM1, RPK-1.0FSNSM1, RPK-1.5FSNSM1, RPK-2.0FSNSM, RPK-2.5FSNSM, RPK-3.0FSNSM RPK-3.5FSNSM, RPK-4.0FSNSM

Model For Evaporator Fan Motor Currency

Cut-Out

1 (Alarm Code 19)

For Control Circuit Fuse Capacity Freeze Protection Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Thermostat Differential

154

Indoor Unit / RPF, RPFI 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

220

Structure

Unit: mm

4 9

630

(Models: RPF-1.0FSN(E) and RPF-1.5FSN(E)) a

220 11

9 7

620

2.1

(Models: RPFI-1.0FSN(E) and RPFI-1.5FSN(E)) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Remarks

Model RPF-1.0FSN(E) RPF-1.5FSN(E) RPFI-1.0FSN(E) RPFI-1.5FSN(E)

a 1,045 1,170 848 973

With φ12.7 Flare Nut With φ6.35 Flare Nut φ18.5 OD

155

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation No.

Tool

No.

Tool

Handsaw

Spanner

Phillips Screwdriver

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Gauge Manifold

Refrigerant Gas Hose

Cutter for Wires

Megohmmeter

Gas Leak Detector

Copper Pipe Bender

Leveller

Manual Water Pump

Clamper for Solderless Terminals

Pipe Cutter

Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Brazing Kit

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Voltage Meter

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

3. 3.1

Transportation and Handling Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

Do not put any material on the product.

3.2

Handling of Indoor Unit

Do not put any foreign material into the indoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the indoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Do not hold the resin covers when holding or lifting the indoor unit. â&#x20AC;˘ To avoid damage to the resin covers, before lifting or moving the indoor unit, put a cloth on the resin covers.

156

Indoor Unit Installation

4.1

Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the indoor unit. Do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

NOTE If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Do not install the indoor unit outdoors. If installed outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will occur.

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories

Accessor y

Q'ty

Adjustment Bolt for Installation

Insulation (22ID x 120)

Insulation (28ID x 135)

Cord Clamp

Purpose For Adjusting the Flat Level of the Unit

For Refrigerant Piping Connection

To Fix Insulation for Refrigerant Pipings

157

4.2

Initial Check

• Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it for operation and maintenance working space, as shown in Fig. 4.1. *1: Provide a space so that air can flow smoothly.

RPF Type

(mm)

Ceiling

Upward Air Outlet Wall

630

Wall

Min. 300

RPFI Type Ceiling

620

Front Air Outlet

640

Upward Air Outlet Short Flexible Duct

Min. 240

Service Space for Electrical Box

Min. 240

Piping Space

Min. 240

Service Space for Electrical Box

Piping Space

Unit (Inside) Service Access Panel

Floor B

<Service Access Panel> Provide a service access door or panel as shown below.

Service Access Panel

(mm) Model RPFI-1.0FSN(E) RPFI-1.5FSN(E)

A 620

B 1,260 1,380

Fig. 4.1 Operation and Installation Space • Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit.

158

• Do not install the indoor unit in a machinery shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the indoor unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the indoor unit. • Pay attention to the following points when the indoor unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment, etc. (A) Do not install the indoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box or remote control switch. (B) Install the indoor unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the indoor unit in an acid or alkaline environment. • Check to ensure that the foundation is flat, level and sufficiently strong. • It is recommended that a service access panel for floor concealed type indoor units be provided. The access panel must be fixed with screw(s) so that service engineer(s) only is accessible.

(

Volume of the room where this Indoor Unit is installed.

)

≤0.3kg/m3

In detail, refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit.

4.3

Installation

(1) Check to ensure the fixing position of the unit as shown in the Fig. 4.2.

(5) Install the optional air outlet grille of the RPFI unit as shown in the following figure. If installed in a comparatively high humidity place, dew may occur. Therefore, attach a plate which can absorb water, like SUNFINE AQ made by ASAHI Chemical Co., around the grilled.

220

103

Fixing onto Floor using Bolts (2-M8) (View from Top Side)

2-12.5 x 18 C

B A

4 - φ7

Polyurethane Foam for Thermal Insulation (Field-Supplied)

Floor Concealed Unit

A Fixing onto Wall (View from Front Side)

D A A

RPF-1.0FSN(E)

1,045

754

228

732

228

140

630

RPF-1.5FSN(E)

1,170

879

228

857

228

140

630

RPFI-1.0FSN(E)

848

754

732

139

620

RPFI-1.5FSN(E)

973

879

857

139

620

Fig. 4.2 Fixing Position (2) Adjust the flat level of the unit by adjusting bolts for installation which are attached in the unit. Make the drain pipe side lower than the opposite side for smooth drain. (3) Fix the base plate and back plate of the unit with field-supplied fixing bolts and screws. When attaching the adjusting bolts for installation, remove the electrical wiring box. (4) In case of the RPF unit, perform the above work after removing the front cover and side cover of the unit.

Side Cover

Provide a service access cover which is fixed by screws so that the fan runner is not directly touched. (Only RPFI model)

The optional air outlet grille of the RPFI unit can not be used in a highly humid place like a kitchen, because dew may occur on the grille surface. • Air Outlet Direction Change (RPFI Unit) In case of changing the direction of air outlet for the RPFI unit from upward to front, follow the procedures below. (a) Remove the fixing screws of the air outlet flange and the up-front cover. Then, remove the flange and the cover. (b) Reverse the side of the flange right and left. (c) Put the cover on the top of the unit, and put the flange on the front side of the unit. (d) Fix the flange and the cover.

Front Cover

Air Outlet Flange

1 2

Fixing Bolt

2 Fixing Bolt

Air Outlet Duct (Field-Supplied)

Fig. 4.4 Details of Air Outlet Grille (Floor Concealed Type) F 315

4 - φ14

Model

Absorbent Plate for Water EX.: SUNFINE AQ made by ASAHI Chemical Co.

Air Outlet Grille

220

85 60

Fixing onto Floor using Wood Screws (4-M5) (View from Top Side)

Adjustment Bolt for Installation (Accessories)

Up-Front Cover

Fixing Screw

Fig. 4.3 Installation Unit

159

Refrigerant Piping Work

10 64

5.1

Liquid Piping Connection

50 52

52 32

134

Drain Hose (φ18.5 OD)

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select the piping size from the following table.

Fig. 5.2 Piping Connection of RPFI Unit (2) When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners as shown in Fig. 5.3.

Table 5.1 Piping Size Gas Piping

mm (in.) Liquid Piping

φ12.7 (1/2)

φ6.35 (1/4)

(3) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside. Blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air to remove any dust or foreign materials before connecting pipes. Pipe Size

5.2

Piping Connection

(1) Position of piping connection is shown in Fig. 5.1 (RPF Unit) and Fig. 5.2 (RPFI Unit). 220 133

163 Liquid Piping Connection 156

Gas Piping Connection

260 389

529

Drain Hose (φ18.5 OD)

182

134

Fig. 5.1 Piping Connection of RPF Unit

160

φ6.35mm φ12.7mm

Tightening Torque (N.m) 20 60

Fig. 5.3 Tightening Work of Flare Nut

529

Gas Piping Connection

388

220 122 133

260

(3) Insulate the refrigerant pipes as shown in Fig. 5.4. Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Accessory)

Cord Clamp (Accessory)

Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied) Unit Side

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Insulation Material (Field Supplied) (Factory-Supplied)

Fig. 5.4 Insulation on Pipes

Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe. Correct

Incorrect

(4) Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedures should be performed according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Maintenance Manualâ&#x20AC;? of the outdoor unit.

Drain Piping

Do not create an upper-slope or rise for the drain piping, since drain water can flow back to the indoor unit and leakage into the room will occur when the system operation is stopped. Do not connect the drain pipe with sanitary or sewage piping or any other drainage piping. When the common drain piping is connected with other indoor units, the connected position of each indoor unit must be higher than the common piping. The pipe size of the common drain pipe must be large enough according to the unit size and number of units. After performing drain piping work and electrical wiring, check to ensure that water flows smoothly as in the following procedure. (A) Switch OFF the power supply. (B) Pour water into the drain pan. (C) Check to ensure that the water flows smoothly or whether no water leakage occurs. When water cannot be found at the end of the drain piping, pour another water into the drain pan. (1) The position of the drain pipe connection is shown in Fig. 5.1 and Fig. 5.2. (2) Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain hose as shown below.

Drain Hose

Insulation (Field-Supplied) Polyvinyl Chloride Tube (Field-Supplied)

Fig. 6.1 Position of Drain Pipe Connection

161

Electrical Wiring

Connector for 220V

12V 24V

CN20 Connector for 240V

CN21

PCN1

CN1

Fig. 7.1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transformer (TF) Tighten screws according to the following torque. M3.5: 1.2 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m

162

Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit. Lead the wires through the knockout hole in the side cover when using conduit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box.

7.1

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in â&#x20AC;&#x153;Technical Catalog Iâ&#x20AC;?. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Use twist pair cable with shielded for control cable between outdoor unit and indoor unit, control cable between indoor units, control cable between indoor units and remote control switch cable of PC-AR. (3) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +10% of the rated voltage. (4) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (5) Check to ensure that the earth wire is connected.

7.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

(1) Remove the front cover and the side cover. Wiring from left-rear side to the RPF unit is shown in Fig. 7.2. Cables

(4) Wiring connection is shown in Fig. 7.5. Terminal Board

Wall R S Mp L1 L2 L1

Electrical Box

A B

Remote Control Switch Cable Control Cable

Front Cover Side Cover

1 2

Electrical Box

(2) Remove the front cover. Wiring from left-rear side to the RPFI unit is shown in Fig. 7.3. Wall

Power Source Cable

Cables

Fig. 7.2 Wiring to the RPF Unit

R S Mp L1 L2 L1

Electrical Box

Front Cover

Remote Control Switch Cable Control Cable

A B

Opening (Rear)

R S Mp L1 L2 L1

2 A B

Power Source Cable

1N 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz (3N )

Remote Control Switch Cable Control Cable Power Source Cable

1 220V 60Hz (3 )

Wiring Connection Terminal Board (TB) Enlarged View of P

Fig. 7.5 Wiring Connection Fig. 7.3 Wiring to the RPFI Unit (3) Wiring from right-rear side is shown in Fig. 7.4.

Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Refer to the item “10. Common”.

Side Cover Electrical Box

Side Cover

Wall Through Hole Intermediate Cable Remote Control Switch Cable

Through Hole

Power Source Cable

Fig. 7.4 Wiring from Right-Rear Side 163

Test Run

Test run should be performed according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Maintenance Manualâ&#x20AC;? of the outdoor unit.

Safety and Control Device Setting Indoor Unit RPF-1.0FSN(E), RPF-1.5FSN(E), RPFI-1.0FSN(E), RPFI-1.5FSN(E)

Model For Evaporator Fan Motor Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

130+5

83+15

For Control Circuit Fuse Capacity Freeze Protection Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Thermostat Differential

164

Indoor Unit / RPC 1.

Safety Summary

Structure

Please refer to pages (ii) and (iii) in this Technical Catalogue II.

a b

Structure

210 216

2.1

Unit: mm

670

8 9

(Models: RPC-2.0FSN, RPC-2.5FSN and RPC-3.0FSN) a b

270 276

670

8 9

(Models: RPC-4.0FSN and RPC-5.0FSN) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Part Name Fan Fan Motor Heat Exchanger Distributor Strainer Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Gas Pipe Connection Refrigerant Liquid Pipe Connection Drain Pipe Connection Auto-Swing Motor Drain Pan Air Inlet Grille Air Filter Air Outlet Air Inlet

Remarks AC

RPC-2.0FSN RPC-2.5FSN RPC-3.0FSN

Model

1,100 1,320 1,320

1,000 1,220 1,220

15.88 15.88 15.88

6.35 9.53 9.53

RPC-4.0FSN RPC-5.0FSN

1,320 1,580

1,220 1,480

15.88 15.88

9.53 9.53

With φc Flare Nut With φd Flare Nut VP20

165

2.2

Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation No.

Tool

No .

Tool

Handsaw

Spanner

Phillips Screwdriver

Charging Cylinder

Vacuum Pump

Gauge Manifold

Refrigerant Gas Hose

Cutter for Wires

Megohmmeter

Gas Leak Detector

Copper Pipe Bender

Leveller

Manual Water Pump

Clamper for Solderless Terminals

Pipe Cutter

Hoist (for Indoor Unit)

Brazing Kit

Ammeter

Hexagon Wrench

Voltage Meter

9 10

NOTE About vacuum pump, gas hose, charging cylinder, gauge manifold, please use suitable equipments for R410A respectively. Do not mix other refrigerant.

Transportation and Handling

3.1

Transportation

Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

Do not put any material on the product.

3.2

Handling of Indoor Unit

Do not put any foreign material into the indoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the indoor unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Do not hold the resin covers when holding or lifting the indoor unit.

166

• To avoid damage to the resin covers, before lifting or moving the indoor unit, put a cloth on the resin covers.

Indoor Unit Installation

Do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

Fig. 3.1 Side Covers (1) Slide the resin side covers forward approximately 15mm. (2) Carefully pull the bottom of the side covers away from the indoor unit approximately 10mm. (3) Remove the resin side cover upward.

• It is recommended that indoor units be installed 2.3 to 3 meters from the floor level. If units are installed higher than 3 meters, it is also recommended that circulator(s) be utilized so that uniform air distribution is available. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit.

4.1

Factory-Supplied Accessories

Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the indoor unit.

NOTE Fixing Screw (M4)

If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Inside of Resin Side Cover

Hooking Part Hooking Plate

Fig. 3.2 Removing Side Covers • The mechanism of the automatic swing louver is utilized. Do not move the swing louver by hand or other objects. This can damage the mechanism of the automatic swing louver.

167

Table 4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories Accessory

4.2

Purpose

Suspension Bracket

Drain Hose

Hose Clamp

For Drain Hose Connection

Insulation (10T x 50 x 200)

For Drain Pipe Connection

Insulation

For Flare Nut of Refrigerant Pipe

Cord Clamp (Large)

For Fixing Insulation

Cord Clamp (Small)

For Fixing Drain Piping

Flare Nut (3/4 in.)

For φ19.05 piping (Only for 4.0 and 5.0HP)

For Unit Suspension

Initial Check

• Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it for operation and maintenance working space, as shown in Fig. 4.1. (mm)

Min. 300

Min. 500

Min. 40

Min. 8 Min. 400

Fig. 4.1 Operation and Maintenance Space • Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. • Do not install flammable parts in the service space for the indoor unit. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install the indoor unit in a machinery shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the indoor unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the indoor unit. 168

Q'ty

• Pay attention to the following points when the indoor unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment, etc. (A) Do not install the indoor unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote control cable or remote control switch. (B) Install the indoor unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the indoor unit in an acid or alkaline environment.

(

Volume of the room where this Indoor Unit is installed.

)

≤0.3kg/m3

In detail, refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit.

4.3

Installation

(mm)

4.3.1 Mounting of Suspension Bolts Step 1 Select final location and installation direction of the indoor unit paying careful attention to the space for the piping, wiring and maintenance. Step 2 Mount suspension bolts, as shown in Fig. 4.2. *For Concrete Slab *For Steel Beam

Model RPC-2.0FSN

A 1,100

B 1,000

RPC-2.5FSN RPC-3.0FSN RPC-4.0FSN

1,320

1,220

RPC-5.0FSN

1,580

1,480

Fig. 4.4 Position of Suspension Bolts Suspension Bolt

150 to 160mm

Insert (100 to 150kg) Concrete

Steel Anchor Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

I Beam

Washer

Suspension Bolt (W3/8 or M10)

Nut

Fig. 4.2 Mounting of Suspension Bolts 4.3.2 Installation Pattern When installing the indoor unit, use the installation pattern which is printed on the inner side of the carton box. â&#x20AC;˘ Installation Pattern: (1) Hole Positions of Sling Bolts (2) Hole Positions of Refrigerant Piping (3) Hole Positions of Drain Piping

Fix with M8 nut (x4) (Factory-Supplied).

Sling Bolt Installation pattern is printed on the inner side.

(6mm)

Ceiling

Rear Side of the Unit Nut (Factory-Supplied)

Fig. 4.5 Nuts and Washer

Fig. 4.3 Installation Pattern

0 to 3mm

4.3.3 For Hanging Type Installation Mount the suspension brackets to the suspension bolts and secure them with nuts (*Field-Suppled), as shown in Fig. 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6. A

View from Front

B View from Top

110

Rear Side Outlet for Pipings

0 to 3mm

280

670

280

Position of Suspension Bolt

View from Right

Fig. 4.6 Inclination of Unit for Drain 169

(A) Piping from Backward Side

Refrigerant Piping Work

Hole on the Wall Piping

70 160 88

123

Cap

154

Open the knockout hole.

(B) Piping from Upper Side

Piping Materials

(1) Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes. (2) Select the piping size from the following table.

Cap 19

Table 5.1 Piping Size Model RPC-2.0FSN RPC-2.5FSN RPC-3.0FSN RPC-4.0FSN RPC-5.0FSN

Drain Piping Gas Piping Liquid Piping

Gas Piping φ15.88 (5/8)

mm (in.) Liquid Piping φ6.35 (1/4)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

φ15.88 (5/8)

φ9.53 (3/8)

12 82

Rear Side

Gas Piping

Open the knockout hole.

Knockout Hole

135

106

130

Liquid Piping

104

175

Drain Piping (VP20)

Model RPC-2.0FSN RPC-2.5FSN RPC-3.0FSN RPC-4.0FSN RPC-5.0FSN

(mm) b

200

205

195

210

Fig. 5.1 Piping Connection of Indoor Unit

170

103

104

Step 1 Slide the knobs to the rear side.

Drain Piping

156

Open the knockout hole.

* Adjust liquid piping by hand

(2) Piping work should be performed from the bottom side of the unit. Remove the air inlet grille before the piping work, according to the following steps.

(1) Position of piping connection is shown in Fig. 5.1. Gas Piping

119

Piping Connection

Gas Piping

162

(3) Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is no dust and moisture inside. Blow the inside of the pipes with nitrogen or dry air, to remove any dust or foreign materials before connecting pipes.

5.2

Liquid piping

*139

5.1

11 0

Slide

Knob

Step 2 Open the air inlet grille.

Step 3 Push up and slide the air inlet grilles to the rear side.

Rear Side

Push up and slide. Cover Open the air inlet grille.

(3) When tightening the flare nut, use two spanners as shown in Fig. 5.2.

(5) The piping connection for the indoor unit shall be performed inside of the unit, and the piping connection can be performed from three (3) directions, rear, right side and upward. In case of the piping connection from the rear or upward, the plastic cap with knockout holes is attached at the position of the unit for the refrigerant and drain pipings. Therefore, cut out the knockout holes of the cap for the piping, and attach the cap again after leading the refrigerant piping through the cap.

A B-B

Refrigerant Piping

A Pipe Size

Tightening Torque (N.m) 20 40 80 *1) 100

φ6.35mm φ9.53mm φ15.88mm φ19.05mm *1): In the case of 4.0 and 5.0HP, tightening torque is 100N.m.

Cap Cabinet

A-A

Fig. 5.4 Position of Piping Connection (6) Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedures should be performed according to “Installation & Maintenance Manual” of the outdoor unit.

Fig. 5.2 Tightening Work of Flare Nut (4) Insulate the refrigerant pipes as shown in Fig. 5.3. Cord Clamp (Accessory)

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe (Accessory) Refrigerant Pipe (Field-Supplied)

Unit Side

Cap the end of the pipe when the pipe is to be inserted through a hole. Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe. Correct

Incorrect

Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Insulation Material (Field-Supplied) (Factory-Supplied)

Fig. 5.3 Insulation on Pipes

171

Drain Piping

(2) For Left Side Connection Drain Boss

Do not create an upper-slope or rise for the drain piping, since drain water can flow back to the indoor unit and leakage into the room will occur when the system operation is stopped. Do not connect the drain pipe with sanitary or sewage piping or any other drainage piping. When the common drain piping is connected with other indoor units, the connected position of each indoor unit must be higher than the common piping. The pipe size of the common drain pipe must be large enough according to the unit size and number of units. The standard direction of drain piping connection is right side as viewed from the discharge grilles. However, it can be performed from the left side when the left side connection is required due to the building construction. (1) For Right Side Connection (A) Insert the hose into the hose clamp. (B) Push the drain hose onto the drain boss until the hose reaches the end of the drain pan. (C) Tighten the screw for the hose clamp in order to hold the hose around the drain connection without any leakage of drain water as shown in Fig. 6.1. (D) Insulate the drain hose around the hose clamp to prevent any condensation as shown in Fig. 6.1.

Hose Clamp

Fan Runner

Fan Motor

Drain Plug

Rear Side

Fastener Band Insulation Plug Drain Plug

Fig. 6.2 Drain Plug Remove the drain plug of the left-side drain boss as indicated in the following procedure. (A) (B) (C) (D)

Cut the fastener. Remove the insulation material. Remove the drain plug. Insert the drain plug into the right-side drain boss by using a driver as shown in Fig. 6.3.

Unit Side

Driver

Drain Plug

Drain Boss

Fig. 6.3 Inserting Drain Plug (E) After inserting the drain plug into the right-side drain boss, seal the jointed part by using a water-proof chloride type sealing material and secure it with fastener. Seal Material

Drain Boss Hose Clamp Drain Boss Adhesive is no necessary.

Thermal Insulation

Direct the screw of hose clamp upward to prevent the screw from touching the filter. Drain Pipe Adhesive is no necessary.

Fig. 6.1 Connecting Drain Piping

172

Drain Plug

Fig. 6.4 Sealing Joint Part (F) Wrap the insulation material around the drain connection. (G) Connect the drain hose to the left-side drain connection as the same as the right side drain connection procedure.

(3) Connecting a Drain Piping (A) Prepare a polyvinyl chloride (P. V. C) tube with an outer diameter of 32mm. (VP20) (B) Pay attention to the position of the drain pipe. Keep the down-slope, 1/25 to 1/ 100. Do not create an upper slope or rise for the drain piping. (C) Seal the connecting part of the drain pipe by using the water-proof chloride type sealing material. (D) Wrap the insulation material around the connecting part perfectly. (E) Fasten the drain pipe to the connecting part with the factory-supplied clamp. Hose Clamp (Accessory) Thermal Insulation (Field-Supplied) Drain Boss

Drain Hose

Secure downward slope.

Adhesive is no necessary.

Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (VP20 Field-Supplied) Thermal Insulation (Attached Drain Hose)

Thermal Insulation (Accessory)

Adhesive is no necessary.

Thermal Insulation (Accessory)

Electrical Wiring

Fig. 6.5 Wrapping Insulation Material (F) Do not connect the drain pipes with sanitary or sewage or any other drainage pipe. (G) When installing the pipe, do not tie the drain pipe and refrigerant pipe together. (H) After completing the drain pipe work, pour water into the drain pan and check to ensure that water can flow smoothly.

12V

220V

Connector for 220V

Hose Clamp Insulation (Factory-Supplied)

12V CN27 Connector for 240V

CN28

PCN1

CN1

Fig. 7.1 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transformer (TF)

Tighten screws according to the following torque. M3.5: 1.2 N-m M5: 2.0 to 2.4 N-m Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit. Lead the wires through the knockout hole in the side cover when using conduit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box. 173

7.1

General Check

(1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data given in “Technical Catalog I”. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Use twist pair cable with shielded for control cable between outdoor unit and indoor unit, control cable between indoor units and remote control switch cable of PC-AR. (3) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +10% of the rated voltage. (4) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (5) Check to ensure that the earth wire is connected.

Side Cover

Electrical Box

Rubber Bush for Piping

Remove screws and draw out the electrical box cover toward the arrow direction.

Cut out this part.

Electrical Box (ex: RPC-3.0FSN) Remote Control Switch Cable

Electrical Box NF

TB1

CN17

PCB2

PCB1

R L1

S L2

Mp N

TB2 1

Control Cable Power Source Cord Clamp Cable

TB1

7.2

Electrical Wiring Connection

Main Power

R L1

S L2

TB2 1

Mp N

Power Source Cable

Rubber Bush

Control Remote Control Cable Switch Cable

1N 220-240V/50Hz 220V/60Hz (3N )

TB1 R L1

S L2

Mp N

Power Source Cable

TB2 1

Control Remote Control Cable Switch Cable

1 220V/60Hz (3 )

Fig. 7.2 Connecting Wires Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Refer to the item “10. Common”.

174

Test Run

Test run should be performed according to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Maintenance Manualâ&#x20AC;? of the outdoor unit.

Safety and Control Device Setting Indoor Unit RPC-2.0FSN, RPC-2.5FSN, RPC-3.0FSN, RPC-4.0FSN, RPC-5.0FSN

Model For Evaporator Fan Motor Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

135+10

83+15

For Control Circuit Fuse Capacity Freeze Protection Thermostat

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Thermostat Differential

175

176

10. Common 10.1 Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Use an ELB (Electric Leakage Breaker). If not used, it will cause an electric shock or a fire. Do not operate the system until all the check points have been cleared. (A) Check to ensure that the electrical resistance is more than 1 megohm, by measuring the resistance between ground and the terminal of the electrical parts. If not, do not operate the system until the electrical leakage is found and repaired. (B) Check to ensure that the stop valves of the outdoor unit are fully opened, and then start the system. (C) Check to ensure that the switch on the main power source has been ON for more than 12 hours, to warm the compressor oil by the crankcase heater. Pay attention to the following items while the system is running. (A) Do not touch any of the parts by hand at the discharge gas side, since the compressor chamber and the pipes at the discharge side are heated higher than 90oC. (B) DO NOT PUSH THE BUTTON OF THE MAGNETIC SWITCH(ES). It will cause a serious accident. Model

Power Source

Maximum Current

Power Source Cable Size EN60 335-1 *1 MLFC *2

Transmitting Cable Size EN60 335-1 *1 MLFC *2

RPI-1.0FSNQ, RPI-1.5FSNQ, RPI-2.0FSNQ, RPI-2.5FSNQ, RPI-3.0FSNQ, RPI-4.0FSNQ, RPI-5.0FSNQ RPI-1.0FSNQL/H, RPI-1.5FSNQL/H, RPI-1.8FSNQL/H, RPI-2.0FSNQL/H, RPI-2.3FSNQL/H, RPI-2.5FSNQL/H, RPI-3.0FSNQL/H, RPI-4.0FSNQL/H, RPI-5.0FSNQL/H, RPI-6.0FSNQL/H RCI-1.0FSNQ, RCI-1.5FSNQ, RCI-1.8FSNQ, RCI-2.0FSNQ, RCI-2.3FSNQ, RCI-2.5FSNQ, RCI-3.0FSNQ, RCI-4.0FSNQ, RCI-5.0FSNQ, RCI-6.0FSNQ RCD-1.0FSN, RCD-1.5FSN, RCD-2.0FSN, RCD-2.5FSN, RCD-3.0FSN, RCD-4.0FSN, RCD-5.0FSN

220-240V/ 1φ/50Hz 220V/ 1φ/60Hz

RPK-0.8FSNSM1, RPK-1.0FSNSM1, RPK-1.5FSNSM1, RPK-2.0FSNSM, RPK-2.5FSNSM, RPK-3.0FSNSM, RPK-3.5FSNSM, RPK-4.0FSNSM RPF-1.0FSN(E), RPF-1.5FSN(E) RPFI-1.0FSN(E), RPFI-1.5FSN(E)

0.75mm2

10A

1mm 2

0.5mm2

0.75mm2

0.5mm2

RPC-2.0FSN, RPC-2.5FSN, RPC-3.0FSN, RPC-4.0FSN, RPC-5.0FSN KPI-2521, KPI-5021, KPI-8021

KPI-10021 *50 KPI-10021 *60 RPI-8FSNQ, RPI-10FSNQ

220-240V/ 1φ/50Hz 220V/ 1φ/60Hz 220-240V/ 1φ/50Hz 220V/ 1φ/60Hz 380V/ 3φ/50Hz

NOTES: 1) Follow local codes and regulations when selecting field wires. 2) The wire sizes marked with *1 in the above table are selected at the maximum current of the unit according to the European Standard, EN60 335-1. Use the wires which are not lighter than the ordinary tough rubber sheathed flexible cord (code designation H05RN-F) or ordinary polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord (code designation H05RN-F). 3) The wire sizes marked with *2 in the above table are selected at the maximum current of the unit according to the wire, MLFC (Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire) manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd., Japan. 4) Use a shielded cable for the transmitting circuit and connect it to ground. 5) In the case that power cables are connected in series, add each unit maximum current and select wires below. Selection According to EN60 335-1 Selection According to MLFC (at Cable Temperature of 60oC) Current i (A) Wire Size (mm2) Current i (A) Wire Size (mm2) i≤6 0.75 i ≤ 15 0.5 *3: In the case that 1 15 < i ≤ 18 0.75 current exceeds 63A, 6 < i ≤ 10 10 < i ≤ 16 1.5 18 < i ≤ 24 1.25 do not connect cables 16 < i ≤ 25 2.5 24 < i ≤ 34 2 in series. 4 34 < i ≤ 47 3.5 25 < i ≤ 32 32 < i ≤ 40 6 47 < i ≤ 62 5.5 40 < i ≤ 63 10 62 < i ≤ 78 8 177 14 63 < i *3 78 < i ≤ 112 112 < i ≤ 147 22

10.2 Setting of Dip Switches (3) Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting (DSW5) Setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

<RCI Models> (A) Position of Dip Switches PCB for Indoor Unit

RSW

1 2 3 4

OFF DSW7

DSW5

DSW3

(B) The PCB in the indoor unit is equipped with 3 types of dip switches and rotary switch. Before testing unit, set these dip switches according to the following instructions. Unless these dip switches are set in the field, the unit can not be operated. (1) Unit No. Setting (RSW) Setting is required. Set the unit No. of all indoor units respectively and serially, by following setting position shown in the table below. Numbering must start from ì0î for every outdoor unit.

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

7 9 7 9

(2) Capacity Code Setting (DSW3) No setting is required, due to setting before shipment. This switch is utilized for setting the capacity code which corresponds to the Horse Power of the indoor unit. Horsepower

0.8 ON

1.0 ON

Setting Position

Without 1 2 3 4 OFF

1 2 3 4 OFF

Horsepower

2.3

2.5

Setting Position

1 2 3 4 OFF

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.3 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

3.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.5 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

4.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.8 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

5.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

2.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

6.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

456

F 01

456

OFF

456

F 01

456

F 01

456

B CD E

7 9 8

456

F 01

456

F 01

456

No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

F 01

456

No. 9 Unit

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

456

No. 7 Unit 23

No. 6 Unit 23

No.5 Unit

No. 4 Unit

No. 3 Unit

No. 8 Unit Rotary Switch Setting

No. 2 Unit

F 01

No. 1 Unit

7 9

456

No. 0 Unit Rotary Switch Setting

Set by inserting slotted screwdriver into the groove

* In the case of applying high voltage to the terminal 1, 2 of TB2, the fuse (0.5A) on the PCB, is cut. In such a case, firstly correct the wiring to TB2, and then turn on No.1 pin.

F 01

CD E

OFF

Setting Position

178

(4) Fuse Recover (DSW7) * No Setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

NOTE The “ ” mark indicates position of dip switches. Figures show setting before shipment.

Before setting dip switches, firstly turn OFF power source and set the position of the dip switches. If the switches are set without turning OFF the power source, the switches can not function.

(3) Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting (DSW5) Setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF. ON

<RPI , RPIZ , RCD and RPC Models> (A) Position of Dip Switches PCB for Indoor Unit

RSW

1 2 3 4

OFF

DSW3 SW1

DSW5

DSW6

Set by inserting slotted screwdriver into the groove

456

7 9

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

7 9 7 9

0.8

1.0

Setting Position Horsepower

1 2 3 4 OFF

2.3

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

2.5

Setting Position Horsepower

1 2 3 4 OFF

6.0 ON

Setting Position

1 2 3 4 OFF

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.3 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

2.8 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

10 ON

1 2 3 4 OFF

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.5 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

3.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.8 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

4.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

2.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

5.0

456

F 01

(d)

1 2 3 4 OFF

ON 1

OFF

F 01

456

B CD E

7 9 8

456

F 01

456

F 01

(b) ON

456

F 01

456

No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

456

No. 9 Unit

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

456

B CD E

No. 7 Unit

456

No. 6 Unit

Setting Position

(a)

No.5 Unit

No. 4 Unit 23

No. 3 Unit

No. 2 Unit

No. 8 Unit Rotary Switch Setting

No. 1 Unit 23

F 01

Rotary Switch Setting

Model Code

(5) Fuse Recover (DSW7) * Factory Setting

7 9

CD E

Setting Position

No. 0 Unit

RPI-2.0FSNQ Model Code

Model Code: (a) RPI-1.0FSNQ to 10FSNQ (b) RCD-1.0FSN to 5.0FSN (c) RPC-2.0FSN to 5.0 FSN (d) RPI-1.0FSNQL(H) to 6.0FSNQL(H) RPIZ-1.0FSNQ to RPIZ-2.5FSNQ

F 01

(4) Unit Model Code Setting (DSW6) No setting is required. Setting the model code of the indoor unit.

* In the case of applying high voltage to the terminal 1, 2 of TB2, the fuse (0.5A) on the PCB, is cut. In such a case, firstly connect the wiring to TB2, and then turn on No.1 pin.

ON 1

OFF

NOTE • The “ ” mark indicates position of dip switches. Figures show setting before shipment.

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

Before setting dip switches, firstly turn OFF power source and set the position of the dip switches. If the switches are set without turning OFF the power source, the switches can not function.

179

<RPF and RPFI Models> (A) Position of Dip Switches

(4) Unit Model Code Setting (DSW6) No setting is required. Setting the model code of the indoor unit.

SW1 DSW7 DSW6

DSW3

(a)

Model Code

(b)

RSW Setting Position

DSW5

(B) The PCB in the indoor unit is equipped with 5 types of dip switches and rotary switch. Before testing unit, set these dip switches according to the following instructions. Unless these dip switches are set in the field, the unit can not be operated. (1) Unit No. Setting (RSW) Setting is required. Set the unit No. of all indoor units respectively and serially, by following setting position shown in the table below. Numbering must start from “0” for every outdoor unit.

1 2 3 4 OFF

RPF-1.0FSN(E) Model Code

Model Code: (a) RPF-1.0FSN(E) and 1.5FSN(E) (b) RPFI-1.0FSN(E) and 1.5FSN(E)

(5) DSW7 * Factory Setting

ON 1

OFF

* No.1 Pin: Fuse Recover when fuse is cut, turn No.1 Pin ON. ON

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

B CD E

7 9

7 9 8

7 9

1.0 ON

Setting Position

1 2 3 4 OFF

1.3 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.5 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

OFF

Non-Polarity 2 Wired (Factory-Setting)

Polarity 3 Wired NEW

OLD

SW1

English Letters : Non-Polarity 2 Wired (for PC-AR) NEW

OLD

NEW

OLD

: Polarity 3 Wired (for PC-2H2)

1.8 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

(3) Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting (DSW5) Setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF. ON 1 2 3 4

Indication of SW1 (Japanese Letters)

F 01

456

(6) Transmission Selection (SW1)

F 01

456

* No.2 Pin: Transmission Selection OFF: Non-Polarity 2 Wired (PC-AR) ON: Polarity 3 Wired (PC-2H2)

F 01

456

F 01

B CD E

456

F 01

456

No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit 23

456

F 01

No. 9 Unit

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

B CD E

F 01

456

B CD E

F 01

456

F 01

No. 7 Unit

No. 6 Unit

No.5 Unit

No. 4 Unit

No. 3 Unit

No. 8 Unit Rotary Switch Setting

No. 2 Unit

F 01

No. 1 Unit

7 9

No. 0 Unit

OFF

7 9

7 9 8

Rotary Switch Setting

Set by inserting slotted screwdriver into the groove

456

CD E

Setting Position F 01

NOTE • The “ ” mark indicates position of dip switches. Figures show setting before shipment. • Factory Setting is for PC-AR .In the case of using PC-2H2, set as below. DSW7

SW1

ON 1

NEW

OLD

OFF

Before setting dip switches, firstly turn OFF power source and set the position of the dip switches. If the switches are set without turning OFF the power source, the switches can not function. 180

<RPK Models> (A) Position of Dip Switches

(3) Capacity Code Setting (DSW3) No setting is required, due to setting before shipment. This switch is utilized for setting the capacity code which corresponds to the Horse Power of the indoor unit.

RPK-0.8 to 1.5 RSW

PWB2

DSW5

RSW301

PWB3

SW1

DSW2

Wired

DSW3

Horsepower

Wireless

RPK-2.0

RPK-2.5 to 4.0

Horsepower

1 2 3 4 OFF

2.5

1 2 3 4 OFF

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

3.5

3.0

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.3

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

1.5

2.0

ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

4.0 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF

RSW

DSW3

Setting Position

DSW3

1.0

Setting before shipment is “Wireless”. When using the wired remote controller, set SW1 “Wired”.

DSW7

0.8

DSW5 DSW5

DSW2

DSW7 DSW2

DSW7

(B) The PCB in the indoor unit is equipped with 5 types (RPK-0.8 to 1.5) and 4 types (RPK-2.0 to 4.0) of dip switches and rotary switch. Before testing unit, set these dip switches according to the following instructions. Unless these dip switches are set in the field, the unit can not be operated. (1) Unit No. Setting (RSW) Setting is required. Set the unit No. of all indoor units respectively and serially, by following setting position shown in the table below. Numbering must start from “0” for every outdoor unit.

Set by inserting slotted screwdriver into the groove

4 56

CD E

7 9

CD E

7 9

CD E

7 9

OFF * In the case of applying high voltage to the terminal 1, 2 of TB1, the fuse on the PCB1(M) is cut. In such a case, firstly correct the wiring to TB1, and then turn on #2. ON

OFF

F 01

7 9

CD E

4 56

F 01

4 56

7 9

CD E

(5) Fuse Recover (DSW7) * No setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

4 56

F 01

4 56

F 01

OFF

4 56

No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

4 56

F 01

4 56

7 9 8

No. 9 Unit 23

F 01

4 56

CD E

F 01

CD E

F 01

CD E

F 01

CD E

F 01

4 56

CD E

F 01

4 56

F 01

1 2 3 4

F 01

No. 7 Unit

No. 6 Unit

No.5 Unit

No. 4 Unit

No. 3 Unit

No. 8 Unit Rotary Switch Setting

No. 2 Unit

F 01

Rotary Switch Setting

No. 1 Unit

7 9

No. 0 Unit

7 9

7 9 8

7 9

CD E

Setting Position F 01

(4) Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting (DSW5) Setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF. ON

(2) Optional Function Setting (DSW2) No setting is required. RPK-0.8 to 2.0 models Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

NOTE The “ ” mark indicates position of dip switches. Figures show setting before shipment.

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

RPK-2.5 to 4.0 models Setting position before shipment is only No.8 ON.

Before setting dip switches, firstly turn OFF power source and set the position of the dip switches. If the switches are set without turning OFF the power source, the switches can not function.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

181

10.3 Setting the Filter Indication Interval The FILTER interval indication on the remote control switch (PC-AR) can be set a approximately 100, 1,200 or 2,500 hours (factory setting: 1,200 hours). If 100 or 2,500 hours interval is required, follow the instruction below. Step 1 Changing to Optional Setting Mode Press the CHECK switch and the RESET switch together more than 3 seconds while the unit is stopped. The operation mode is changed to the field setting mode, “SERVICE” is indicated and “01” flickers. When “01” is not indicated, press the ∨ or ∧ switch and set “01”. In this condition, press the CHECK switch and the mode is changed to the optional setting mode. 01 Flickered (Press

switch.)

SET TEMP.

HIGH

Step 3 Optional Setting Items and Changing Setting Conditions The indication of optional setting is as shown below. (1) The code of optional setting is as shown below. (2) The indications of ADDS. and RN. are turned OFF and the optional setting condition is indicated. The item code of optional setting is changed by pressing the TIME ∆ or ∇ switch. The optional setting condition is changed by pressing the CHECK switch. Set the item code to “b4”. In case of setting other indoor unit, press the ∨ or ∧ switch and the indication is changed to the condition of the item “Step 2 Selection of Indoor Unit for Optional Setting”.

Press CHECK switch.

COOL A/C

1 Press TIME

SERVICE

switch.

HIGH

Step 2 Selection of Indoor Unit for Optional Setting When the mode is changed to the optional setting mode, the indication on the liquid crystal display is as shown below. (1) The flickering indication of “01” stops. (2) The address of the indoor unit for optional setting is indicated. (3) The address of the refrigerant system for optional setting is indicated. Select the indoor unit to set by pressing the ∨ or ∧ switch and indicate the address of the indoor unit. In this condition, press the CHECK switch (or leave this condition for 7 seconds) and the indication is changed to the indication of optional setting. Press CHECK switch 1

2 3 Press

switch.)

HIGH COOL ADDS

A/C

COOL A/C

SERVICE

2 Press CHECK switch. The relation between the indication and the interval is shown in the table below. FILTER Indication Interval Approx. 100 hr. b4 01

Approx. 1,200 hr.

Approx. 2,500 hr.

No Indication

b4 03

b4 04

b4 02 b4 00(*)

(*): Standard

Step 4 Canceling Optional Setting Mode Press the RESET switch in the condition of Step 2 or Step 3, the condition is changed to the standard condition.

SERVICE

NOTE NOTE A. In case that the both indications of the ADDS. (Address) and RN. (Refrigerant Cycle Number) show “AA”, the same setting is performed to all the indoor units. B. The indoor units not connected are not indicated. 182

The label for checking the contents of the setting is attached to the holding bracket. Write down the contents of the setting on the label.

10.4 Setting of High Speed Tap RCI and RCD Models The air flow volume can be changed according to the ceiling height by setting the item code to “C5” from the remote control switch (Refer to the Installation & Maintenance Manual of the remote control switch for details). RCI Ceiling Height 1.0 to 2.5HP 3.0 to 5.0HP Below 2.7m Below 3.2m 2.7 to 3.0m 3.2 to 3.6m 3.0 to 3.5m 3.6 to 4.2m

Setting of Remote Control Switch Standard High Speed (1) High Speed (2)

RCD Ceiling Height Below 2.7m 2.7 to 2.9m 2.9 to 3.1m

Setting of Remote Control Switch Standard High Speed (1) High Speed (2)

RPI Models The air flow volume can be changed according to the external static pressure by setting the item code to “C5” from the remote control switch (Refer to the Installation & Maintenance Manual of the remote control switch for details). Applicable Model

External Static Pressure 50Pa

RPI-1.0 to 2.5FSNQ

80Pa 30Pa 120Pa

RPI-3.0 to 5.0FSNQ

170Pa 60Pa

Setting of Remote Control Switch 00 (Standard) 01 (High Static Pressure) 02 (Low Static Pressure) 00 (Standard) 01 (High Static Pressure) 02 (Low Static Pressure)

183

11. Installation of Optinal Air Panel

(3) Installing Air Panel Step 1 Remove the cover of corner pocket as shown below (4 portions). Pull the fixing nail towards the arrow mark according to the order “a”, “b” and “c”. The corner pocket cover can be lifted. After lifting, move it in “d” direction, disconnect the L type hook and dismantle the corner pocket.

11.1 Air Panel for 4-Way Cassette Type: P-G23WA2 11.1.1 Before Installation

When the air panel is unpacked, place it on insulation material etc. to protect the sealing insulation from scratches. Factory-Supplied Accessories Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the air panel. Name Long Screw (M6 50)

Q'ty 4

Purpose For Fixing Panel

Fixing Nail

d If any of these accessories are not packed in the packing, please contact your contractor. 11.1.2 Installation (1) Location of Suspension Bracket Check to ensure that the suspension brackets of the indoor unit are located approximately 102mm higher than the false ceiling. Refer to the “INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL” for details. (2) Removing Air Intake Grille from Air Panel Step 1 Open the air intake grille to an angle of approximately 45o from the surface of the air panel as shown in Fig. 11.1. Panel Air Inlet Grille

45o Corner Pocket Cover (4 positions) Knob

L type Hook

Fig. 11.2 Step 2 Pull down the U-shaped hook (at 2 positions) located at the indoor unit side. Step 3 Set the corner of the refrigerant connection portion of the indoor unit to the position indicated as “Ref. Piping”, and hook the C-shaped hinge (2 positions) onto the Ushaped hooks (2 positions) so that temporary positioning is available. Step 4 Mount the air panel onto the air panel fixing position by using the factory-supplied fixing screws (M6 cross screws). Electrical Control Box Refrigerant Pipe Connections

Indoor Unit Hook

Fixing Plate

Fig. 11.1 Removing Method of Air Intake Grille

Air Panel

NOTE Do not try to remove the grille while it is at an angle of 90° from the surface of the air panel. Step 2 Lift the grille keeping it inclined. Step 3 Draw the grille towards the open space after lifting. 184

Stamp "Ref. Pipe" U-shaped Hook (Q'ty 2)

Fig. 11.3 Installation

Long Screw (Q'ty 4)

Step 5 Check to ensure that there is no gap around the contacting surface between the indoor unit and the air panel. Any gap may cause air leakage or dewing. Indoor Unit Undersurface

Fixing Plate (Indoor Unit Side)

Step 6 Attach the corner pocket covers after mounting air panel. 1) Hook the band at the rear side of the cover for the corner pockets onto the pin of the panel as shown below.

False Ceiling

Fixing Plate (Air Panel Side)

Panel

Long Screw

Gasket for Sealing

Band

: Fix screw until this end touches it.

Fig. 11.4 Cross Section of Air Panel

If tighten long screws insufficient, may cause something wrong as bellow. Air Leakage

2) Hook the L-shaped nail located at the rear side of the cover for the corner pockets onto the square hole of the air panel.

Smudge Dewing

If any gap has even though tighten long screws sufficient, readjust the height of indoor unit.

L-shaped Nail Fixing Nail (3 Portions)

No gap shall exist.

NOTE

It is able to adjust the indoor unit height by using wrench from the corner pocket.

Wrench

* Too considerable adjustment of height cause dewing from drain-pan.

In the case that the corner pocket is dismantled after installing the air panel: 1) “1” The corner position of the corner pocket can be lifted by inserting a “-” shaped driver and lifting. By keeping this state, lift the “-” shaped driver in the lower direction. The whole corner pocket can be lifted. After dicconnecting the fixing nails (3 positions), disconnect the L-shaped nail and remove the corner pocket cover. 2) Slide the cover in the allowed direction. 4

Do not turn the air louver by hand. If moved, the louver mechanism would be damaged.

Coin or Slotted Screwdriver 1 2

3 Lifting

Corner Position

To uc h

Louver

185

11.1.3 Wiring Connection for Air Panel Wiring Connections The following connector is used with the air panel. Connector for Auto Swing Motor (Low Voltage, 7Pin, Red)

Electrical Control Box

Fig. 11.5 View from Lower Surface of Air Panel without Air Intake Grille Connect the connectors as shown below. Electrical Control Box for Indoor Unit

11.1.4 Test Run After completing the installation of the air panel, a test run should be performed by referring to the “INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. 11.1.5 Adjusting Louvers (1) Procedures for Adjusting Louvers and Air Flow Direction Step 1 Switch ON the main power source. Step 2 Start the fan operation by pressing the “MODE” switch and the “RUN/STOP” switch on the remote control switch. Step 3 Press the “SWING LOUVER” switch. Swinging of the swing louver is started, and is stopped by pressing this switch again. Step 4 The “SWING LOUVER” indicator shows the position of the swing louvers. (When Swinging) The mark " " moves continuously.

PCB

Connector for Auto Swing Motor (Low Voltage, 7Pin, Red)

CN17

Fig. 11.6 View of the Electrical Box

(When in Fixed Position) The mark " " indicates the position of louvers.

NOTE The position of the louvers does not coincide with the louver position indicator.

Before connecting connectors, firstly turn OFF power source. If the connectors are connected without turning OFF the power source, the auto-swing louver can not function.

186

Even if the “SWING LOUVER” switch is pressed, the louvers do not stop and may move up to one swing at a maximum.

11.2 Air Panels for 2-Way Cassette Type: P-G23DWA1 and P-G46DWA1

NOTE Do not try to remove the grille while it is at an angle of 90° from the surface of the air panel.

11.2.1 Before Installation

Q'ty 4

Purpose For Fixing Panel

Long Screw [B] (M6 30)

For Fixing Panel (Only for P-G46)

If any of these accessories are not packed in the packing, please contact your contractor. 11.2.2 Installation (1) Location of Indoor Unit Check to ensure that the louver surface of the indoor unit is located approximately 28mm higher than the false ceiling. Refer to the “INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL” for details. (2) Removing Air Intake Grille from Air Panel Step 1 Open the air intake grille to an angle of approximately 40° from the surface of the air panel as shown in Fig. 11.7. Take up the grille keeping it inclined.

Step 2 Lift the grille keeping it inclined. Step 3 Draw the grille towards the open space after lifting. (3) Installing Air Panel Step 1 Hang the air panel from the indoor unit by hooking the U-shaped wires of the air panel into the hook wires of the indoor unit. Step 2 Check to ensure that the location of the electrical box of the indoor unit coincides with the location of the wiring outlet of the air panel as shown in Fig. 11.8. Outlet for Electrical Wiring Hooks Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit

Without Air Intake Grille

Fig. 11.8 Direction of Air Panel Step 3 Raise up the air panel onto the indoor unit, then fix the air panel by using factory-supplied long screws [A], and in case that the panel is P-G46DWA1, fix the screws [B] inside the air outlet of the panel as shown in Fig. 11.9. Indoor Unit

Approx. 40

Air Panel Air Filter

Incorrect Position

Correct Position Air Intake Grille

Fig. 11.7 Removing Method of Air Intake Grille

Long Screw (A) x 4 (M6 x 50) Long Screw (B) x 2 (M6 x 30, only for P-G46)

Fig. 11.9 Installation

187

Step 4 Check to ensure that there is no gap around the contacting surface between the indoor unit and the air panel. Any gap may cause air leakage or dewing. If the air panel does not reach the surface of the ceiling or leakage from the contacting surface occurs, readjust the installation height level of the indoor unit.

Do not turn the air louver by hand. If moved, the louver mechanism would be damaged.

11.2.3 Wiring Connection for Air Panel Wiring Connections The following connector is used with the air panel. Connector for Auto Swing Motor (Low Voltage, 7Pin, Red) Hooks Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit

Without Air Intake Grille

Fig. 11.10 View from Lower Surface of Air Panel without Air Intake Grille Connect the connectors as shown below.

Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit

Outlet for Electrical Wiring PCB

Do not clamp any wiring between unit and panel when attaching the panel. If clamped, the panel would be damaged. Do Not Clamp any wiring between the unit and the air panel.

CN17 Connector for Auto Swing Motor (Low Voltage, 7Pin, Red)

Fig. 11.11 View of the Electrical Box

Fix the wires by using Cord Band.

188

Before connecting connectors, firstly turn OFF power source. If the connectors are connected without turning OFF the power source, the auto-swing louver can not function.

11.2.4 Test Run After completing the installation of the air panel, a test run should be performed by referring to the “INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. 11.2.5 Adjusting Louvers (1) Procedures for Adjusting Louvers and Air Flow Direction Step 1 Switch ON the main power source. Step 2 Start the fan operation by pressing the “MODE” switch and the “RUN/STOP” switch on the remote control switch. Step 3 Press the “SWING LOUVER” switch. Swinging of the swing louver is started, and is stopped by pressing this switch again. Step 4 The “SWING LOUVER” indicator shows the position of the swing louvers. (When Swinging) The mark " " moves continuously.

(When in Fixed Position) The mark " " indicates the position of louvers.

NOTE The position of the louvers does not coincide with the louver position indicator. Even if the “SWING LOUVER” switch is pressed, the louvers do not stop and may move up to one swing at a maximum.

189

12. Installation of Optional Controller IMPORTANT READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING THIS WIRED REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH KEEP THIS MANUAL FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. IMPORTANT NOTICE No part of this manual may be reproduced without written permission. Signal words (DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION) are used to identify levels of hazard seriousness. Definitions for identifying hazard levels are provided below with their respective signal words.

NOTE

Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.

Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal injury or death.

Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in minor personal injury or product or property damage.

Useful information for operation and/or maintenance.

SAFETY SUMMARY

Do not pour water into the remote control switch (hereafter called â&#x20AC;&#x153;controllerâ&#x20AC;?). This product is equipped with electrical parts. If poured, it will cause a serious electrical shock.

Do not perform installation work and electrical wiring connection by yourself. Contact your distributor or dealer of HITACHI and ask them for installation work and electrical wiring by service person.

Do not install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, controller and cable at such places as; (1) where there is oil vapor and the oil is dispersed (2) where the hot springs are near (in a sulfuric environment) (3) where generation, flowing, staying or leaking of flammable gas is detected (4) where the sea is near (in the salty environment) (5) an acid or alkaline environment Do not install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, controller and cable within approximately 3 meters from strong electromagnetic wave radiators such as medical equipment. In case that the controller is installed in a place where there is electromagnetic wave radiation, shield the controller and cables by covering with the steel box and running the cable through the metal conduit tube. In case that there is electric noise at the power source for the indoor unit, provide a noise filter.

190

12.1 Remote Control Switch : PC-AR IMPORTANT NOTICE:  No part of this manual may be reproduced without written permission.  Signal words (DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION) are used to identify levels of hazard seriousness. Deﬁnitions of identifying hazard levels are provided below with their respective signal words. DANGER

: Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.

WARNING : Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal injury or death. CAUTION

: Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in minor personal injury or product or property damage

NOTE: Useful information for operation and/or maintenance.

12.1.1. SAFETY SUMMARY DANGER  DO NOT pour water into the remote control switch (hereafter called “controller”). This product is equipped

with electrical parts. If poured, it will cause a serious electrical shock.

WARNING  DO NOT perform installation work and electrical wiring connection by yourself. Contact your distributor or

dealer of HITACHI and ask them for installation work and electrical wiring by service person.

CAUTION  DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, controller and cable at such places as;

1. Where there is oil vapor and the oil is dispersed 2. Where the hot springs are near (in a sulfuric environment) 3. Where generation, flowing, staying or leaking of flammable gas is detected 4. Where the sea is near (in the salty environment) 5. An acid or alkaline environment  DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, controller and cable within approximately 3 meters from strong electromagnetic wave radiators such as medical equipment. In case that the controller is installed in a place where there is electromagnetic wave direct-radiation, shield the controller and cables by covering with the steel box and running the cable through the metal conduit tube.  In case that there is electric noise at the power source for the indoor unit, provide a noise filter. The box □ is for checking work .Check the box after checkig.

12.1.2. Installation Work [2.1 Selection of Installation Place] □ 1) Select a suitable place for handling and determine the installation place of the controller with the customer’s acceptance. Do not install the controller at such places as; ● where children can touch ● where the air from the air conditioner is directly discharged [2.2 Before Installation] □ This packing contains the following parts. [A] Remote Control Switch (Q’ty: 1, For Operation Control) [B] Screw<M4x16L> (Q’ty: 2, For Fixing the Holding Bracket onto the Wall) [2.3 Installation Space] □ 1) In case of installing the controllers in vertical line, keep a distance more than 50mm beMore than tween the controllers vertically. If the distance is insufﬁcient, the front cover of the controller 50mm can not be opened wide enough. [2.4 Installation Procedures] □ 1) Insert the edge of the slotted screwdriver into the groove at the bottom of the holding bracket, push and turn the slotted screwdriver and then remove the controller from the holding bracket.

Figure Seen from Bottom Side Groove Part for Removing Controller

Approx. 6mm 約６ｍｍ幅の

マイナス

Groove Part

Slotted Screw ドライバー Driver 下側から見る

ツメ

Groove for Attaching Controller

191

□ 2) Attach the controller to the holding bracket and connect the cable as follows. A. In Case of Exposing Remote Control Cable Attach the stopper to the ナイロンバンドなどを巻い cable at the inside of the て、ケーブルが出ないよう draw-out hole. にしてください。

ケーブル Cable Band Stopper ナイロンバンド (Field-Supplied) （現地準備品）

Lead the cable with its シースをむいた部分を sheath peeled through 溝に沿って通す。ﾘﾓｺﾝ REMOCON

Fix the holding bracket onto the wall with screws (accessory).

B. When Using Switch Box 1. Prepare ﬁeld-supplied JIS Box (JIS C 8336-1988).

the groove.

ﾘﾓｺﾝ REMOCON

Peel the insulation at ケーブル先端の被覆 the end ofＭ３用圧着端 the cable and をむき、 clamp the M3 solderless 子（現地準備品）を接 terminals (ﬁeld-supplied). 続する。

2. Lead the cable through the conduit tube in the wall.

3. Peel the insulation at the end of the cable and clamp the M3 solderless terminals (ﬁeld-supplied). ﾘﾓｺﾝ REMOCON

ﾎﾞｯｸｽ J ISBox JIS for 1 個用の場合 Controllers

ﾎﾞｯｸｽ J ISBox JIS for 22 個用の場合 Controllers

The following 5 types are available. 1. Switch Box for 1 Controller(Without Cover) 2. Switch Box for 2 Controllers (Without Cover) 3. Switch Box for 1 Controller (With Cover) 4. Switch Box for 2 Controllers (With Cover) 5. Outlet Box (With Cover)

M4 Screws Ｍ４なべネジ (Field-Supplied) (現地調達品)

ﾘﾓｺﾝ

B REMOCON

Remove the protection ﬁlm. 保護シート Connect the terminals.

□ 3) Attach the remote control switch to the holding bracket. Be careful not to pinch the cable when attaching it. □ 4) Remove the protection ﬁlm from the liquid crystal display.

12.1.3. Electrical Wiring Wiring Example (Using a twist pair cable with shield tube) ATTENTION: Always make sure to turn off the power of the indoor unit when performing electrical wiring work. Performing electrical wiring work with the power on can damage the circuit boards of the indoor unit and the remote control switch. Max. 16 Indoor Units Remote Control Switch

Electrical Box of Indoor Unit

Terminal Board

REMOCON REMOCON A B

B M3.5

Screws

Remote Control Switch (Subsidiary)

B M3.5

●Remote Remote Control Cable <Option> Model: PRC- □ K 2 Twist Pair Cable(1P-0.75mm ) Solderless Terminal (X Type)

Diameter: φ7 Color: Ivory

REMOCON REMOCON A B

Screws

50㎜

M3 Screws

Twist Pair Cable with Shield Tube : 1P- 0.75㎜2 or more

Control Cable Earth Screw Power Source Cable TB2 TB1

192

Remote Control Switch

100㎜

The number of □ indicates the length (m) of the cable ( □＝ 5, 10, 15).

*for Australia Connect the both ends of shield net of the shield tube to the earth as shown. Electrcal Box Indoor Unit

1.25-3X

CAUTION

A. Use a 0.3 to 0.75mm2 cable for connecting. The maximum total cable length is up 30m. If the total cable length exceeds 30m, use a twist pair cable with shield tube(1P - 0.75mm2 or more). In that case, the maximum total cable length is up to 500m. If using in combination with the control timer, the allowable total cable length is up to 100m. The use of a cable other than that speciﬁed above can cause of malfunction due to the effects of noise. B. Keep a distance more than 30cm between the transmission line (remote control switch cable and transmission wires) and power source of the indoor units. If not, the air-conditioner may not operate properly or malfunction may occur due to effect of power source noise. C. In case of simultaneously controlling multiple indoor units, set the refrigerant cycle numbers and addresses of the indoor units without overlapping. D. Refer to the Tecnical Catalog Ⅱ provided with each indoor unit when performing electrical wiring work between the remote control switch and indoor units for setting the refrigerant cycle number and the indoor unit address. E. No gap shall exist between the remote control switch cable and hole of the remote cotrol switch case. If there is a gap, cover the gap with vinyl tape. If not, malfunction may occur due to entrance of water droplets or insects. F. In case of operating with two remote control switches (Master and Slave), set the master and slave controllers by selecting the appropriate function with the remote control switches according to the section 5. After setting it, turn off the power supply of all the indoor unit connected to the remote control switches.

12.1.4. Checking Procedures □ 1) Turn ON the power supply for all the indoor units. NOTE: Although a portion of the LCD (liquid crystal display) of the remote control switch may light immediately after the power is turned on, this is not a malfunction. □ 2) For the models with the auto-address function, wait for 3 minutes apporoximately. The addressing is automatically performed. (There is a case that 5 minutes is required according to the setting condition.) □ 3) Set the “TEST RUN” mode by pressing the “MODE” and “CHECK” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds. NOTES: ← Example when 5 indoor Units are A."TEST RUN" is displayed on the LCD. unit connected. B.The total number of the indoor units connected is indicated on the LCD. C. In case that the indicated number is not correct, the auto-address function is not performed correctly due to incorrect wiring, the electric noise or etc. Turn OFF the power supply and correct the wiring after checking the following points; (Do not repeat turning ON and OFF within 10 seconds.) 1. Power Supply for Indoor Unit is Not Turned ON or Incorrect Wiring. 2. Incorrect Connection of Connecting Cable between Indoor Units or Incorrect Connection of Controller Cable 3. Incorrect Setting of Rotary Switch and Dip Swiach (The setting is overlapped.) on the Indoor Units PCB D. Check to ensure that the “TEST RUN” mode is not set. □ 4) Canceling “TEST RUN” Mode 1. When the unit is not operating, press the RESET switch. 2. When the unit is operating, press the RUN/STOP switch. ATTENTION: When "00" is indicated, the auto-address function may be performing. Cancel the "TEST RUN" mode and set it again.

193

12.1.5. Optional Setting and Input / Output Setting of Indoor Unit Normal Mode (When unit is not operating) 1. Change to the optional setting mode.

3. Selection of Indoor Unit for Optional Setting " 01" or "02" ﬂashes. C OOL ADDS RN A / C

2. Selection of Optional Setting Mode C OOL

Select the indoor unit to set by pressing the “ ∨ ” or “ ∧ ” switch and press the “CHECK” switch.

HIGH

Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

SERVICE

The address of the indoor unit (ADDS) to set and the refrigerant cycle number (RN) are indicated by 0 to 15. (The left ﬁgure shows the No.1 cycle and No.2 indoor unit.)

ADDS RN

<Example> When selecting No.2 cycle and No.3 indoor unit (The address is indicated by 0 to 15.)

SET TEMP.

HIGH

HIGH C OOL

A / C

“SERVICE” is indicated and the mode number is ﬂashed.

SERVICE

A / C

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch and set “01” or “02”. Then press the “CHECK” switch.

NOTES: (1) In case that the both indications of the “ADDS.” and “RN” show “AA”, the same setting is performed to all the indoor units. (2) The address of indoor unit not connected is not indicated.

Input / Output Setting Mode (Mode Number “02”)

Optional Setting Mode (Mode Number “01”) 4. Selection of Optional Setting Items

4. Selection of Input / Output Number Input / Output Number

Item Code of Optional Setting

HIGH C OOL

SERVICE

HIGH

Select the input /

C OOL

A / C

Select the item code by pressing the

SERVICE

output number by A / C

pressing the “TIME”

SERVICE

▽ or △ switch.

“TIME” ▽ or △ switch.

HIGH C OOL SERVICE

A / C

HIGH

<Example> When selecting C5 (Increasing Fan Speed)

<Example> When selecting o1

C OOL

A / C

(Output 1)

SERVICE

* Refer to Table B of Item 12.1.6 for contents of the input / output setting.

In Case of Setting Other Items

5. Change of Setting Conditions Setting Condition HIGH C OOL A / C

SERVICE

The optional setting condition is changed by pressing the “CHECK” switch.

In Case of Setting Other Items

5. Change of Setting Conditions Contents of Input / Output Setting HIGH C OOL

<Example> When setting 01(Increasing Fan Speed 1) A / C

※ Refer to the contents of the setting codes for the Table A of “Optional Setting Items”.

SERVICE

The optional setting condition is changed (0→1→2→…) by pressing the “CHECK” switch.

<Example> When setting 04 (Output: Thermo-ON for Cooling) ※ Refer to the Table C for the contents of the input / output setting.

Normal Mode Press the “RESET” switch in the condition of 4 or 5 to cancel the optional setting mode.

194

Press ∨ or ∧ switch in step 4 or 5 when selecting settings for another unit.

12.1.6. Initialization of Optional Setting and Input/Output Setting The procedure for initialization of optional settings and input / output settings are as follows. 3. Selection of Indoor Unit

Normal mode (when unit is not operating)

"07" ﬂashes.

1. Change to the optional setting mode. Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

C OOL ADDS RN

2. Selection of Optional Setting Mode SET TEMP.

HIGH C OOL A / C

SERVICE

“SERVICE” is indicated and the mode number is ﬂashed.

Select the address of the indoor unit to be returned to the optional settinginput/output factory settings.

HIGH

A /C

Press the "TEMP." "∨" or "∧" switch, select "07" for the optional input / output setting cancel mode, and then press the "CHECK" switch.

Press the "TEMP." control ∨ or ∧ switch and select the address of the indoor unit.

SERVICE

NOTES: * In case of control by using two remote controllers (Master and Slave), settings shall be operated by the master controller. * In case of selecting the address of the indoor unit not to initialize the optional and input / output setting, "NO FUNCTION" is displayed. * If selecting the indoor unit address "AA", the indoor units that do not have these initialization function cannot be restore to the factory setting.

4. Optional Setting and Input/Output Setting Initialization HIGH

HIGH

C OOL

C OOL ADDS RN

A/C

ADDS RN

SERVICE

Check to ensure that there are no problems to restore the factory settings, and perform to initialize.

Press "CHECK" switch and the initialization is performed. It takes approximately 15 to 30 seconds.

Normal mode

A/ C

SERVICE

When displayed "CL", the optional and input / output settings are initialized. (restore to factory settings.)

In case of performing to initialize the other indoor units, repeat the procedure from step 3. In this case, the indoor unit address is completed to initialize, the indication "CL" is displayed.

In case that initialization is not required, press the “RESET” switch in step 4.

● Table A Optional Setting Items

No. Items 1

Optional Function Removal of Heating Temperature Compensation due to Uneven Heat Load Circulator Function at Heating Thermo-OFF Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Operation Time of Compressor

Individual Setting ○ ○ ○

Change of Filter Cleaning Time

○

Fixing of Operation Mode

Fixing of Setting Temperature

Fixing of Operation as Exclusive Cooling Unit

Automatic COOL/HEAT Operation

Fixing of Fan Speed

Not Prepared

× ×

Cooling Temperature Compensation due to Uneven Heat Load

Not Prepared

○

Setting Condition 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 “- -” Fixed 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01

Contents Standard (Set Temp. +4oC) Removal (Set Temp.) Set Temp. +2oC (*1) Not Available Available Not Available Available Standard 100 hours 1,200 hours 2,500 hours No Indication Not Available Available Not Available Available Not Available Available Not Available Available Not Available Available Not Used Standard (No Compensation) Set Temp. –1oC Set Temp. –2oC Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Used (Use as 00 conditions)

195

No. Items

Optional Function

Individual Setting

Not Prepared

○

Not Prepared

○

Hi Speed

○

Hi Speed at Heating Thermo-OFF

○

Canceling of Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Operation Time of Compressor

○

Thermistor of Remote Control Switch

23 24

C9 CA

Not Prepared Not Prepared

Selection of Forced Stoppage Logic

Not Prepared

○

Not Prepared

Change of Louver Swing Angle

○

Not Prepared

○

Not Prepared

Power Supply ON/OFF 2

Not Prepared

○

Ventilation Mode

○

Increasing Supply Air Volume

○

Not Prepared

○

Precooling / Preheating Period

○

Not Prepared

○

Indoor Fan Operation Time After Cooling Operation Stoppage

○

196

00 01 00 01

Prevention for Cooling Discharge Air Temp. Decrease Prevention for Heating Discharge Air Temp. Decrease Room Temp. Control for Energy Saving

Setting Condition 00 01 “- -” Fixed 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01

○ ○ ○ ○

Contents Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Used Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Available Hi Speed 1 (*2) Hi Speed 2 (*2) Not Available Available Available Not Available

Control by Indoor Suction Thermistor Control by Thermistor of Remote Control Switch 02 Control by Average Value of Indoor Suction Thermistor and Thermistor of Remote Control Switch “- -“ Fixed Not Used “- -“ Fixed Not Used 00 Forced Stoppage Input: A Contact 01 Forced Stoppage Input: B Contact 00 Not Used 01 (Use as 00 conditions) 00 Not Used 01 (Use as 00 conditions) 00 Not Used 01 (Use as 00 conditions) 00 Standard (7 Steps) 01 Draft Prevention (5 Steps) 02 High Ceiling (5 Steps) (*3) 00 Not Used 01 (Use as 00 conditions) “- -“ Fixed Not Used 00 Not Available 01 Available 00 Not Available 01 Available 00 Not Available 01 Available 00 Not Available 01 Available 00 01 02 03 Not Used(Use as 00 conditions) 04 05 06 07 00 Automatic Ventilation 01 Ventilation by Total Heat Exchanger 02 Bypass Ventilation (No Total Heat Exchanging) 00 Not Available 01 Available 00 Not Used 01 (Use as 00 conditions) 00 Standard 01 30 min. 02 60 min. 00 Not Used 01 (Use as 00 conditions) 00 Not Available 01 60 min. 02 120 min.

No. Items

Optional Function

Individual Setting

Not Prepared

Fan Operation Control at Heating Thermo-OFF

Not Prepared

○

Fan Operation Control at Cooling Thermo-OFF

○

Forced Thermo-ON Stoppage at Cooling

○

Not Prepared

○

Automatic Fan Speed Control

○

Automatic OFF Timer Setting

Remote Control Main-Sub Setting

Automatic Reset of Setting Temperature (*4)

Automatic Reset Time

Automatic Reset Temperature for Cooling (*5)

Automatic Reset Temperature for Heating (*6)

Operation Stoppage Prevention by Remote Control Switch Operational Error (*7) Lock Function for Operation Mode Selection Lock Function for Temperature Setting Lock Function for Fan Speed Selection Lock Function for Swing Louver Operation

○

× × × × ×

Setting Condition 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 • • 23 24 0A 0B 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 19 20 • • 25 • • 29 30 17 18 • • 21 • • 29 30

Contents Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Available Available Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Available LOW SLOW Not Available Available Not Used (Use as 00 conditions) Not Available Available No Function OFF Timer by 1 hour OFF Timer by 2 hours • • OFF Timer by 23 hours OFF Timer by 24 hours OFF Timer by 0.5 hour OFF Timer by 1.5 hours Main Sub Not Available Available 30 min. (Factory-Setting) 15 min. 60 min. 90 min. 19oC 20oC • • 25oC (Factory-Setting) • • 29oC 30oC 17oC 18oC • • 21oC (Factory-Setting) • • 29oC 30oC

00 01

Not Available Available

00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01

Not Available Available (Factory-Setting) Not Available Available (Factory-Setting) Not Available Available (Factory-Setting) Not Available Available (Factory-Setting)

197

No. Items

Individual Setting

Optional Function

Cooling Lower Limit for Setting Temperature (*5)

Heating Upper Limit for Setting Temperature (*6)

Not Prepared

Lock Function for ON / OFF Timer

Setting Condition 00 01 02 • • 09 10 00 01 02 • • 09 10 00 01 02 00 01

Contents Standard Lower Limit +1oC Lower Limit +2oC • • Lower Limit +9oC Lower Limit +10oC Standard Upper Limit –1oC Upper Limit –2oC • • Upper Limit –9oC Upper Limit –10oC Not Used (Use as 00 condition) Not Available Available (Factory-setting)

*1: The "02" setting may not be available according to the type of indoor unit. *2: In case of RPI models, 00: Increasing fan speed 1 (standard), 01: Increasing fan speed 2 (high static pressure), 02: Standard (low static pressure) *3: 00: Standard (7-step operation), 01: Draft Prevention (lower 2 steps cutoff), 02: High ceiling (upper 2 steps cut off) *4: In case that the set temperature is changed and kept within the set time at "F4", the temperature is automatically changed to "F5" and "F6". (In case that the set temperature is out of range at "F5" and "F6", it is applied within upper and lower limit for the set temperature.) *5: Applicable to fan, cooling and dry operation modes. *6: Applicable to heating operation mode. *7: Operation is stopped by pressing the "RUN/STOP" switch for 3 seconds. NOTES: * After at least 3 minutes from the power ON, change the optional setting. * When changing "CF" setting (change of louver swing range), restore the power supply or allow the louver to make one complete swing fully in the auto swing mode to apply the optional setting. * The optoinal settings are different according to the indoor and outdoor unit models. Check to ensure that the unit has the optional setting or not. * Record the setting conditions for each optional setting in the "Setting" column of the table.

●Table B Input and Output Number Display and Connectors Input number Port display Input / Output Indication

Factory Setting Setting Item

●Table C Input and Output Settings and Display Codes Setting

Indiicaton

Input1

CN3 1-2 Remote ON/OFF 1 (level) 03

Input2 Output1

CN3 2-3 Forbidding Remote Control 06 after Manual Stoppage CN7 1-2 Operation 01

Output2

CN7 1-3 Alarm

Output3

CN8 1-2 Thermo-ON for Heating

Indication 00 01 02 03

Input Not set Room Thermostat (for Cooling) Room Thermostat (for Heating) Remote ON/OFF 1 (level)

Remote ON/OFF 2 (Operation) Thermo-ON for Cooling Remote ON/OFF 2 (Stoppage) Heating Forbidding Remote Control Thermo-ON for after Manual Stoppage Heating Remote Cooling / Heating Total Heat Exchanger Change Elevating grille input Elevating Grille output

05 06 07 08

NOTES: * After at least 3 minutes from the power ON, change the optional setting. * The elevating grille input can be set to Input 2 only " ". The elevating grille cannot be set to Input 1. * The elevating grille output can be set to Output 1 or Output 2 only " " or " ". The elevating grille output cannot be set to Output 3. * Do not set the elevating grille for the total heat exchanger. * Record the setting conditions for each input and output in the "Setting" column of the table.

198

Output Not set Operation Alarm Cooling

12.1.7. Changing Indoor Unit Address from Remote Control Switch The address (unit number) of the indoor unit can be changed by using the remote control switch (PC-AR). NOTES:

* In case of operating with two remote control switches (master and slave), the address of the indoor units cannot be changed or checked. * The address may not be able to be changed depending on the type of indoor unit. * Do not operate the central controller when in the address check mode or address change mode.

(1) Check the Indoor Unit for which the address to be changed. Address of Indoor Unit to be Changed is not known (check) . . . Proceed to (2) Address Check Mode. Address of Indoor Unit to be Changed is known . . . Proceed to (3) Address Change Mode. Initialize address set with the automatic address function or initialize address that has been changed with the address change mode. . . Proceed to (4) Address Initialization Mode. (2) Address Check Mode This function is for two or more the indoor units are connected to the remote control switch. The indoor unit address can be checked by the indoor unit individual operation with selecting the indoor address. Normal Mode (when unit is not operating) 1. Change to the optional setting mode.

3. Selection of Indoor Unit

Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

"05" Indicates.

2. Selection of Optional Setting Mode

C OOL A / C

“SERVICE” is indicated and the mode number is ﬂashed.

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch and select the address of the indoor unit.

ADDS RN

SET TEMP.

HIGH

Select the address of the indoor unit to be operated.

HIGH

SERVICE

"CHECK" Switch

SERVICE

Press the "TEMP" ∨ or ∧ switch, select "05" for the address check mode, and then press the "CHECK" switch.

The address and refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit to be set are displayed (the diagram at left shows the No. 2 cycle and the No. 3 indoor unit).

NOTES: * Unconnected indoor unit address is not displayed. * In case of control by using two remote control switches (Master and Slave), the indoor unit addresses cannot be checked.

"RESET" switch

"RUN/STOP" switch

4. Run and Stop Indoor Unit. HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A / C

SERVICE

5. Ending Address Checking After selecting the indoor unit, press the "RUN/ STOP" switch to operate the indoor unit of the displayed address.

C OOL

HIGH

SET TEMP.

A / C

Pressing the "RUN/STOP" switch during the indoor unit operation, returns to the indoor unit selection procedure of step (3). Repeat steps (3) and (4) until the address number of the indoor unit for which the address is to be changed is able to be checked. When selecting another indoor unit, ﬁrst stop the operation of the indoor unit currently being checked. NOTES: * All operations other than operation of the "RUN/STOP" switch are not available during the address checking. * Do not operate from the central station during the address checking.

Press the "RESET" switch during the indoor unit operation OFF to return to the normal mode. Once the address of the indoor unit to be changed has been checked, change the address of the indoor unit by proceeding to step (3) Address Change Mode.

199

(3) Address Change Mode Change the address (unit number) of the indoor unit. 3. Selection of Indoor Unit

Normal Mode (when unit is not operating)

"04" indicated.

1. Change to the optional setting mode. Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

Select the address of the indoor unit to be changed.

HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

2. Selection of Optional Setting Mode

A / C

SERVICE

SET TEMP.

HIGH C OOL

A / C

The address and refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit to be set change from ﬂashing to remaining lit.

"CHECK" switch

SERVICE

“SERVICE” is Press the temperature control ∨ or indicated and the ∧ switch, select "04" for the address mode number is change mode, and then press the ﬂashed.

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch to select the address of the indoor unit and then press the "CHECK" switch.

NOTE: * In case of selecting the address not to change, "NO FUNKTION" is displayed.

"CHECK" switch.

4. Change the address of the indoor unit. HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A / C

SERVICE

"CHECK" switch HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A / C

SERVICE

Select the new address to be used after changing the address. The refrigerant cycle number display can be changed from 00 to 63 by pressing the "TIME" ∇ or △ switch, and the unit number display can be changed from 00 to 63 by pressing the "TEMP." control ∨ or ∧ switch. The address display changes from ﬂashing to remaining lit when the "CHECK" switch is pressed after selecting an address.

NOTE: A refrigerant cycle number of "99" is used in case of temporarily avoiding setting an address when all indoor unit refrigerant cycle numbers or unit numbers are in use. If an address has been set to "99", make sure to subsequently change the address to an address within the normal address range.

The result of changing the address is displayed several seconds after the "CHECK" switch has been pressed. "AH" is temporarily displayed if address change processing has been completely succeeded, while "EE" is temporarily displayed if the address was unable to be changed. If this happens, repeat the procedure for changing the address.

5. Changing the address of another indoor unit. Select the address of the indoor unit to be changed.

HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A/ C

SERVICE

Pressing the "TEMP." control ∨or ∧ switch after the result of an address change is displayed in step 4 for changing the address of an indoor unit, returns to the selection of an indoor unit of step 3. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all indoor unit address changes have been completed.

6. Ending Address Change. HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A / C

SERVICE

"AC" ﬂashes while connections are being checked.

7. Turning ON Power of Indoor Unit. Press the "RESET" switch during selection of an indoor unit of step 3,return to the normal mode. Once the address of the indoor unit has been successfully changed, processing for checking connections begins.

NOTE: In the case of having changed the address of the indoor unit with the remote control switch, make sure to record the new refrigerant cycle number and unit number of the indoor unit that has been changed in the entry column on the printed board.

200

Once turn OFF the power of the indoor unit 3 to 5 minutes after completing step 6. After the display on the remote control switch is no longer displayed, turn ON the power of the indoor unit. NOTE: After ending address change in step 6, make sure to turn off the power of the indoor unit. If this procedure is not performed, the automatic address function may not be performed properly.

記入欄 Entry column

(4) Address Initialization This is used to initialize an address that has been changed in the address change mode or to initialize an indoor unit address that has been set with the automatic address function. When set this function, the address of the indoor unit is returned to the dip switch setting. (Repeat automatic address setting if the dip switch setting is to the automatic address setting.) Normal mode (when unit is not operating) 1. Change to the optional setting mode. Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

Select the address of the indoor unit for which the address is to be initialized.

C OOL ADDS RN

SET TEMP.

HIGH

A / C

C OOL

“SERVICE” is indicated and the mode number is ﬂickered.

"06" Indicates. HIGH

2. Selection of Optional Setting Mode

A / C

3. Select an indoor unit.

"CHECK" switch

SERVICE

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch, select either "06" for the address initialization mode, and then press the "CHECK" switch.

SERVICE

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch and select the address of the indoor unit.

NOTES: * In case of control by two remote control switches (Master ayd Slave), settings shall be operated by the master controller. * In case of selecting the address not to change "NO FUNCTION" is displayed . * When selecting indoor address "AA", the indoor unit address that does not have an address initialization cannot be cleared.

4. Address Initialization The displayed address is initialized. Check that there is no problem with initializing the address.

HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A / C

SERVIC

The address and refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit to be set ﬂash temporarily.

Automatic address initialization starts when the "CHECK" switch is pressed. ● Once the address has been successfully initialized, processing for checking connections starts. ● If the address has already been initialized or the indoor unit does not have an address initialization function, the address and refrigerant cycle number to be set change from ﬂashing to remaining lit. Repeat the setting procedure from step 3 when initializing the addresses of other indoor units. Press the "RESET" switch to end address initialization.

201

12.1.8.

Elevating Grille Group Setting and Cancellation

Group setting of the elevating grille refers to a function that allows all settings for the elevating grille (setting of elevating functions for input 2 and outputs 1 and 2) to be made all at once for all indoor units connected to the remote control switch. Settings are made by following the procedure as follows. ●Elevating Grille Group Setting Procedure Normal mode (when unit is not operating)

1. Switch to the elevating grille group setting mode. Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

2. Elevating grille Group Setting Procedure "GRL" is displayed.

HIGH C OOL

3. Display Following Elevating Grille Group Setting Procedure

"RESET" Switch

A/ C

Press the "RUN/STOP" switch when making group settings. (Press the "RESET" switch to return to the normal mode without making group settings.)

SET

HIGH C OOL

"SET" ﬂashes for 3 seconds.

A/C

"RUN/STOP" Switch

The elevating grille settings are made for all indoor units connected to the remote control switch. "SET" ﬂashes for 3 seconds after settings have been made, and then automatically returns to the normal mode.

NOTES: * In case of using by two remote control switches (Master and Slave), the settings shall be operated by the master controller. * Group settings are made to all indoor units connected to the remote control switch regardless of whether or not these are actually provided with the elevating grille. The indoor unit to be set cannot be selected. (In this case, refer to section 5, "Optional Setting and Input/Output Setting from Remote Control Switch".) * Please note that when functions other than the elevating grille have been set for input 2 and output 1 and 2, those settings are cleared (namely, there are overwritten by the elevating grille function).

Elevating grille settings can be canceled all at once by following the procedure as follows. ●Elevating Grille Group Cancellation Procedure Normal mode (when unit is not operating) 1. Change to the optional setting mode. Press the “CHECK” switch and the ”RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.

3. Select the unit to be set. "02" Indicates. HIGH C OOL ADDS RN

A/ C

2. Select the input/output setting mode. SET TEMP.

HIGH C OOL

HIGH A/ C

C OOL

SERVICE

ADDS RN

A/ C

“SERVICE” is indicated and the mode number is ﬂashed.

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch, select "02" for the input/output setting mode, and then press the "CHECK" switch.

4. Group cancellation procedure HIGH C OOL

ADDS RN NO FUNCTION

A/C

SERVICE

"NO FUNCTION" ﬂashes for 2 seconds

202

SERVICE

Press the " ↑↓ " switch. The elevating grille settings for the selected units are canceled all at once and input 1 and output 1 and 2 are returned to the factory settings. "NO FUNCTION" ﬂashes for 2 seconds following this procedure.

SERVICE

Press the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch, select the address of the indoor unit to be set and then press the "CHECK" switch. The address and refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit to be set are displayed (the diagram at left shows the No. 1 cycle and the No. 2 indoor unit). All units are displayed at once when "AA" is set for both the refrigerant cycle number and address. Example: Display in case of group cancellation of all units. When canceling elevating grille settings for other units, repeat selection of the indoor units by pressing the "TEMP." ∨ or ∧ switch.

Press the "RESET" switch to cancel the cancellation procedure. Normal mode

12.2 Wireless Remote Control Switch: PC-LH3A 12.2.1 Before Installation and Operation This packing contains the following parts. Check the contents and the number of the parts. Name

Q'ty

Wireless Remote Control Switch (Controller)

Remark

For Operation Control

Holding Bracket

For Controller

Battery (AAA/1.5V Dry Cell)

For Power Source of Controller

Screw

For Fixing "Holding Bracket" onto Wall

12.2.2 Setting Batteries Set the batteries (AAA/1.5V 2) for the controller as follows. (1) Remove the battery cover by sliding toward the arrow direction by pushing the part of the cover as shown in the figure below. Slide toward the arrow direction by pushing.

(2) Set the batteries. (Insert the batteries according to the marks of + and - on the case.) 12.2.3 Name of Parts • Controller This controller is used to send commands about operation mode, timer setting, etc. to the indoor unit. Face the transmitter of the controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit and press the switch of required operation so that commands (by infrared rays) are sent to the indoor unit. The distance for transmitting is approximately 6 meters as a maximum. (The capable distance for transmitting will get shorter in case that the transmitting angle is not vertical to the receiver or an electronic type light is used in the room, etc.)

Transmitter Point the transmitter towards the receiver of the indoor unit when sending commands. The transmitting indication on the liquid crystal display flashes when sending commands. Transmitting Indication

AUTO H E AT DRY COOL FA N

MODE RESET

°C

TIMER ON OFF RUN/STOP

TEMP.

Hi Me Lo

FAN

LOUVER

CANCEL

SET

OFF TIME

ON TIME TIMER

Liquid Crystal Display The set temperature, timer operation, position of air louver, operation mode, air flow mode, etc., are indicated. The diagram of the display shown on the left is for explanation purposes only. The display will differ during actual operation. Run/Stop Switch Operation of the unit can be started or stopped by pressing this switch. Fan Speed Switch Press this switch to select the fan speed. By repeatedly pressing the button, the setting will change sequentially through HIGH, MED and LOW. (Fan speed is fixed at Low for dry operation.) Mode Selection Switch By repeatedly pressing the mode switch, the unit cycles through the different operating modes in the order of HEAT, DRY, COOL and FAN. To select auto operation, press the switch for more than 3 seconds. If the switch is pressed again, it will return to FAN mode. Louver Angle Switch The airflow angle and auto-louver operation can be set by this switch. When pressing the switch, the angle is changed in the following order. (In cool or dry operation modes, steps 1-5 and Auto swing are available.) 1 Step

2 Step

7 Step

Auto Swing

Temp. Switch The setting temperature can be adjusted using this switch. Timer Switches Four switches control the timer operation. The set time can be changed by pressing “ON TIME” or “OFF TIME” and is set by pressing the “SET” switch. Timer operation can be cancelled using “CANCEL”. Reset Switch (1) Press RESET to turn off the filter indicator lamp after filter cleaning. (2) If the unit is stopped abnormally due to protection devices etc., press the RESET switch to cancel the control stoppage after the cause of the abnormality has been remove.

203

12.2.4 Sending Commands from Controller The operation commands are sent by pressing the required operation switch by facing the transmitter of the controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit. (1) When the commands are sent, the “ ” indication on the liquid crystal display of the controller flashes once. (2) The indication lamp (yellow) on the receiver part of the indoor unit turns ON for an instant when the indoor unit receives the commands.

12.2.5 Operation When operating the controller, face the transmitter toward the receiver of the indoor unit and press the switch for the required operation as described in the item “12.3.4 Sending Commands from Controller”. ATTENTION: In case that two indoor units are installed side by side, the commands from the controller may be received by both indoor units. The function to identify each indoor unit is not applicable.

Receiver Part

12.2.6 Installing Onto The Wall or Pillar Direct Line between Transmitter and Receiver Capable Distance for Transmitting: Max. 6m Within approx. 50o (Directivity)

Transmitting indication " " flashes once.

PC-LH3A Hi

°C

AUTO

FAN MODE RESE

. TEMP

LOUV

SET EL

CANC

OFF TIME

ON TIME TIMER

ATTENTION: In case that the indication lamp (yellow) does not turn ON although the commands are sent, the commands are not received by the indoor unit. In such a case, send the commands again. ATTENTION: The transmitter of the controller has the vertical directivity to the receiver, and the permissible angle for transmitting is within 50o. However, the capable distance for transmitting gets half when the transmitting angle is 50o, and also get shorter in case that an electronic type light is used in the room.

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) Indication When viewed from certain angles the LCD can be difficult to read. The viewing angle ranges from an optimal of 60o down to 30o, as shown in the figure below.

30o

60o

204

ATTENTION: When the commands are sent by the controller hooked onto the wall, the receiver of the indoor unit may not receive the commands. (1) Select the suitable place for handling and install the controller with the customer’s acceptance. Do not install the controller at the places as shown in the below. • where children can touch • where the air from the air conditioner is directly discharged • where there is oil vapor and the oil is dispersed • where the humidity is high (2) Pay attention to the following points in case that the controller is installed in a place where there is medical equipment radiating electromagnetic waves. (a) Install the controller in a place where electromagnetic waves are not radiated directly toward the electrical box of the indoor unit and the controller. (b) Keep a distance more than 3 meters away from the equipment radiating electromagnetic waves, the receiver of the radio, etc. for prevention of the noise through the air. (c) In case that there is electric noise at the power source for the indoor unit, the treatment such as providing a noise filter is required. (3) Do not install the controller in a place where generation, flowing, staying or leaking of flammable gas is detected. (4) Install the controller in a place where there is a distance more than 30cm from the power supply cable when installing the controller onto the wall. (5) Install the holding bracket (accessory) onto the wall by using screw (accessory) and attach the controller to the holding bracket.

12.2.7 Test Running by Controller ATTENTION: Test running by the controller can not be performed in case that the wired remote control switch is used together; in case that multiple units are operated simultaneously (SET-FREE and UTOPIA Series). In such cases, perform the test running by the wired remote control switch. (1) Perform the test run after the installation work is completed. (a) Set the batteries for the controller. (b) Turn ON the power supply for the indoor and outdoor units. (c) “ ” lamp (yellow) on the receiver of the indoor unit flashes (0.25 seconds ON 0.25 seconds OFF), and then turns OFF. While the lamp is flashing, the unit will not operate because it is initialising.



(2) Set the test run mode by pressing “SET” and “OFF TIME” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds. The LCD should be as shown in the figure below. Test Run Mode is under suspension.

(5) Adjust the angle of the air louver as follows. The air louver has a mechanism for the auto-swing function. Do not move the louver by hand forcefully. (a) Select the FAN mode by pressing the “MODE” switch. (b) Set the louver angle by pressing the “LOUVER” switch. (6) Stop the Test Run (a) Test Run is stopped after 2 hours automatically. (b) Test Run is stopped by pressing “ RUN/STOP” switch again. After Test Run is finished, check that the red lamp (RUN) and the green lamp (TIMER) turn OFF.

12.2.8 Simultaneous Operation of Multiple Indoor Units The multiple indoor units (Max. 16 units) can be started and stopped simultaneously by one controller. Perform this operation only in case that multiple indoor units are installed in a room as shown in the figure below. Indoor Unit

(3) Set the operation mode by pressing the “MODE” switch.

Controller

Test Run Mode is under operating.



Control Cable between Indoor Units

Control Example of Simultaneous Operation of Multiple Units

Do not perform this operation in case that the multiple indoor units are installed in different rooms separately. It may happen that some indoor units remain unchanged.

205

<Procedures> NOTE: The setting of the rotary switches (RSW) is not required for the models such as SET-FREE and UTOPIA Series, etc. which have an auto-address function.

ATTENTION: Turn OFF all the power source before the following procedures such as wiring, setting the rotary switch, etc. (1) Installation of Air Panel for Wireless Control In case of simultaneous operation of plural (up to 16) units by the wireless remote control switch, apply the air panel for wireless control only to the unit to be operated, and apply the standard panels (for wired control) to other units. In case of applying plural air panels for wireless control, up to 2 air panels for wireless control can be used. Wireless Panel

Standard Panel

ATTENTION: In case that the setting of the rotary switch is not performed correctly, an abnormal operation (irregular run/stop) may occur when test running or actual operation.

Standard Panel Standard Panel or Wireless Panel

Wireless Controller

Should be Standard Panel

In case of applying two (2) air panels for wireless control, the setting of main and sub receiver part is required. Refer to the receiver kit installation manual. (2) Perform wiring between indoor units by referring to the receiver installation manual. (3) Fix the connecting control cable (do not use the white cord of the 3-core cable) between indoor units at certain points with bands not to run along the power supply cable inside of the indoor unit. The same wiring is required outside of the indoor unit; keep a distance more than 30cm between the control cable and the power supply cable, or ground one end of a conduit tube after inserting the control cable in the metal conduit tube. (4) Set the rotary switches (RSW) on the printed circuit boards in the electrical box of each indoor unit as shown in the figure below.

B C DE

CDE

B C DE

7 9

B C DE

F 01

CDE

B C DE

7 9

B C DE

7 9

7 9 8

7 9

F 01

456

F 01

456

F 01

456

7 9

B C DE

7 9 8

F 01

456

F 01

456

F 01

456

7 9 8

No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit 23

F 01

B C DE

F 01

B C DE

F 01

B C DE

F 01

456

B C DE

F 01

456

F 01

No. 8 Unit

No. 7 Unit

No.6 Unit

No. 5 Unit

456

206

No. 4 Unit

No. 9 Unit Rotary Switch Setting

No. 3 Unit

F 01

Rotary Switch Setting

No. 2 Unit

7 9

No. 1 Unit

(5) Check the Number of Indoor Units Connected Check the number of indoor units connected when test running. â&#x20AC;˘ The 7-segment indication of the receiver part shows the number of the indoor units connected in case that the test running is performed by the controller. However, the number can not be indicated for some models. In such a case, check the number by the wired controller PC-AR.

(6) Checking by Wired Controller (PC-AR) (a) Turn ON the power supply. Turn ON the power Supply for all indoor units.

(d) Cancelling “TEST RUN” Mode • When the unit is not operating, press the “RESET” switch. HIGH COOL A/C

RUN / STOP

MODE FAN SPEED

TEMP.

ON/OFF TIMER

VENTI LOUVER

RESET

CHECK TIME

(b) For the models with the auto-address function, wait for 3 minutes approximately. The addressing is automatically performed. (There is a case that 5 minutes is required according to the setting condition.)

• When the unit is operating, press the “RUN/STOP” switch. HIGH

(c) Set the “Test Run” mode. The “Test Run” mode can be set by pressing the “MODE” and “CHECK” switch simultaneously for 3 seconds.

COOL A/C

RUN / STOP

MODE FAN SPEED

TEMP.

ON/OFF TIMER

VENTI LOUVER

RESET

CHECK TIME

HIGH COOL A/C CHECK

RUN / STOP

MODE FAN SPEED

TEMP.

ON/OFF TIMER

VENTI LOUVER

RESET

CHECK TIME

12.2.9 Test Running by Wired Controller Refer to the instructions attached to the indoor unit or the wired controller.

• The total number of indoor units connected is indicated on the liquid crystal display. • In case that the indicated number is not correct, the auto-address function is not performed correctly due to incorrect wiring, the electric noise, etc. Turn OFF the power supply and correct the wiring after checking the following points; (Do not repeat turning ON and OFF within 10 seconds.) a. Power Supply for Indoor Unit Not Turned ON or Incorrect Wiring b. Incorrect Connection of Connecting Cable between Indoor Units or Incorrect Connectionof Cable for Wired Controller c. Incorrect Setting of Rotary Switch (The setting is overlapped.) d. Incorrect Auto-address Setting ATTENTION: When “00” is indicated, the auto-address function may be performing. Set the “TEST RUN” mode again. • Check to ensure that the “TEST RUN” mode is set. The “Alarm Code” may be indicated in case that the “TEST RUN” mode is not set.

207

12.3 Wireless Receiver Kit: PC-ALH, ALHD, ALHP,ALHZ 12.3.1 Before Installation and Operation This packing contains the following parts. Check the contents and the number of the parts. Name

Q'ty

Receiver Kit

PC-ALH for RCI Model

Connecting Cable Cover Band Receiver Kit

PC-ALHD for RCD Model

Screw Band Receiver Kit

Band Insulation

PC-ALHP for RPC Model

Receiver Kit Band

PC-ALHZ for RPI Model

Screw Screw Clamp

208

Remarks

With Connection Wire

For Protection of Connecting Cable

For Fixing Cable

With Connection Cable

For Fixing Receiver Kit

For Fixing Cable

With Connection Cable

For Fixing Cable

For Protection of Cable

With Connection Cable

For Fixing Cable

For Fixing Receiver Kit

For Fixing Clamp

For Fixing Cable

12.3.2 Installation of Wireless Receiver Kit

Pay attention to the following installation procedures. If not, it may drop from the panel, resulting in a serious accident. [PC-ALH] (1) Install the wireless receiver kit, the indoor unit and the air panel at the same time. (2) In case that the wireless receiver kit is installed after installing the indoor unit, turn off the power source of the indoor unit and remove the air panel. (3) This receiver kit can be installed at the position of A, B, C or D. Air Panel A

(6) Install the air panel (option) onto the indoor unit. (7) Attach the receiver kit in the following procedure. (a) Draw out the connecting cable from the corner pocket and connect the connecting cable and the wire of the receiver kit. After connecting cable, wrap the connector with the cover and fix them with a band. Air Panel Corner Pocket

Connecting Cable

Band Cover

Receiver Kit

Band

(b) Hook the band on the rear side of the receiver kit at the pin of the air panel as shown below. Pin

(4) Remove the cover of indoor unit electrical control box and connect the cable to the terminal board (white) as shown below. Terminal Board (White)

PCB

Indoor Unit Electrical Control Box

Connecting Cable

Band

Mark Band "B" Mark Band "A" L-Shaped Nail

(5) Draw out the connecting cable from the wiring hole of the indoor unit, and lead the cable over the suspension bracket of the indoor unit to the installing position of the receiver kit. Bundle the extra cable with a band.

(8) Hook other fixing nails (3 positions) at square holes of the air panel.

Suspension Bracket

100 to 200mm

Connecting Cable

Fixing Nail (3 Portions)

Wiring Hole of Indoor Unit Connector

209

NOTE When removing the receiver kit after installing the air panel; (1) The corner position of the receiver kit can be lifted when a coin or a slotted screwdriver is inserted into the slot part “1” and twisted downward. With “1” lifted, twist a coin or a slotted screwdriver at the positions of “2” and “3”, the whole receiver kit can be lifted. (2) After disconnecting the fixing nails (3 positions), slide the receiver kit in the arrow direction (“4”) and remove the receiver kit.

(4) Lead the cable along the cable for the autoswing motor and tie them by the band.

Cable for Wireless Receiver Kit

4 Coin or Slotted Screwdriver

Band (Factory-Supplied)

Lifting Slot Part

[PC-ALHD] (1) Install the wireless receiver kit, the indoor unit and the air panel at the same time. (2) In case that the wireless receiver kit is installed after installing the indoor unit, turn off the power source of the indoor unit and remove the air inlet grille. (3) Fix the wireless receiver kit to the air panel by screws. (The tightening torque shall be 0.8 N-m.) Air Panel

(135)

(5) Remove the cover of indoor unit electrical control box and connect the cable to the terminals A and B of the terminal board (white). NOTE: After connecting the cable, bind up the remaining cable length portion by band (Factory-Supplied) and put them in the electrical control box. Mark Band "B" Connecting Cable Terminal Board (White)

Electrical Box for Indoor Unit

Screw (Factory-Supplied)

(3.5)

Cable for Wireless Receiver Kit

210

Cable for Auto-Swing Motor

Indoor Unit Electrical Control Box

φ7 Boss

Printed Circuit Board

Flange

Cable for Auto-Swing Motor

Wireless Receiver Kit

Mark Band "A"

(6) Remove the remote control cover of the air intake grille. (a) Press the hooks of the remote control cover by hand. Air Intake Grille

Remote Control Cover

Hook

Remote Control Cover

Hook

Air Intake Grille

[PC-ALHP] (1) Install the wireless receiver kit and indoor unit at the same time. (2) In case that the wireless receiver kit is installed after installing the indoor unit, turn off the power source of the indoor unit. (3) Remove the right resin side cover. (a) Open the air intake grille. (b) Remove the attaching screw (M4) of the resin side cover. (c) Slide the resin side cover forward as shown below.

Hook

Remote Control Cover

Fixing Screw (M4) Inside of Resin Side Cover

(7) After fixing the air panel, attach the air intake grille to the air panel. (a) Check to ensure that the location of square hole of the air intake grille coincides with location of the wireless receiver kit of the air panel. (b) Check to ensure that the cable of the wireless receiver kit is not clamped by the square hole of the air intake grille. Air Intake Grille

Air Panel

Hooking Part Hooking Plate

(4) Remove the remote control cover. (a) Insert the screwdriver or a stick (within Ď&#x2020;5) into the service hole. (b) Press the hook of the remote control cover by using the screwdriver or a stick. Press by Screw Driver Remote Control Switch Cover Attaching Place of Wireless Receiver Kit

Wireless Receiver Kit

Hole for Wiring and Servicing

Drain Pan

Hook Square Hole Wireless Receiver Kit

211

(5) Install the wireless receiver kit to the drain pan. (a) Insert the cable through the conduit tube. (b) Draw out the cable from the conduit tube. (c) Install the wireless receiver kit completely. Check to ensure that there is no gap between wireless receiver kit and drain pan.

(7) Remove the cover of indoor unit electrical control box and connect the cable to the terminals A and B of the terminal board (white). NOTE: After connecting the cable, bind up the remaining cable length portion by band (Factory-Supplied) and put them in the electrical control box. Printed Circuit Board

Terminal Board (White)

Enlarged View EMERGENCY COOL

RUN

Electrical Box for Indoor Unit

HEAT

DEF.

Cable for Wireless Receiver Kit

TIMER

FILTER

Mark Band "B"

Mark Band "A"

Wireless Receiver Kit

Example: RPC-4.0FSN

[PC-ALHZ]

NOTE Install the receiver kit onto the wall or ceiling near the indoor unit.

(6) Lead the cable into the electrical box with other wires. Attach the insulation (factory-supplied) to the edge of the side plate in order to protect the cable as shown in the figure below. Tie with the cable by the cord clamp.

(1) Install the wireless receiver kit and indoor unit at the same time. (2) In case that the wireless receiver kit is installed after installing the indoor unit, turn off the power source of the indoor unit. (3) Check to ensure that the distance between the wireless receiver kit and the indoor unit is less than 5m. (4) Remove the cover by using slotted screwdriver. Slot

Cover

Drain Pan Side Plate R Cable for Wireless Receiver Kit Insulation (Factory-Supplied) Cushion Cable for Wireless Receiver Kit Side Plate

212

Drain Pan

Piping Cover

Holding Bracket

(5) Install the wireless receiver kit onto the wall or ceiling as follows:

A. In Case of Exposing Cable

B. In Case of Concealed Cable

(1) Fix the fixing bracket of kit by using screw (A) at 4 locations.

(1) Prepare the following box (Field-Supplied). JIS Box (JIS C 8336-1991) 1. Switch Box for 1 Controller (Without Cover) 2. Small Switch Box for 1 Controller (Without Cover) 3. Switch Box for 1 Controller (With Cover)

Rigid Metal Conduit Screw (M4) (Field-Supplied)

Screw (A)

(2) Cut one of the knockout holes at the cover.

(2) Insert the cable into the rigid metal conduit.

Cable

(3) Lead the cable though the groove and draw out the cable from the knockout hole.

(3) Fix the fixing bracket of kit by using screw (Field-Supplied).

Cable Cable

Knockout Hole Band

(4) Attach the cover. Do not clamp the cable when attaching the cover.

Screw (Field-Supplied) This figure shows the case of Switch Box for 1 Controller.

(4) Attach the cover same as A-(4). Box (Field-Supplied)

(Step 2) Click Sound. (Step 1) Hooking Part

(Step 1) Hooking Part

Cover

Check to ensure that cable is not loosen.

Fixing Bracket

Cover

(Step 2) Click Sound.

213

(6) Remove the cover of indoor unit electrical control box and connect the cable to the terminals A and B of the terminal board (white).

Printed Circuit Board Electrical Box for Indoor Unit Terminal Board (White)

NOTE: After connecting the cable, bind up the remaining cable length portion by band (FactorySupplied) and put them in the electrical control box.

Mark Band "B" Mark Band "A" Cable for Wireless Receiver Kit

Example: RPI-3.0FSN

12.3.3 Optional Functions (1) Open the lid of case by removing two screws so that the following functions are available. [PC-ALHD] ON

Switch "COOL" 1 2 3 4

Switch "HEAT"

EMERGENCY

COOL RUN

Remove two screws and open the case.

Dip Switch (SW3) (Factory Setting)

HEAT

Hole for Cable

DEF FILTER TIMER

Cover

Printed Circuit Board

Case

[PC-ALHP] ON

Switch "COOL" Switch "HEAT"

1 2 3 4

Dip Switch (SW3) (Factory Setting)

EMERGENCY

COOL

Remove two screws and open the case.

HEAT

DEF RUN

TIMER

Hole for Cable

FILTER

Cover

[PC-ALHZ] Switch "COOL" EMERGENCY RUN

Printed Circuit Board

Case

(1) Remove the Base. (2) Remove two screws and open the case.

Hole for Cable

Switch "HEAT"

COOL

DEF

FILTER

HEAT

1 2 3 4

TIMER

Dip Switch (SW3) (Factory Setting) Cover

Printed Circuit Board

Case

Base

(2) Optional Setting for Dip Switch (SW3) Operation Function Setting of Sub Receiver Kit Identifying of Indoor Units

214

: ON,

: OFF

Dip Switch Setting (SW3) 2 3

12.3.4 Others (1) Proceed the “TEST RUN” mode by using “Operation & Installation Manual” for the wireless remote control switch (PC-LH3A). Turn OFF all power sources before setting the dip switches. (2) Emergency Operation Setting (Refer to the figure of the item 3 “Optional Functions”.) In case that PC-LH3A is unusable by batteries shortage, etc., perform emergency operation as follows. (a) Switch “COOL”: Press “COOL” so that the cooling operation is started. Press “COOL” again so that the cooling operation is stopped. (b) Switch “HEAT”: Press “HEAT” so that the heating operation is started. Press “HEAT” again so that the heating operation is stopped. NOTE: During the emergency operation, the LED (yellow) blinks (0.5 second ON / 0.5 second OFF). (3) Alarm Code Indication • In case that some trouble occurs because of activation of safety device, etc., “RUN” (red lamp) blinks (0.5 second ON / 0.5 second OFF). • Refer to the Installation Manual for outdoor unit about Alarm Code List. • Alarm Code indicates the blinking times of “DEF” (green lamp) and “FILER” (yellow lamp) as shown bellow. “DEF” (green lamp): The blinking is shown at the 2 digit of Alarm Code “FILTER” (yellow lamp): The blinking is shown at the 1 digit of Alarm Code (Alphabet Code: A=10 times, B=11 times, C=12 times, .....) - Example Alarm

35 "FILTER" (yellow lamp) "DEF" (green lamp)

"DEF" blinks 3 times (0.5 second ON / 0.5 second OFF) "FILTER" (yellow lamp) blinks 5 times (0.5 second ON / 0.5 second OFF)

• “Run” (red lamp) blinking (1 second ON / 1 second OFF) indicates abnormal transmitting between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit.

215

12.4 Central Station : PSC-5S 12.4.1 Installation Work • Selection of Installation Place Select a suitable place for handling and determine the installation place of the controller with the customer’s acceptance. Do not install the controller at such places as; where children can touch where the air from the air conditioner is directly discharged • Before Installation This packing contains the following parts ([A] to [D]); [A] Central Station (Q’ty: 1), [B] Screw <M4X16L> (Q’ty: 2, For Fixing the Holding Bracket onto the Wall), [C] Ring Core (Q’ty: 1) [D] Band (Q’ty: 1, For Fixing Cable to Ring Core) • Installation Space In case of installing the central stations in the vertical direction, keep a distance more than 50mm between the central stations vertically. If the distance is insufficient, the front cover of the central station can not open wide enough.

• Installation Procedures (1) Insert the edge of the screwdriver into the groove parts at the bottom of the case, push and turn the screwdriver and remove the control part from the power supply part. Do not insert the screwdriver into the nail near the groove part, or the nail will be damaged. View from Bottom Grooves

Approx. 6mm Grooves

Hooks Grooves Slotted Screwdriver Slotted Screwdriver

(2) Attach the power supply part to the switch box. Do not run the power line and the control line through the same conduit tube.

Power Supply Part FAN HIGH

SWING LOUVER

ON/OFF TIMER

Power Line

SET TEMP.

COOL MED HEAT

LOW DEFROST DRY A/C + CENTRAL AUTO VENT H.STRG

ADDS

RN HR

UNIT

NO FUNCTION SERVICE

ABNML

FILTER

T. RUN CHECK

RUN / STOP

Screw (x2)

TEMP.

More than 50mm FAN HIGH

SWING LOUVER

ON/OFF TIMER

SET TEMP.

COOL MED HEAT

LOW DEFROST DRY A/C + CENTRAL AUTO VENT H.STRG

RUN / STOP

ADDS

RN HR

UNIT

NO FUNCTION SERVICE

ABNML

FILTER

T. RUN CHECK

Control Line

TEMP.

Switch Box (Field-Supplied)

(3) Attach the control part onto the power supply part. At first, attach the upper side, and then the lower side.

Follow the national regulations for the right assembly of the PSC-5S in the wall.

216

12.4.2 Electrical Wiring (1) Electrical Wiring Up to 8 Central Stations can be connected to the H-LINK.

Central Station Terminal Terminal Board Board TB1 TB2

To be connected to the terminals "1" and "2" of terminal board of indoor units or outdoor units

Outdoor Unit 1 2

1 2

H-Link Power Supply (AC 220V or 240V)

To TB2 of Central Station

Indoor Unit

Shielded Twist Pair Cable 1P - 0.75mm2

Remote Control Switch

(2) Setting of Dip Switch Set the DSW1 as shown below. Address setting is required when the central station (Max. 8 units) is connected on H-LINK. (The setting of dip switches is all OFF before shipping.)

DSW1 (Address Setting) Address Setting of DSW1

1 ON OFF

ON OFF 1 2 3 4

ON OFF

ON OFF 1 2 3 4

7 ON OFF

1 2 3 4

6 ON OFF

1 2 3 4

Address Setting of DSW1

8 ON OFF

1 2 3 4

220V or 240V To Outdoor Unit or Breaker Pull Box

Central Station

Divide the power line for the central station from the main power line by a pull box as shown in the left figure. Indoor Unit

Indoor Unit

Check to ensure that the wiring is correct. Incorrect wiring may cause malfunction of the central station. Turn OFF the power supply of the air conditioner and the central station when performing the wiring work. If the wiring work is performed while the power supply of the central station is being supplied, it may cause malfunction of the central station. DO NOT run all the transmission cable for the central station along the power line and other transmission cables, or malfunction may occur due to the noise, etc. If the transmission cable for the central station is required to be run along the power line and other transmission cables, separate the cable more than 15cm away from other cables, or run the cable through a metal tube and earth the tube. In case of applying high voltage to the TB2, the fuse on the PCB is blown out. ON In such a case, firstly correct the wiring to TB1, and then set DSW7 (Fuse Recover) OFF No. 2 pin ON. Connect the shield tube of cable to earth. 1 2

217

12.4.3 Group Setting In case that group setting is not performed, the indication of the central station is as shown below for checking indoor unit connection after turning ON the power supply. Completion of Connection Check

Refrigerant Cycle on Connection Check

SET TEMP.

GROUP

COOL

MED

LOUVER

GROUP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

In Case of Item 1 Below (14 Units Connected)

Number of Checked Indoor Units Connected in Refrigerant Cycle on Connection Check

In Case of Item 2 Below

NOTE (1) The checked number of connected indoor units may be more than the actual number according to the condition of transmission. (2) After the connection check, the indications of “GROUP” and “SET TEMP.” may be “ - - ” temporarily. 1. System of Individual Control for Up to 16 Indoor Units Group setting is automatically performed by the indoor unit address regardless of the refrigerant cycle address. Set the indoor unit address without duplication of address. Central Station

Indoor Unit RSW Setting 0

Group Number

The setting of "0" to "F" of indoor unit RSW is corresponding to the group No. "1" to "16" of central station. (The setting can be changed by the procedure of "2. System of Group Control by Remote Control Switch"

2. System of Group Control by Remote Control Switch In this case, the group setting by central station is required. Group setting is for master unit (directly Central connected to remote control switch) and slave Station unit (connected by extension cable). In case that the remote control switch is not connected, the group setting by remote control switch is not available and only one master unit is controlled as one group. In case of up to 16 indoor units connected, the group setting is automatically performed as described in “1. System of Individual Control for up to 16 Indoor Units”. In this case, correct the Refrigerant No. Setting Indoor Unit RSW Setting group setting by the procedure below. Group Number

Slave

Master

Without Remote Control Switch

1 0 1

1 1

2 0 2

2 1

3 0 3

Group Setting Procedure 1. Changing to Group Setting Mode (1) Depress the “CHECK” switch for 3 seconds during the units of all groups are stopped. The central station is changed to the check mode and the “CHECK” indication is turned ON. And the “1” (Main Unit Setting Mode) is indicated at the 7 segment indicator for checking. (2) Depress the “CHECK” switch, and the indication on the 7 segment indicator for checking is changed to “2” (Sub Unit Setting Mode). (3) Depress the “RESET” switch, and the check mode is changed to the normal mode. 218

3 1 4

ATTENTION A. When there is a group in operation, the central station can not be changed to the check mode. B. When the group setting is performed, use the check table for group setting (page 225), and you can also write down the group number on the surface inside of the switch cover. 2. Setting of Master Unit (1) Indication of Master Unit Setting Mode When the central station is changed to the master unit setting mode, the LCD indication on the central station is as shown below. The indication of the group to be set is flickered. The refrigerant cycle number (hereafter called “Ref. No.”) and the indoor unit address (hereafter called “I. U. Add.”) indicates the address of the indoor unit which is set as the master unit of the group to be set. The “ ” indication of group flickers in case that the master unit of the group is set. When the “SET” indication appears, the indoor unit indicated on LCD is set as the master unit. In case that the master unit is not set, “ - - ” is indicated at Ref. No. and I. U. Add., and the “SET” indication does not appear. "1" shows the master unit setting mode.

Ref. No. of indoor Unit To Be Set (Can be changed by depressing the "

When the "SET" indication appears, the indicated indoor unit is set as the master unit. (When "SET" does not appear, the master unit is not set.)

SET

II I I I

II III II

II I II I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

II III I

9 10111213141516

" (TEMP) switch.)

CHECK

Address of Indoor Unit To Be Set (Can be changed by depressing the "

" (TEMP) switch)

When the "CHECK" indication appears, the central station is in the check mode. Group Number To Be Set

Condition of Master Unit Setting for Each Group ( is ON: The master unit is set./ is OFF: The master unit is not set.)

(2) Procedure of Master Unit Setting Set the master unit for each group as following. a. Selection of Group To Be Set

II III II

The flickering indication of group number is moved (ex. When selecting group No.6).

Ref. No.: Select by depressing " (TEMP) switch.

II III

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 II II I I

9 10111213141516

ATTENTION:

CHECK

I I I I II

9 10111213141516

II III II

Change Ref. No. by depressing “ ” (TEMP) switch and I. U. Add. by “ ” (TEMP) switch, and select the indoor unit to be set. The indication is changed in order as shown below.

II II I I

b. Selection of Indoor Unit To Be Set

II III

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I I I I II

Select the group to be set by depressing “GROUP” switch. The flickering indication of group number is moved every time when the “GROUP” switch is depressed. When the main unit of the selected group is already set, the Ref. No. and I. U. Add. of the main unit already set are indicated and the “SET” indication appears.

"SET" turns OFF.

CHECK

(ex. When selecting indoor unit of Ref. No.4 and I.U. Add.9)

A. When the indication of Ref. No. “ - - ”, the indication of I. U. Add. is also “ - - ”. In such a case, I. U. Add. can not be changed although the “ ” (TEMP) switch is depressed. B. Ref. No. with no indoor unit connected and I. U. Add. not connected are not indicated. C. The indoor unit already set as the master unit is not indicated. 219

SET

II II I

I III III

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 II I II I

Depress the “RUN/STOP” switch after selecting indoor unit, the indicated unit is set as the master unit, and the “ ” and “SET” indications appear. (Every time the “RUN/STOP” switch is depressed, the master unit is set and canceled alternately.)

" " and "SET" Indications: ON (The main unit is set.)

II I II I

c. Setting Procedure

9 10111213141516

CHECK

Only one indoor unit can be set as the master unit in one group. Other indoor unit can not be set as the master unit for the group with the master unit set already. For setting the master unit as the master unit for another group, cancel the present master unit setting and perform the setting for another group. In case that there are indoor units with auto-louver and indoor units without anto-louver in the same group, set the auto-louver setting is not available for all the units of the group. 3. Setting of Slave Unit (1) Indication of Slave Unit Setting Mode When the central station is changed to the slave unit setting mode, the LCD indication on the central station is as shown below. The indication of the group to be set is flickered. The Ref. No. and the I. U. Add. indicates the address of the indoor unit with the smallest address among the slave units of the group to be set. The “ ” indication of group flickers in case that the slave units of the group are already set. In case that the slave units are not set, “ - - ” is indicated at Ref. No. and I. U. Add. "2" shows the slave unit setting mode.

Ref. No. of indoor Unit To Be Set (Can be changed by depressing the "

When the "SET" indication appears, the indicated indoor unit is set as the slave unit. (When "SET" does not appear, the slave unit is not set.)

SET

II I II

II II I II

II I I II

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I II I

9 10111213141516

" (TEMP) switch.)

CHECK

Address of Indoor Unit To Be Set (Can be changed by depressing the "

" (TEMP) switch)

When the "CHECK" indication appears, the central station is in the check mode. Only the group with the master unit already set is indicated. The group to be set is flickered.

" " shows the group with indoor units to be set (The above figure shows that the indoor unit of Ref. No.1. and I.U. Add. 2 is set as the slave unit of No.4 group.

(2) Procedure of Slave Unit Setting Set the master unit for each group as followings. a. Selection of Group To Be Set

220

II III II

Ref. No.: Select by depressing " (TEMP) switch.

I I III

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

II II I II

Ref. No.: Select by depressing " (TEMP) switch.

II I I I I

CHECK

The flickering indication of group number is moved (ex. When selecting group No.10).

I II I II

Change Ref. No. by depressing “ ” (TEMP) switch and I. U. Add. by “ ” (TEMP) switch, and select the indoor unit to be set. The indication is changed in order as shown below.

II III

III III

b. Selection of Indoor Unit To Be Set

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 III III

Select the group to be set by depressing “GROUP” switch. The flickering indication of group number is moved every time when the “GROUP” switch is depressed. The group with no setting of master unit can not be selected.

9 10111213141516

CHECK

ATTENTION: A. Ref. No. with no indoor unit connected and I. U. Add. not connected are not indicated. B. When the selected unit is already set as slave unit, the group number indication “ ” of the unit and “SET” indication appear. C. The indoor unit already set as the master unit is not indicated. " " and "SET" Indications: ON (The slave unit is set for a group.)

c. Setting Procedure Depress the “RUN/STOP” switch after selecting indoor unit, the indicated unit is set as the slave unit, and the “ ” and “SET” indications appear. (Every time the “RUN/STOP” switch is depressed, the slave unit is set and canceled alternately.)

SET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I I I II

II I I I II

II I I II

9 10111213141516

CHECK

I III II

(ex. When selecting indoor unit of Ref. No.4 and I.U. Add.9)

Up to 15 slave units can be set in one group (Max. 16 units (including the master unit) in one group). For changing the setting fo slave unit to another group, cancel the present slave unit setting and perform the setting for another group. In case that all the units are set as the master unit, the central station can not be changed to the slave unit setting mode.

12.4.4 Input / Output Function The central station has two input functions and two output functions as shown below. Setting of DSW2 Mode

Port

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

ON OFF

#2 Pin: ON or OFF Both Available

Input 1

CN2 1-2

Simultaneous Operation/Stoppage, Level Signal

Simultaneous Operation, Pulse Signal

Input 2

CN2 2-3

Demand

Emergency Stop

Simultaneous Stoppage, Pulse Signal

Output 1

CN3 1-2

Simultaneous Operation Output

Output 2

CN3 1-3

Simultaneous Alarm Output

Specifications of Required Components: CN2 • DC12V Non-voltage A Connection • OMRON My Relay CN3 • PCC-1A As for demand input, the group to be controlled can be set when signal is input.

Cable with Connector (Option): PCC-1A 3 2 1 3 2 1

Non-Voltage A Connection Input

RYa R Cable More Than 0.5mm2 (Field-Supplied, Max. Length: 70m)

221

Demand Setting Procedure 1. Changing to Check Mode Depress the “CHECK” switch for more than 3 seconds, and the central station is changed to the check mode. 2. Changing to Demond Setting Mode Depress the “CHECK” switch and change the 7-segment indication for check to “5” (Demond Setting Mode). The LCD indication of the central station is as shown below. "5" shows the demand setting Mode

Ref. No. of Indoor Unit Set as Master Unit of Group To Be Set Address of Indoor Unit Set as Master Unit of Group To Be Set When the "CHECK" indication appears, the central station is in the check mode.

II I II

II II I I I

I I I I II

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I III II

9 10111213141516

CHECK

The group already set with demand control is indicated. ( is ON: Demand is set. / is OFF: Demand is not set.) Only the group with the master unit already set is indicated. The group to be set is flickered.

II I II II

II III I

CHECK

The flickering indication of group number is moved (ex. When selecting group No.3).

DEMAND

I I I II

II II I II

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I III II

222

9 10111213141516

I I I I II

4. Setting Procedure Depress the “RUN / STOP” switch and the selected group is set with demand control, and the “ ” and “DEMAND” indications appear. (Every time the “RUN / STOP” switch is depressed, the demand control is set and canceled alternately.)

I I III

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 II I I I I

3. Selection of Group To Be Set Select the group to be set by depressing the “GROUP” switch. The flickering indication of group number is moved every time the “GROUP” switch is depressed. The Ref. No. and I. U. Add. of the indoor unit set as main unit of the selected group to be set are indicated. The “ ” indication appears at the group already set with demand control, and the “DEMAND” indication appears.

9 10111213141516

" " and "SET" Indications: ON (The demand control is set.)

CHECK

12.4.5 Option Setting 1. Changing to Option Setting Mode (1) Depress the “CHECK” switch for more than 3 seconds while all the groups are stopped. The central station is changed to the option setting mode and the “CHECK” indication appears, and “1” (Master Unit Setting Mode) is indicated on the 7-segment for check. ATTENTION: When there is a group in operation, the central station can not be changed to the check mode. (2) Depress the “CHECK” switch and change the indication of the 7-segment.

7-Segment A b c d E

Function Fixing Operation Mode Fixing Setting Temperature Fixing Cooling Only Fixing Air Flow Auto COOL / HEAT

(3) Depress the “RESET” switch and the central station is changed to the normal mode. 2. Indication of Option Setting Mode When the central station is changed to the slave unit setting mode, the LCD indication on the central station is as shown below. The indication of the group to be set is flickered. The Ref. No. and I. U. Add. indicates the address of the indoor unit which is set as the master unit of the group to be set. The “ ” indication of group flickers in case that the option setting is already done. When the “SET” indication appears, the indoor unit indicated on LCD is already set with the optional function. "A" shows the option unit setting mode.

Ref. No. of indoor Unit Set as Master Unit of Group To Be Set When the "SET" indication appears, the indicated indoor unit is set with the optional function.

SET

I I I II

I II

II I I I II

I I II II

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I II

9 10111213141516

CHECK

Address of Indoor Unit Set as Master Unit of Group To Be Set When the "CHECK" indication appears, the central station is in the check mode.

Group Number To Be Set

Condition of Option Setting for Each Group ( is ON: The Option is set./ is OFF: The Option is not set.)

3. Setting Procedure (1) Depress the “CHECK” switch and select the setting item A - E. (2) Select the group to be set by depressing the “GROUP” switch. (3) Depress the “RUN / STOP” switch, the option setting is done. At that time, the “ ” indication appears and the “SET” indication also appear. (Every time the “RUN / STOP” switch is depressed, the optional function is set and canceled alternately.)

In case that the optional functions are set by the central station, it is required to set the same optional functions for the group by the remote control switch. In case that the optional functions (item A - E as shown above) are set by the remote control switch, it is required to set the same optional functions for the group by the central station.

223

(ii)

(i)

12.4.6 Initialization of Central Station The procedure for initialization of the group setting and the optional setting as follows. (1) Changing to Self Check Mode Depress the “GROUP( and )” and “MODE” switches simultaneously, the central station is changed to the self check mode. In case that there is a group in operation, the “NO FUNCTION” is indicated and the central station can not be changed to the self check mode. After changing to the self check mode, the LCD indication is changed from (i) to (vi) as shown below. Before the indication is changed to (vi), depress the “GROUP( and )” and “MODE” switches simultaneously again, and the central station is changed to the initializing mode. DEMAND

EMERGENCY

NO FUNCTION

LOUVER

DRY AUTO AUTO

HEAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

9 10111213141516

(iii)

(iV) FAN HIGH

TIMER

COOL

LOW

MED

GROUP

RMT. SW NAVAL ABNML

SET TEMP.

(V) All Indications : OFF (Vi) All Indications : OFF

CHECK FILTER

NOTE )” and “MODE” switches are not depressed again, the self check

and

In case that the “GROUP( operation continues.

(2) Initialization When the central station is changed to the initializing mode, the LCD indication on the central station is as shown below. In this condition, depress the “RESET” switch, and the flickering “06” indication is changed to ON and the initialization is performed. (In case that initialization is not required, depress the “CHECK” switch, the LCD indication is automatically changed as shown below.)

Depress "RESET" or "CHECK" switch. "06" flickers. Depress "RESET" switch and "06" is changed to ON. In case of EEPROM initialization, it takes approximately 30 - 60 seconds.

224

To Connection Check

Group Setting Table of Central Station Indoor Unit Address

Refrigerant Number

RSW of Indoor Unit Indication of PSC-5S

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Fill the group number (1 - 16) in the above table. Circle the unit number of the master unit.

225

12.4.7 Switch Names and Functions

Indication of Group Number

Indication of Timer

Indication of Louver Angle

Indication of Emergency Stop

Indication of Fan Speed

Indication of "Each Group Operation"

Fan Speed Selection Switch

Indication of "Remote Control Switch Not Available" Switch "ALARM" Indicator

F A N HIGH COOL M E D HEAT D R Y LOW

GROUP

TIMER

SET TEMP.

DEMAND

NO FUNCTION

LOUVER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RMT. SW NAVAL CHECK ABNML

FILTER

GROUP

RUN/STOP

RESET

MODE FAN SPEED

TIMER

"FILTER" Indicator

EMERGENCY

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Run Indicator (Red Lamp) RUN/STOP Switch

Indication of Alarm Code

Indication of "NO FUNCTION"

Indication of Operation Mode "AUTO" is indicated only when the operation function "Auto COOL/HEAT" is set.

Indication of Setting Temperature

Indication of Demand Control

RMT. SW NAVAL LOUVER

CHECK TEMP

Group Selection Switch "FILTER" Indication Reset Switch Check Switch Do not touch. This switch is only for service use.

Operation Mode Selection Switch Timer Selection Switch "Remote Control Switch Not Available" Switch

Auto Louver Switch

Temperature Setting Switch

This switch is not used.

Open the cover by pulling toward the arrow direction.

226

12.4.8 Operation Procedure A. Group Selection and Monitoring Unit Operation Status The central station can control up to 16 groups by each group or simultaneouly. (The selected groups can be operated and the unit operation status of the groups can be monitored.)

NOTE The group number is changed by depressing the “GROUP” switch. The group without group setting is not indicated. 1.

Supply power to the unit. GROUP

ATTENTION: (1) Supply power to the unit more than 12 hours before unit operation for compressor protection.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(2) Do not cut off power during the term of using air condirioner.

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Depress the “GROUP” switch. Every time the “GROUP” switch is depressed, the group number to be controlled is changed in the order as shown below. In case of “AA”, all the units are controlled simultaneously.

Group No. is changed. (ex. In case of selecting group 3)

GROUP

COOL

SET TEMP.

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Only Group Numbers Already Set are indicated.

When selecting the group, the setting conditions of each group are indicated. By operating by the remote control switch, the content of the setting is indicated. 1 16 ~ show the operating conditions of each group as follows; • Turned OFF: Stop • Turned ON: Operation • Flickering: Abnormality

Operating Conditions of Each Group (ex. In case of "COOL", "MED" and "28oC")

GROUP

COOL

SET TEMP.

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The Run indicator (Red Lamp) shows the followings; • Turned OFF: All Groups Stop • Turned ON: Operation • Flickering: More than 1 Group in Abnormal Condition

Opening Conditions of Each Group (ex. In case of groups 1 to 3 in operation) In case of group AA, the indications (operation mode, setting temperature, all flow, louver angle and "RMT. SW NAVAL") are indicated only when all groups are in the setting.

NOTE The indication of setting temperature “ - - ” shows no setting of temperature.

227

B. Setting of Operation Mode <Function> “COOL” Operation: “HEAT” Operation: “DRY” Operation: “FAN” Operation:

To cool the room temperature by distributing the cooled air. To heat the room temperature by distributing the heated air. To dehumidify more than standard cooling operation. To circulate the room air.

NOTE The recommended temperature for each operation is as follows; “COOL” Operation: 27 to 29oC / “HEAT” Operation: 18 to 20oC / “DRY” Operation: 23 to 25oC 1.

Depress the “GROUP” switch and select the group. (Refer to item 2 of 12.4.8 “A. Group Selection and Monitoring Unit Operation Status”.)

GROUP

COOL

SET TEMP.

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of selected group 4.

Depress the “MODE” switch. The operation mode is changed in the following order.

FAN

COOL

HEAT

DRY

GROUP

HEAT

SET TEMP.

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of setting "HEAT" operation.

NOTE (1) The above indications show the case of setting operation mode for group 4. The same setting procedure shall be performed for other groups. In case of the same setting for all groups, select the group number of “AA”. (2) Some operation modes can not be set according to the unit model. Contact to HITACHI dealer or your distributor for details. (3) The operation mode can be set while the unit is stopped or in operation.

C. Setting of Temperature, Fan Speed and Louver Angle

NOTE (1) Do not touch the “CHECK” switch. The “CHECK” switch is only for service use. (2) When the “CHECK” switch is depressed by a mistake and the central station is changed to the check mode, depress the “RESET” switch to cancel. 1.

Depress the “GROUP” switch and select the group. (Refer to item 2 of 12.4.8 “A. Group Selection and Monitoring Unit Operation Status”.)

GROUP

COOL

SET TEMP.

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of selected group 4.

<TEMPERATURE> Set temperature by depressing “TEMP” switch. Depressing switch, the temperature is increased by 1oC (Maximum: 30oC) Depressing switch, the temperature is decreased by 1oC (Minimum : 19oC (for “COOL”, “DRY” and “FAN” mode), 17oC (for “HEAT” mode))

GROUP

SET TEMP.

COOL MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

When depressing for 3 seconds at set temperature at 30oC, or depressing for 3 seconds at the minimum temperature, the temperature is not set and the indication of setting temperature is “ - - ”. In this case, depress or , the indication of setting temperature returns to the minimum temperature or 30oC.

The avobe figure shows the case of setting 22oC

NOTE The above shows the setting range for standard model. The setting range may be different according to the connected unit model.

228

<FAN SPEED> Depress the “FAN SPEED” switch. By depressing the “FAN SPEED” switch, the indication is changed in the following order; HIGH

MED

COOL

SET TEMP.

GROUP

HIGH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LOW

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of setting "HIGH" fan speed.

NOTE In case of dry operation, the fan speed is automatically changed and fixed at the LOW fan speed. In this case, the fan speed can not be changed (The indication remains at the setting condition). <LOUVER ANGLE> Depress the “AUTO LOUVER” switch. Every time the “AUTO LOUVER” switch is depressed, the indication of the louver angle is changed. Depress the “AUTO LOUVER” switch at the position

COOL

LOUVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

of , the indication is changed to and this indication indicates the auto-swing. Depress the “AUTO LOUVER” switch again, the indication is

turned to

SET TEMP.

GROUP

HIGH

The above figure shows the case of setting auto-swing.

NOTE (1) The above indications show the case of setting operation mode for group 4. The same setting procedure shall be performed for other groups. In case of the same setting for all groups, select the group number of “AA”. (2) The temperature, fan speed and louver angle can be set while the unit is stopped or in operation. In Case of 4-Way Cassette Type (Example)

LCD Indication Air Louver Angle

Approx. 25o

COOL and DRY

Approx. 30o

Approx. 35o

Recommended Angle

HEAT

Approx. 40o

Approx. 50o

Approx. 55o

Approx. 60o

Angle Range Angle Range

Recommended Angle

NOTE (1) The fixing angle of the louver shown above is the case of 4-way cassette type indoor unit. The fixing angle is different according to unit model. Refer to the operation manual each model for details. (2) There exists a time lag between the indicated louver position on LCD and the actual louver angle in operation. Therefore, when fixing the louver, set the angle according to the indicated louver angle on LCD. (3) When the “AUTO LOUVER” switch is depressed, the louver may not stop immediately. ATTENSION: The louver angle is automatically changed during heating operation for unit control. • When heating operation is started The louver angle When the discharge air temperature is • When dry operation is started

is automatically

increased over 30oC, the louver angle

• When temperature controller is activated

changed.

automatically return to the set position.

The LCD indication remains at the setting condition.

229

D. Unit Operation 1.

Depress the “GROUP” switch and select the group. (Refer to item 2 of 12.4.8 “A. Group Selection and Monitoring Unit Operation Status”.)

SET TEMP.

GROUP

COOL

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of selected group 4.

Depress the “RUN/STOP” switch. In case that the selected group is in operation, the group is stopped by depressing “RUN/STOP” switch. In case that the group is not in operation, the group is started by depressing “RUN/STOP” switch.

Turned ON

COOL

In case of group “AA”, depress the “RUN/STOP” switch, and; a. b.

All the groups are stopped (When more than 1 group is in operation (Run Lamp is ON)). All the groups are started operation (When all the groups are stopped (Run Lamp is OFF)).

SET TEMP.

GROUP

MED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of group 4 operation.

NOTE The above indications show the case of setting operation mode for group 4. The same setting procedure shall be performed for other groups. In case of the simultaneous operation for all groups, select the group number of “AA”.

E. Prohibiting Operation by Remote Control Switch <Function>

To prohibit the operation by the remote control switch. When this function is available, the “CENTRAL” indication appears on the LCD on the remote control switch and the operation by the remote control switch is not available. 1.

Depress the “GROUP” switch and select the group. (Refer to item 2 of 12.4.8 “A. Group Selection and Monitoring Unit Operation Status”.)

SET TEMP.

GROUP

HIGH HEAT LOUVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of selected group 4.

Depress the “RMT. SW NAVAL” switch. Every time the “RMT. SW NAVAL” switch is depressed, the “RMT. SW NAVAL” indication is turned ON and OFF alternately.

Turned ON

GROUP

HIGH

SET TEMP.

HEAT LOUVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RMT.SW NAVAL

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ATTENTION: A. The above indications show the case of setting operation mode for group 4. The same setting procedure shall be performed for other groups. In case of the same setting for all groups, select the group number of “AA”. B. Although the “RMT. SW NAVAL” function is set, in case of operation by the central station, the unit can be stopped by the remote control switch, and in this case, the unit can be started again by the remote control switch. C. For the unit without remote control switch, the “RMT. SW NAVAL” function shall be set. D. In case of using together with other controllers, do not set the “RMT. SW NAVAL” function. Additionally, do not set the “RMT. SW NAVAL” function by other controller or the malfunction may occur. E. In case of no setting of temperature (“ - - ”), the temperature can be set by the remote control switch during the “RMT. SW NAVAL” function is available.

230

F. Timer Operation <Function>

To set the schedule operation “available” or “not available” by the signal from the control timer in case of connection with the control timer (PSC-5T; Option). The schedule operation can be set “available” or “not available” individually for each unit, however, the operation schedule is all the same. 1.

Depress the “GROUP” switch and select the group. (Refer to item 2 of 12.4.8 “A. Group Selection and Monitoring Unit Operation Status”.)

HIGH

SET TEMP.

GROUP

HEAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of selected group 4.

Depress the “TIMER” switch. Every time the “TIMER” switch is depressed, the “TIMER” indication is turned ON and OFF alternately. The group with timer setting is operated according to setting schedule by the signal from the control timer.

Turned ON HIGH

GROUP

SET TEMP.

TIMER

HEAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The above figure shows the case of setting timer operation.

G. Other LCD Indications Indication in Normal Conditions <EMERGENCY>

The “EMERGENCY” is indicated when the emergency stop signal is input by the outside input function. During the emergency stoppage, indoor units are stopped and the operation by the remote control switch is not available.

HIGH

SET TEMP.

GROUP EMERGENCY

COOL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Contact your distributor or dealer of HITACHI for details.

The “DEMAND” is indicated when the demand input is set by the outside input function. The indication is indicated for the group with demand setting and the “DEMAND” indication flickers when the demand signal is input.

HIGH

GROUP

DEMAND

SET TEMP.

COOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

In Case of Demand Setting

Contact your distributor or dealer of HITACHI for details.

Flickers

HIGH

GROUP

DEMAND

SET TEMP.

COOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

In Case of Demand Signal Input

Filter Clogging: When the “FILTER” indication is indicated, it shows that the air filter of the indoor unit is clogged. Clean the air filter. After cleaning, depress the “RESET” switch and the “FILTER” indication is turned OFF.

HIGH COOL

SET TEMP.

GROUP EMERGENCY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FILTER

231

Indication in Abnormal Conditions <ABNORMAL>

II II I II

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Model Code

ABNML

Alarm Code

HIGH COOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I I II I

II I III

Check the contents of the LCD indication and contact your distributor or dealer of HITACHI for details.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I I II I

II II I I I

I.U. Add.

II II II

b. c. d.

Ref. No.

The Run lamp (Red lamp) is flickered when there is a group in abnormal condition. The “ALARM” is indicated on the LCD. The “ ” indication of the group in abnormal condition is flickered. Depress the “GROUP” switch and select the group with alarm, the indication of unit No., model code, alarm code and the normal indication is repeatedly indicated (There is a case that the model code may not be indicated according to the unit model). In case that multiple units are in abnormal conditions, the above indication is indicated by turns.

II II I I

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ABNML

<POWER FAILURE> a. b. c.

All the indications are disappeared. In case of unit stoppage due to the power failure, the unit is not started again after the power recovery. Perform the starting operation again. In case of instant power failure within 2 seconds, the unit is automatically started again.

All the indications are disappeared, and the unit operation may be stopped for the device protection due to the electrical noise. Perform the starting operation again.

232

12.5 7-day Timer : PSC-5T 12.5.1 Installation Work (1) Selection of Installation Place Select a suitable place for handling and determine the installation place of the Timer with the customer’s acceptance. Do not install the Timer at such places as; * Where children can touch * Where the air from the air conditioner is directly discharged (2) Before Installation This packing contains the following parts ([A] to [C]); [A] Control Timer (Q’ty: 1), [B] Screw <M4X16L> (Q’ty: 3, For Fixing the Holding Bracket onto the Wall), [C] Cable <1m> (Q’ty: 1) (For PSC-5S) (3) Installation Space In case of installing the Timers in the vertical line, keep a distance more than 50mm between the Timers vertically. If the distance is insufficient, the front cover of the Timer can not open wide enough. FAN HIGH

SWING LOUVER

ON/OFF TIMER

(b) Attach the Timer to the holding bracket and connect the cable as follows. <In Case of Exposing Remote Control Cable> * Fix the holding bracket onto the wall with screws (accessory). Fix the mounting bracket with the " UP" at the top. Screws (Accessory)

* Select and cut the knockout hole according to the direction for drawing out the cable.

Determine the direction for drawing the cable out according to the cab arrangement and cut out the appropriate knock out hole. (one of the five positions marked with in the diagram. When using the accessory cableuse one of the lower holes.

SET TEMP.

COOL MED HEAT

LOW DEFROST DRY A/C + CENTRAL AUTO VENT H.STRG

ADDS

RN HR

UNIT

NO FUNCTION SERVICE

ABNML

FILTER

T. RUN CHECK

RUN / STOP

TEMP.

More than 50mm FAN HIGH

SWING LOUVER

ON/OFF TIMER

SET TEMP.

* Lead the cable through the groove.

COOL MED HEAT

LOW

DEFROST DRY A/C + CENTRAL AUTO VENT H.STRG

RUN / STOP

ADDS

RN HR

UNIT

NO FUNCTION SERVICE

ABNML

FILTER

T. RUN CHECK

TEMP.

To prevent the cable from being pulled out attach a band to the cable on the inside of the entry hole.

(4) Installation Procedures (a) Insert the edge of the screwdriver into the groove parts at the bottom of the holding bracket, push and turn the screwdriver and remove the Timer from the holding bracket. View from Bottom Grooves

Twist Pair Cable Cable Band (Field-Supplied)

To connect the accessory cable remove the screws then remove the protective cover. Screws

Connector

To prevent the cable from being pulled out attach a band to the cable on the inside of the entry hole. Accessory Cable

Approx. 6mm Grooves

Cable

Hooks Grooves Slotted Screwdriver Slotted Screwdriver

Band (Field-Supplied)

233

* Attach the Timer onto the holding bracket.

* Connect the cable to the connector on PCB or the terminal. Connecting the Accessory Cable 1. To connect the accessory cable remove the screws then remove the protective cover. 2. Connect the cable to the connector. Screws

Step 1: Insert the hooks of the timer into the slots on the upper side of the mounting bracket.

Step 2: Push the lower part of the Timer towards the mounting bracket until you hear a click. Check to ensure that the 4 hooks at the positions marked by are all inserted correctly.

<When Using Switch Box> * Prepare a field-supplied JIS Box (JIS C 8336-1988). The following 5 types are available. 1. Switch Box for 1 Controller (Without Cover) 2. Switch Box for 2 Controllers (Without Cover) 3. Switch Box for 1 Controller (With Cover) 4. Switch Box for 2 Controllers (With Cover) 5. Outlet Box (With Cover)

* Run the cable through the conduit tube in the wall. The cable is not exposed. Run the cable through the conduit tube in the wall and connect the cable inside the switch box. In case of Accessory Cable

* Attach the holding bracket onto the switch box.

Connector

3. Replace the cover and run the cable as shown.

Connecting Twist Pair Cable Connect the cable to the terminals and run the cable as shown

* Attach the Timer onto the holding bracket. Step 1: Insert the hooks of the Timer to the holes at the upper side of the holding bracket.

Step 2: Push the lower part of the Timer toward the holding bracket. Step 3: When a click sound is heard, the Timer is attached to the holding bracket and the mounting work is completed.

Fix the mounting bracket with the " UP" at the top. Screws

234

Pay attention so that the cable may be not be slack. If the cable is slack as shown in the above figure, the cable cord (especially the naked part) may be clamped at the hole and it may cause a faulty operation.

12.5.2 Electrical Wiring Use this Timer with Remote Control Switch or Central Station.

Use the shielded twist pair cable (1P-0.75mm2) as a transmitting wire cable for prevention of the malfunction. Keep a distance more than 30cm between the remote control cable and the transmission wire of indoor units. (1) In case of using Timer with PSC-5S (Central Station) PSC-5T

Connector

PSC-5S

CN1

* Up to 8 units of Central Station (PSC-5S) and Timer (PSC-5T) can be connected to the H-LINK system. * 1 (one) Timer can control 1 (one) Central Station and plural Central Stations can not be controlled by 1 (one) Timer.

TB2 Power Supply: AC220V or 240V

Accessory Cable (1m) To Other Shielded Twist Pair Cable 1P-0.75mm2 Central Stations (Max. 1,000m)

Available for H-LINK Connection (To be connected to the terminal boards "1" and "2" of indoor unit or outdoor unit)

H-LINK

235

12.5.3 Setting of Dip Switch Set the two dip switches on the PCB as follows. (The factory-settings for dip switches of DSW1 and DSW2 and all OFF.)

DSW1 DSW2

â&#x20AC;˘ Dip Switch Setting Pin DSW1

DSW2

No. 1 2 3 4

3 4

DSW Setting

Contents of Setting For Address Setting

OFF ON Refer to the table below.

For Other Controller Used Together Setting for prohibition of remote control operation after stopping at OFF TIME For Other Controller Used Together Not Used Not Used

Except for PC-AR

PC-AR

Setting is not available.

Setting is available.

PSC-5S

Except for PSC-5S

Remarks Setting is required only when the central station (PSC-5S) is used together. Set the address of the central station to be controlled. Set #4 pin ON when the remote control switch (PC-AR) is used together. Remote control operation is not available after stopping at OFF TIME. Remote control operation is available again at ON TIME while stopping. (This setting is available only when the remote control switch (PC-AR ) or the central station PSC-5S) is used together.) Set #2 pin according to the other controller used together. Do not change the setting (#3 pin: OFF). Do not change the setting (#4 pin: OFF).

â&#x20AC;˘ Setting of DSW1 (For Address Setting) Address Setting of DSW1

1 ON OFF

236

ON OFF 1 2 3 4

ON OFF

ON OFF 1 2 3 4

7 ON OFF

1 2 3 4

6 ON OFF

1 2 3 4

Address Setting of DSW1

8 ON OFF

1 2 3 4

12.5.4 Switch Names and Functions

Indication of Mode Selection Indication of Holiday Setting

Indication of Pattern Setting Indication of Present Time

Indication of ON/OFF Setting Time *Setting 1, Setting 2 and Setting 3 <from above>

Indication of Present Day Indication of Running Day of A Week

SET

HOLI PM

Run Indicator (Red Lamp)

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

ON TIME

OFF TIME

AM PM

SET/MONITOR

Change Switch of Operation Setting Switch of Holiday

A/B

PRESENT

HOLIDAY

DA Y

HOUR MINUTE

ON/OFF TIME

RUN DAY

CA NCE L SELECT

Change Switch of Setting Pattern

Setting Switch of ON/OFF Time

OK Switch

Cancel Switch of Setting Time

Setting Switch of Present Time Setting Switch of Day of A Week

Setting Switch of Running Day

Change Switch of Setting

Change Switch of ON/OFF Setting

Open the cover by pulling toward the arrow direction.

237

12.5.5 Operation Procedure A. Setting Present Day and Present Time ATTENTION: During the setting mode, the setting of the present time is not available when depressing the “PRESENT” switch more than 3 seconds. <Example> Condition / Present Day: Friday, Present Time : 5:15PM 1. Supply power to the unit. A

ON TIME

OFF TIME

ATTENTION: (1) Supply power to the unit more than 12 hours before unit operation for compressor protection. (2) Do not cut off power during the term of using air conditioner.

2. Depress the “PRESENT” switch for more than 3 seconds. The display is changed to the present time setting mode, and the “SET” indicator and “ ” mark are flashed.

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of present time at AM 0:00 on Sunday. (When the power is turned ON, the present time is not set.) Flas h in g

SET AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case that ON time and OFF time are not set.

3. Set the “ ” mark at the present day by depressing the “DAY” switch. Depress the “OK” switch after setting the present day, the “ ” mark is turned on and the “hour” indication is flashed.

Flashing

Tur ned ON

S ET AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of setting the day at “Friday”.

4. Set “hour” indication at the present hour by depressing the “HOUR/MINUTE” switch. Depress the “OK” switch after setting the present hour, “hour” indication is turned on and “minute” indication is flashed.

Fla s hin g

Tur ne d ON

SE T

Fla s hin g

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of setting the hour at “PM5”.

5. Set the “minute” indication at the present minute by depressing the “HOUR/MINUTE” switch. Depress the “OK” switch after setting the present minute, the present day and the present time are fixed, and the present time setting mode is changed to the monitor mode. “minute” indication is turned on and the “SET” indication is turned off.

238

Tur ne d OFF

Tur ne d ON

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of setting the minute at “15”.

B. Changing Weekly Schedule Pattern (A or B) There are 2 (two) patterns (A or B) set for the weekly schedule. Each pattern can be set with 3 (three) times ON/OFF settings for each weekly day. <Function> To select the pattern for setting and operating the schedule The schedule of A or B pattern can be set for each week and changed for a season. 1. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The control timer is changed to the setting mode and the “SET” indication is turned on.

Tur ned ON

Flashing

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

2. Depress the “A/B” switch. The set pattern is changed (“A” <=> “B”) by depressing the “A/B” switch.

ON TIME

SET

Tur ned ON

SET

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of selecting the set pattern “B”.

3. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The “SET” mode is turned off and the setting mode is changed to the monitor mode.

Tur ne d OFF

Tur ne d ON

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

C. Setting ON/OFF Time ATTENTION: In case that the central station (PSC-5S) is used together, the setting of ON TIME (or OFF TIME) only is available. <Example> “A” Pattern, Friday, Setting 2, PM1:00 (ON) / PM5:00 (OFF) 1. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The control timer is changed to the setting mode and the “SET” indication is turned on and the “ ” mark are flashed.

Tur n e d ON

Flashing

S E T AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of changing to the setting mode.

2. Select the “A” or “B” pattern by depressing the “A/B” switch. Refer to “B. Changing Weekly Schedule Pattern A or B” for changing the pattern.

Flashing

S E T AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

239

3. Select the weekly day to set ON/OFF control by depressing Flashing the “DAY” switch. By depressing the “DAY” switch, the flashing “ ” mark A ON TIME OFF TIME SET AM moves in order of “Sun => Mon => ... => Sat”. Depressing the “DAY” switch after “Sat”, all the “ ” marks (from “Sun” Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat to “Sat”) are flashed. In this case, the setting is the same for all days of a week. Depressing the “DAY” switch once The above figure shows the case of selecting again, the flashing “ ” mark returns to the position of the day “Friday”. The flashing “ ” mark of “Sun”. the present day is turned ON. (In case of selecting the present day, the “ ” mark flashes.)

4. Depress the “ON/OFF TIME” switch. The Timer is changed to the ON/OFF time setting mode and the “hour” indication of ON TIME is flashed.

Flashing

S ET AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of changing to the ON/OFF time setting mode.

5. Select the setting 1, 2 or 3 by depressing the “ SELECT ” switch. By depressing the “ SELECT ” switch, the “hour” indication moves flashing.

Flashing

S ET AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of selecting the setting 2.

6. Set the “hour” indication of ON TIME by depressing the “HOUR/MINUTE” switch. After setting the “hour” indication, depress the “OK” switch and “minute” indication of ON TIME to be set is flashed.

Flashing

S E T AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

The above figure shows the case of setting the hour at “PM1”.

7. Set the “minute” indication of ON TIME by depressing the “HOUR/MINUTE” switch. After setting the “minute” indication, depress the “OK” switch and “hour” indication of OFF TIME to be set is flashed.

Fla s hin g

SE T AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

The above figure shows the case of setting the time “PM1:00”.

8. Set the time of “OFF TIME” by the same procedure of setting the time of “ON TIME”. After setting the time of “OFF TIME”, the flashing indication of “OFF TIME” is turned on and the ON/OFF time setting mode is changed to the setting mode.

Fla s hin g

SE T AM

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

The above figure shows the case of setting the OFF time “PM5:00”.

240

9. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The “SET” indication is turned off and the control timer is changed to the monitor mode.

Tu r ne d O FF

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of indicating the setting condition of the present day.

ATTENTION: A. Depress the “CANCEL” switch when setting ON time (procedure 6) or OFF time (procedure 8), the indication of ON TIME or OFF TIME is changing to “- : - -”. Depressing the “OK” switch in this condition, the setting is canceled. B. In case of using the Timer together with other controller than the remote control switch (PC-AR) and the central station (PSC-5S), the setting of ON time and OFF time is required. D. Setting Running Day <Function> To set the day for actual operation of the running schedule set in item 12.5.5-A, B and C. (Though the ON time and OFF time are set, the schedule operation is not available unless the running day is set.) <Example> “B” Pattern, Tuesday 1. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The Timer is changed to the setting mode and the “SET” indication is turned on and the “ ” mark are flashed.

Tu r ned ON

Flashing

ON TIME

SET

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

2. Select the “A” or “B” pattern by depressing the “A/B” switch.

Flashing

Tur ned ON

S ET

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of selecting the set pattern “B”.

3. Select the running day by depressing the “DAY” switch. Refer to item 3 of 12.5.5 “C. Setting ON/OFF Time” for the indication of the “ ” mark.

Tu r ned O N

Flas h in g

SET PM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

AM PM

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

The above figure shows the case of selecting the day “Tuesday”.

4. Depress the “RUN DAY” switch, the selected day is set as the running day and the “ ” mark is turned on at the selected day. By depressing the “RUN DAY” switch again, the running day setting is canceled the “ ” mark is turned off.

Flashi ng

Tu r ne d ON

SET PM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

AM PM

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

The above figure shows the case of selecting the day “Tuesday”.

241

5. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The “SET” indication is turned off and the Timer is changed to the monitor mode.

Tu r ne d OFF

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

E. Setting Holiday <Function> To cancel the running schedule temporarily The schedule operation is canceled only once at the day set as “holiday”. After that, the schedule operation is available again. This function is used in case that there are any irregular holidays. <Example> “B” Pattern, Tuesday 1. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The Timer is changed to the setting mode and the “SET” indication is turned on and the “ ” mark are flashed.

Tu r ned O N

Flas h in g

ON TIME

SET

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

2. Select the “A” or “B” pattern by depressing the “A/B” switch.

Tu r ne d ON

S ET

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of selecting the set pattern “B”.

3. Select the day to be set as “holiday” by depressing the “DAY” switch. Refer to item 3 of 12.5.5 “C. Setting ON/OFF Time” for the indication of the “ ” mark.

F las h i ng

S ET

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of selecting the day “Tuesday”.

4. Depress the “HOLIDAY” switch, the “HOLI” indication is turned on and selected day is set as “holiday”. In case that the selected day is not set as running day (the “ ” mark is turned off), the holiday setting is not available for the day. (In case that all days of a week are selected, only the running day is set as “holiday”.) By depressing the “HOLIDAY”switch again, the holiday setting is canceled.

242

Tu r ne d ON

S ET HOLI PM

F las h i ng

ON TIME

OFF TIME

AM PM

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat PM

Tu r ne d O FF

5. Depress the “SET/MONITOR” switch. The “SET” indication is turned off and the Timer is changed to the monitor mode.

Tur ne d OFF

Tur ne d ON

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

ATTENTION: In case of setting the present day as “holiday”, the “holiday” setting is available from that time and the schedule operation is canceled until the next day. In that case, the same day after a week is not “holiday”. F. Setting Mode Confirmation Depress the “DAY” switch at the monitor mode (when the “SET” indication is turned off), the “ ” mark moves and the setting contents of the day with the “ ” mark is flashed.

Fla s hin g

ON TIME

OFF TIME

Sun Mon TueWed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of selecting the day “Tuesday”.

G. Setting Timer Cancellation <Function> To cancel the scheduled operation When the scheduled operation is to be OFF, “ON TIME” setting is canceled. This function is for use when scheduled operation is to be OFF for a long time e.g. for more than a week. <Setting Procedure> Press the “HOLIDAY” switch for three seconds when in monitor mode. Holiday indication “HOLI” flashes ON and OFF for two seconds.

Holiday indication "HOLI" flashes ON and OFF for two seconds. ON TIME

OFF TIME

HOLI

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

The above figure shows the case of setting timer cancellation.

The timer cancellation remains OFF at the present day of setup and will come ON from the following day. The scheduled operation will remain OFF until the cancellation mode is reset. When using PC-AR, PSC-5S the timer cancellation will override any other settings of the unit. It is not possible to operate the unit from the remote control switch because the unit is effectively in OFF time setting. Depressing the “HOLIDAY” switch for three seconds when setting the other mode, the timer cancellation cannot be operated. In the timer cancellation mode all other switches except for the “HOLIDAY” switch are disabled. If another function is required, first reset the timer cancellation mode. The timer cancellation mode will override the holiday mode if both are set at the same time. <Cancellation Procedure> Press the “HOLIDAY” switch for three seconds during the timer cancellation mode. The switch returns the monitor mode.

Holiday indication "HOLI" is turned OFF. AM

ON TIME

OFF TIME

HOLI

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

If the timer cancellation mode is reset, the unit will return to the current settings of ON or OFF according to the timer setting. If the current setting is holiday, the flashing “HOLI” indication stops flashing and remain ON. 243

The control timer has a built-in back-up battery and the clock function is available within 2 weeks in case of the power failure. If the power failure continues more than 2 weeks, set the present time again. The RUN indicator is turned on at ON time and turned off at OFF time. In case that the indoor unit operation is started or stopped by the remote control switch or the central station used together with the Timer, the RUN indicator is not changed. The flashing of the RUN indicator shows the abnormal condition of the Timer. Check to ensure that the wiring connection and the setting of dip switches are correct. In case that the RUN indicator is still flashed after checking, contact your distributor or dealer of HITACHI. It may take approximately 15 seconds to start (or stop) operation after ON time (or OFF time) according to the controller used together. The operation can not be started or stopped during the setting mode condition. After the completion of setting, set the Timer at the monitor mode. (After 3 minutes with leaving the Timer at the setting mode, the Timer is changed to the monitor mode automatically.) In case that the Timer is used with the central station (PSC-5S), the setting by the central station is required. Refer to the â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installation & Operation Manual of Central Stationâ&#x20AC;? for details.

244

13. Total Heat Exchanger 13.1 Safety Summary

Do not perform installation work and electrical wiring connection without referring to the installation manual. Check that the ground wire is securely connected. Connect a fuse of specified capacity.

Do not install the unit, remote control switch and cable within approximately 3 meters from strong electromagnetic wave radiators such as medical equipment.

13.2 Structure 13.2.1 Indoor Unit

EA and OA ducts are applicable from this side Damper Plate Suspension Bracket (4-13x30)

Air Exhaust Fan

EA (Exhaust Air) (Standard Position)

RA (Return Air)

OA (Outside Air) (Standard Position)

SA (Supply Air)

Power Cord Opening

Air Supply Fan

Service Space

Service Panel Position

Electrical Control Box Service Cover

Suspension Bracket

Air Filter K

Heat Exchange Element

Model KPI-2521 KPI-5021 KPI-8021 KPI-10021

Outer Dimension A 735 1,016 1,004 1,231

B 780 888 1,164 1,164

C 275 317 398 398

for Suspension Bolt D E 765 700 1,048 790 1,036 1,030 1,263 1,030

Duct F 530 745 690 920

Duct Diameter G 63 79 79 79

H 142 192 242 242

J 160 208 258 258

(mm) Duct (Direction Change) K 102 124 149 149

Fig. 13.1 Example of Installation 13.2.2 Necessary Tools and Instrument List for Installation N o. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Tool Handsaw Philips Screwdriver Megohmmeter Hexagon Wrench Spanner Cutter for Wires

No. 7 8 9 10 11

Tool Leveller Clamper for Solderless Terminals Hoist (for Unit) Ammeter Voltage Meter

245

13.3 Transportation and Handling 13.3.1 Transportation Transport the product as close to the installation location as practical before unpacking.

13.4.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed with the unit.

NOTE If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit, please contact your contractor.

Do not put any material on the product. Table 13.1 Factory-Supplied Accessories 13.3.2 Handling of Unit

Accessory

Appearance

Flange

Do not put any foreign material into the unit and check to ensure that none exists in the unit before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure, etc. may occur.

Be careful not to damage on insulation materials of unit’s surface when lifting.

13.4 Installation

Do not install the unit in a flammable environment to avoid fire or an explosion.

Screw (M4-8)

Q'ty 4 (Double-Flanges at SA and EA Sides) 16

13.4.2 Initial Check • Install the unit with a proper clearance around it for operation and maintenance working space, as shown in Fig. 13.2.

EA (Exhaust Air) (Standard Position)

RA (Return Air)

OA (Outside Air) (Standard Position)

SA (Supply Air)

Service Space

Electrical Control Box Service Cover

Check to ensure that the ceiling is strong enough and that the false ceiling is flat and level. Do not install the unit outdoors. If installed outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will occur.

246

Service Panel Position (450 x 450 - 600 x 600mm)

Fig. 13.2 Operation and Maintenance Space • Consider the air distribution from the unit to the space of the room, and select a suitable location so that uniform air temperature in the room can be obtained. • Avoid obstacles which may hamper the air intake or the air discharge flow. • Do not install the unit in a machinery shop or kitchen where vapor from oil or its mist flows to the unit. The oil will deposit on the heat exchanger, thereby reducing the unit performance, and may deform and in the worst case, break the plastic parts of the unit.

In such a case, heat the A (Outdoor Air) up to the A’ point and make the condition that the line connecting the protted points of the outdoor indoor temperature and humidity conditions does not cross the saturation curve, and the total heat exchanger can be used. * The heating method for the A (Outdoor Air) must be determined according to the local codes, etc. Saturation Curve

Absolute Humidity (kg/kg)

• Do not install this product at such places as * where the hot springs are near (in a sulfuric environment) * where generation, flowing, staying or leaking of flammable gas is detected. * where the sea is near (in the salty environment). * refrigerant warehouse, heated swimming pool or other location where the temperature and humidity are significantly different. * where it will be directly exposed to the rain. • Pay attention to the following points when the unit is installed in a hospital or other facilities where there are electronic waves from medical equipment. (A) Do not install the unit where the electromagnetic wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote control cable or remote control switch. (B) Install the unit and components as far as practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiator. (C) Prepare a steel box and install the remote control switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the remote control cable in it. Then, connect the ground wire with the box and the tube. (D) Install a noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises. • To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers, do not install the unit in an acid or alkaline environment. • Select a position for introducing the outside air where no exhaust or combustion gases will be sucked into the product and where it will not be covered by snow. • Do not use this product at the cold are during winter time, with the environmental condition that dewing may occur in the heat exchange element (the case that the line connecting the protted points of the outdoor/indoor temperature and humidity conditions crosses the saturation curve on the psychometric diagram).

B C C' A

A' Dry Bulb (oC)

The limit of the environmental conditions for using the total heat exchanger are shown in the table below as an example, at the outdoor air temperature 0oC, -5oC and -10oC with the indoor air temperature 30oC. In case that the indoor air humidity is higher than this condition or the outdoor air humidity is extremely high, dewing may occur. The dew may grow up to the drop and the water may flow out of the unit.

Outdoor Air Indoor Air Temperature Temperature (DB)

(DB)

Indoor Air Relative Humidity (%)

Indoor Air Absolute Humidity (kg/kg)

0oC

30oC

0.0125

-5oC

30oC

0.0105

-10oC

30oC

0.009

247

13.4.3 Suspension Bolts Step 1 Select final location and installation direction of the unit paying careful attention to the space for the piping, wiring and maintenance. Mounting Screw

Step 2 Mount suspension bolts, as shown in Fig. 13.3.

Duct Connecting Flange

Fig. 13.4 Attaching the Flanges * For Concrete Slab 150 to 160mm

Concrete Steel Sling Bolt

* For Steel Beam

Before attaching the duct connecting flanges, check that no foreign matter (scraps of paper, vinyl, etc.) has found its way inside the main unit. Attach the duct connecting flanges with the packing at the SA and RA sides. (3) Mounting of the Unit (a) Preparing the Sling Bolts

I Beam Suspension Bolt (W1/2 or M12)

Nut*

* For Wooden Beam Suspension Wooden Bar (60 to 90mm Square)

Nut

Nut Wooden Beam

Sling Bolt (M12)*

Washer* Square Washer

Square Washer Suspension Bolt (W1/2 or M12)

Fig. 13.3 Mounting of Suspension Bolts 13.4.4 Installation (1) Marking of the Positions of the Sling Bolts and Piping Connections (a) Mark the positions of the sling bolts, and drain connection. (b) Installation dimensions are shown in Fig. 13.1. (2) Attaching the Duct Connecting Flanges Use the screws supplied to secure the duct connecting flanges to the unit.

Nut*

* : Field-Supplied

Fig. 13.5 Nuts (b) Hanging the Unit â&#x20AC;˘ Hang the suspension bracket on the anchor bolts and adjust in such a way that the unit is installed horizontally. â&#x20AC;˘ Tighten up securely using double nuts in order to prevent looseness. Sling Bolt

Nut Washer

Unit

Suspension Bracket

Fig. 13.6 Hanging Method

When suspending the main unit from the ceiling, do not handle it in such a way that force will be applied to the control box. 248

NOTE In case of that the sling bolts are too short, reattach the suspension bracket in an alternative position. (1) Remove the screws at the top mounting position. (2) Remove the suspension bracket and attach them at higher mounting position. (3) Tighten up the screws in the screw hole where the suspension brackets were removed in order to prevent air leaks.

Heat-insulating Material

Aluminum Tape

Unit Outdoor Duct

Duct Connecting Flange

Suspension Bracket Remove and Tighten up

Tighten up screws to original position.

Fig. 13.7 Changing Position of Suspension Bracket (4) Connecting Supply Duct The supply duct should be connected with the unit through flexible duct, in order to avoid abnormal sounds and vibration. The unit is equipped with a pre-drilled duct flange for the supply duct connection. (a) Fit the ducts securely into the duct connecting flanges, and wind aluminum tape (field-supplied) around them to prevent air leaks. (b) Suspend the ducts from the ceiling so that their weight will not be applied to the unit. (c) The two outdoor ducts must be covered with heat-insulating material in order to prevent condensation from forming.

Fig. 13.9 Insulation

Before connecting the ducts, check that no sawdust or any other foreign matter (scraps of paper, vinyl, etc.) has found its way inside the ducts. Do not touch the damper plate inside the main unit when connecting the ducts. Do not install the ducts in the ways illustrated below. Doing so will reduce the air volume and give rise to abnormal sounds.

*Extremely Sharp Bends

*Multiple Bends

*Extreme Reduction in the *Bends Right Next to the Outlet Diameter of the Connected Ducts

Duct

Taping

Fig. 13.8 Connecting the Duct 249

(5) Example of Installation The example of installation is shown in Fig. 13.10. Service Space

*EA and OA ducts are applicable from this side. Return Air Grille

Service Access Panel OA Unit

EA (Exhaust Air Outlet)

Unit

OA (Out Side Air Intake) Service Space

This unit can also be installed upside down. Remove the service cover, rotate the unit by 180o, and re-install.

Supply Air Grille

Model

Service Access Panel

Distance

KPI-2521 to 5021 KPI-8021, 10021

Min. 1m Min. 2.5m

Downward Gradient of Duct:

1/30 or more (toward wall side) and provision of distance in table above (to prevent rain water from seeping in)

Sling Bolt

Supply Air Grille

Return Grille Electrical Damper

(to prevent cold air from entering in (winter season))

Deep Food

(to prevent rain water from seeping in)

Unit

OA OA

EA Duct

Service Access Panel

(450x450 - 600x600mm)

Fig. 13.10 Example of Installation 240V 12V

13.5 Electrical Wiring

12V CN27 CN28

Turn OFF the main power switch to the unit and wait for more than 3 minutes before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Check to ensure that the fan have stopped before electrical wiring work or a periodical check is performed. Protect the wires, electrical parts, etc. from rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats may gnaw at unprotected parts and at the worst, a fire will occur. Check the item below before turning ON the main switch. In case that the power source for unit is 240V (nominal voltage), change CN28 (connector) to CN27 of transformer (TF) in the electrical control box as shown in Fig. 13.11. 250

PCB1 (P)

PCN1

Fig. 13.11 Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transformer (TF)

Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to protect the product from any condensate water or insects. Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the unit. Secure the cable of the remote control switch using the cord clamp inside the electrical box.

13.5.1 General Check (1) Make sure that the field-selected electrical components (main power switches, circuit breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire terminals) have been properly selected. Make sure that the components comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). (2) Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +10% of the rated voltage. (3) Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power source capacity is too low, the system cannot be started due to the voltage drop. (4) Check to ensure that the ground wire is connected. (5) Power Source Main Switch Install a multi-pole main switch with a space of 3.5mm or more between each phase. 13.5.2 Electrical Wiring Connection The electrical wiring connection for the unit is shown in Fig. 13.13.

(1) Cut out the center of the rubber bushing in the wiring connection hole, as shown in Fig. 13.12. Cut Inside

Rubber Bushing

Fig. 13.12 Rubber Bushing (2) Connect the cable of an optional remote control switch or an optional extension cable to the connectors on the printed circuit board inside the electrical box through the connecting hole in the cabinet. (3) Connect the power supply and earth wires to the terminals in the electrical box. (4) Tightly clamp the wires using the cord clamp inside the electrical box. (5) Seal the wiring connection hole after running the cables with the seal material to protect the unit from condensate water or insects. (6) In the case that the power cables are connected in series, check the amount of current is less than 50A.

Field Minimum Wire Sizes for Power Source Model

Maximum

Power Source

Power Source Cable Size

Current

EN60 335-1 *1

MLFC *2

KPI-2521

1φ, 220-240/220V, 50/60Hz

0.75mm

0.5mm

KPI-5021

1φ, 220-240/220V, 50/60Hz

0.5mm

KPI-8021

0.75mm

KPI-10021 *50

1φ, 220-240V, 50Hz

KPI-10021 *60

1φ, 220V, 60Hz

0.75mm 2

0.5mm2

0.75mm 2

0.5mm2

0.75mm 2

0.5mm2

NOTE 1) Follow local codes and regulations when selecting field wires. 2) The above wire sizes marked with *1 are selected at the maximum current of the unit according to the European Standard, EN60 335-1. 3) The above wire sizes marked with *2 are selected at the maximum current of the unit according to the wire, MLFC (Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire) manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd., Japan. 4) Use a shielded cable and connect it to ground. 5) In the case that power cables are connected in series, add each unit maximum current and select wires below. Selection According to EN60 335-1 Selection According to MLFC (at Cable Temperature of 60°C) Current i (A) Wire Size (mm2) Current i (A) Wire Size (mm2) i≤6 0.75 i ≤ 15 0.5 6 < i ≤ 10 1 15 < i ≤ 18 0.75 10 < i ≤ 16 1.5 18 < i ≤ 24 1.25 16 < i ≤ 25 2.5 24 < i ≤ 34 2 *3: In the case that 25 < i ≤ 32 4 34 < i ≤ 47 3.5 current exceeds 63A, 32 < i ≤ 40 6 47 < i ≤ 62 5.5 do not connect cables 40 < i ≤ 63 10 62 < i ≤ 78 8 in series. 63 < i *3 78 < i ≤ 112 14 112 < i ≤ 147 22 251

System Description Example of system is as follows.

NOTE Ventilation Mode Bypass Ventilation Mode Air returned from the indoor side is exhausted without heat exchange.

Total Heat Exchange Mode Air returned from the indoor side passes through the total heat exchange element and is exhausted outdoor. Heat exchanged outdoor air is supplied.

Damper

Return Air

Exhaust Air

Return Air

Exhaust Air

Supply Air

Flesh Air

Supply Air

Flesh Air

Total Heat Exchange Element

Automatic Choice Mode (Setting before Shipment) Operation mode is automatically selected according to the temperature (outdoor, indoor and set temp.) conditions.

Total Heat Exchange Element

Table 13.2 Standard System (a)

(b)

Standard Connection

(c)

Example of Systems Set-Free PC-AR

PC-AR

T.H.E. + PC-AR

Outlook of Systems

Able to control up to 16 Indoor Unit and Total Heat Exchanger Units

Able to Control with PC-AR Directory

Component of Systems

Remote Control Switch (PC-AR)

PC-AR

Remote Control Switch Setting of Remote Control Switch

PC-AR A/C+ VENTI

A/C

VENTI

A/C+ VENTI

A/C

VENTI (*1)

VENTI

−

A/C

RUN/ STOP

Function

PC-AR

Utopia

T.H.E. A/C

FAN SPEED

T.H.E.

VENTI MODE

T.H.E. Mode

Auto Bypass Ventilation

Pre-Cool Pre-Heat

−

Air Volume Up Filter Sign

: Indoor Unit

: Total Heat Exchanger

252

: Available : Not Available T.H.E. : Total Heat Exchanger Unit : Ventilation Mode (The above “NOTE” is shown in details.)

NOTE: (*1): In case of using Remote Control ON/OFF Function (Optional Function), it is applicable for “A/C + VENTI mode” only.

Table 13.3 Controlled Network System Central Station (PSC-5S) (*5) (d)

PC-AR

Example of Systems

: Indoor Unit

H-LINK

: Total Heat Exchanger

PC-AR

Able to Control Up to 128 Indoor Unit Consists of 16 Refrigeration Series Central Station(PSC-5S) Remote Control Switch (PC-AR)

Outlook of Systems

Component of Systems Remote Control Switch Setting of Remote Control Switch

Central Station A/C+ VENTI

: Available : Not Available T.H.E. : Total Heat Exchanger Unit NOTES: (*1): Settable by Remote Control Switch. (*2): Set the unit number of all indoor unit respectively and serially by using RSW and DSW5 (Indoor Unit). (*3): In case of H-LINK, set one refrigeration number to each Total Heat Exchanger. (*4): In case of CS-NET, impossible to operate “AUTO COOL/HEAT”. (*5): In case of using Remote Control ON/OFF Function (optional function), it is applicable for “A/C + VENTI mode” only.

PC-AR A/C+ VENTI

A/C

RUN/ STOP

T.H.E.

FAN SPEED Function

PSC-5S

VENTI MODE

A/C T.H.E. Auto T.H.E. Mode

(*1)

Bypass Ventilation

Pre-Cool Pre-Heat

(*1)

Air Volume Up

(*1)

Filter Sign

Hitachi Computer Controlled Network System CS-NET (*4) (*5) (f)

(e)

PC-AR

Example of Systems

PC-AR

Outlook of Systems

CS-NET Remote Control Switch (PC-AR)

Remote Control Switch

PC-AR

H-LINK

CS-NET

CS-NET A/C+ VENTI

A/C

CS-NET Remote Control Switch (PC-AR)

PC-AR VENTI

A/C+ VENTI

A/C

VENTI

CS-NET

PS-AR

VENTI

A/C

RUN/ STOP

T.H.E.

FAN SPEED Function

PC-AR

CS-NET

PC-AR

Able to Control Up to 128 Indoor Unit Consists of 16 Refrigeration Series

Component of Systems

Setting of Remote Control Switch

PC-AR

H-LINK

VENTI MODE

A/C T.H.E. Auto (*1)

(*1)

Pre-Cool Pre-Heat

(*1)

−

Air Volume Up

(*1)

T.H.E. Mode

(*1)

Bypass Ventilation −

−

(*1)

Filter Sign

253

Electrical Wiring Connection (This numbers ((a)~(f)) are correspond to the numbers of Table 13.2 and Table 13.3.) (a) Simultaneous Operation (Set-Free + Total Heat Exchanger) Power Supply

Power Supply

No setting is required.

TB1

TB2 1 2 A B

B C DE

F 01

DSW5

F 01

No setting is required.

34 56

TB1

RSW 2

No setting is required.

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

34 56

RSW 2

F 01

34 56

TB1

Indoor Unit

DSW5

Indoor Unit RSW

Power Supply

CN12

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Fig. 13.13 Electrical Wiring Connection (1) (b) Simultaneous Operation (Utopia + Total Heat Exchanger) Power Supply

Power Supply

TB1

TB2 1 2 A B

B C DE

No setting is required.

DSW5

F 01

B C DE

F 01

No setting is required.

34 56

TB1

RSW 2

No setting is required.

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

34 56

RSW 2

F 01

34 56

TB1

Indoor Unit

DSW5

Indoor Unit RSW

Power Supply

CN12

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Fig. 13.14 Electrical Wiring Connection (2) (c) Total Heat Exchanger + PC-AR Directly Power Supply

Total Heat Exchanger DSW5

F 01

No setting is required.

3456

TB1

B C DE

RSW

CN12

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Fig. 13.15 Electrical Wiring Connection (3)

NOTE • Set the number by using the rotary switch (RSW) on the PCB in the indoor units and the total heat exchanger. • Firstly set the unit number for the indoor unit and secondly set the unit number of the total heat exchanger. The unit number of the total heat exchanger should be larger than the unit number of the indoor unit. 254

(d) Controlled Network System (PSC-5S, H-LINK) Power Supply Outdoor Unit

Power Supply

TB2

B C DE

TB2

1 2 A B

PSC-5S

TB1

B C DE

Setting is required.

CN12

1 2 A B

DSW5 Setting is required.

F 01

3456

RSW 2

3456

TB1

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

F 01

RSW Setting is required.

3456

TB1

Indoor Unit

DSW5

F 01

Indoor Unit RSW

Power Supply

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Power Supply

TB2

1 2 A B

B C DE

CN12

1 2 A B

DSW5 Setting is required.

F 01

B C DE

TB2

TB1

3456

Setting is required.

F 01

RSW 2

3456

TB1

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

RSW Setting is required.

F 01

3456

TB1

Indoor Unit

DSW5

Indoor Unit RSW

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Fig. 13.16 Electrical Wiring Connection (4) (e) Controlled Network System (CS-NET, H-LINK(1)) Power Supply Outdoor Unit

Power Supply

TB2

1 2 A B

B C DE

Setting is required. CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR Power Supply

Power Supply

TB2

Setting is required.

TB1

TB2

1 2 A B

B C DE

TB1

RSW

DSW5 Setting is required.

F 01

3456

Setting is required.

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

F 01

RSW 3456

3456

Indoor Unit

DSW5

F 01

Indoor Unit RSW

Power Supply

TB1

CN12

1 2 A B

DSW5

F 01

CS-NET (P/C)

B C DE

TB2

TB1

3456

Setting is required.

F 01

RSW 2

3456

TB1

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

RSW Setting is required.

F 01

3456

TB1

Indoor Unit

DSW5

Indoor Unit RSW

Power Supply

CN12

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Fig. 13.17 Electrical Wiring Connection (5)

NOTE • In case of controlled (a), (b), (d) and (e) systems, it is impossible to operate the total heat exchanger individually. • Set the number of all units respectively and serially by using RSW and DSW5 (Indoor Unit). • Setting of the number of the total heat exchanger should be larger than the number of the indoor unit. • In case of H-LINK, set one refrigeration number to each Total Heat Exchanger. 255

(f) Controlled Network System (CS-NET, H-LINK (2)) Power Supply Outdoor Unit

Power Supply

CN12

1 2 A B

DSW5 Setting is required.

F 01

CN13

Power Supply

TB2

TB1

TB2

1 2 A B

PC-AR

B C DE

Setting is required.

B C DE

DSW5 Setting is required.

F 01

3 4 56

TB1

RSW 2

Setting is required.

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

F 01

RSW 3 4 56

3 4 56

Indoor Unit

DSW5

F 01

Indoor Unit RSW

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Power Supply

TB1

B C DE

TB2

1 2 A B

CS-NET (P/C)

TB2

TB1

3 4 56

Setting is required.

F 01

RSW 2

3 4 56

TB1

Total Heat Exchanger

DSW5

RSW Setting is required.

F 01

3 4 56

TB1

Indoor Unit

DSW5

Indoor Unit RSW

Power Supply

CN12

CN13

TB2 1 2 A B

PC-AR

Fig. 13.18 Electrical Wiring Connection (6)

256

13.5.3 Setting of Dip Switches The setting of dip switches is shown on the label of the electrical box cover.

13.6 Test Run

Turn OFF all power sources before setting the dip switches. Without turning OFF, the switches would not work and the contents of setting would be invalid.

13.7 Safety and Control Device Setting Model

KPI-2521

KPI-5021

KPI-8021

KPI-10021

For Evaporator Fan Motor Thermostat

Cut-In

145

133

157

Cut-Out

- (*)

Fuse Capacity

(*): Thermostat of fan motor can not Cut-In automatically. If that cuts out, change the fan motor.

257

258

259

- CONTENTS <Common> Items

Page

261 261 262 264 266 266 266 268 274 281 284 286 288

260

1. 1.1

Maintenance Regular Inspection

The unit should be periodically inspected according to the same items as those described in the chapter “8. Test Run”. In order to ensure dependable operation and long life, the following additional items should be given as particular attention. (1) For Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit (a) Fan and Fan Motor • Lubrication - All fan motors are pre-lubricated and sealed at the factory. Therefore, no lubricating maintenance is required. • Sound and Vibration - Inspect for abnormal sound and vibration. • Rotation - Inspect for clockwise rotation and rotating speed. • Insulation - Inspect for electrical insulation resistance. (b) Heat Exchanger • Clogging - Inspect and remove any accumulated dirt or dust from the heat exchanger at regular intervals. As for outdoor unit, other obstacles such as growing grass and pieces of paper, which might restrict air flow, should also be removed. (c) Piping Connection • Leakage - Inspect for refrigerant leakage at piping connections. (d) Cabinet • Stain and Lubrication- Inspect and remove any stain or lubrication. • Fixing Screw - Inspect and fix loosened or lost screws. • Insulation - Inspect and repair peeled thermal insulation material on cabinet. (e) Electrical Equipment • Activation - Inspect for abnormal activation of the magnetic contractor, auxiliary relay, PCB and etc. • Line Condition - Pay attention to working voltage, amperage and phase balance. Inspect for faulty contact caused by loosened terminal connections, oxidized contacts, foreign matter, and other items. Inspect for electrical insulation resistance. (f) Control and Protective Devices • Setting - Do not readjust the setting in the field unless the setting is maintained at a point other than the point listed in “9. Safety and Control Device Setting”. (2) For Indoor Unit (a) Air Filter • Cleaning - Inspect and remove any accumulated dirt or dust according to “1.2 Filter Cleaning”. (b) Drain Pan, Drain-Up Mechanism and Drain Pipe • Drain Line - Inspect and clean the condensate drain line least twice a year. • Drain-Up Mechanism - Inspect for activation of drain-up mechanism. (c) Float Switch • Activation - Inspect for activation of float switch. (3) For Outdoor Unit (a) Compressor • Sound and Vibration - Inspect for abnormal sound and vibration. • Activation - Inspect for that the voltage drop of power supply line is within 16% at start and within 2% during operation. (b) Reverse Valve • Activation - Inspect for any abnormal activation sound. (c) Strainer • Clogging - Inspect for that no temperature difference between both ends. (d) Earth Wire • Earth Wire - Inspect for continuity to the earth. (e) Oil Heater • Activation - The oil heater should be activated at least 12 hours before start-up, by switching ON the main power source. (4) For Remote Control Switch • Switch and Indication - Inspect for activation of switch. 261

1.2

Filter Cleaning

Do not operate the system without the air filter to protect the indoor unit heat exchanger against being clogged. Turn OFF the main power switch before taking out the filter. (The previous operation mode may appear.) 1.2.1 Take Out the Filter (1) 4-Way Cassette Type The indication, “FILTER” is shown on the display of the remote control switch after approximately 1,200 hour operation. Take out the air filter according to the following steps. Step 1 Open the air intake grille after pushing the two knobs toward the arrow mark as shown in the figure below.

(2) 2-Way Cassette Type The indication, “FILTER” is shown on the display of the remote control switch after approximately 1,200 hour operation. Take out the air filter according to the following steps. Step 1 Open the air intake grille after pushing the two hinges toward the arrow mark as shown in the figure below. Step 2 Take out the air filter from the air intake grille by supporting the air grille and lifting the air filter after detaching the filter from two hinges. Upper Part of Filter Hinges

Air Intake Grille Long Life Filter

Hinges Lower Part of Filter

Knob

30o to 45o Air Intake Grille

Air Intake Grille

Step 2 Take out the air filter from the air intake grille by supporting the air grille and lifting the air filter after detaching the filter from two hinges.

(3) Wall Type The indication, “FILTER” is shown on the display of the remote control switch after approximately 200 hour operation. Take out the air filter according to the following steps. RPK-0.8 to 1.5FSNSM1 Step 1 Pull up the air intake grille after pushing two “PUSH” mark of right and left side on the grille.

Upper Part of Filter Hook

Air Intake Grille Long Life Filter

Chain

Hook Lower Part of Filter

262

Step 2 Pull down the air filter after lifting and remove it from the hinge.

RPK-2.0FSNSM Step 1 Pull up the air intake grille after pushing two “PUSH” mark of right and left side on the grille.

(4) Floor Type The indication, “FILTER” is shown on the display of the remote control switch after approximately 1,200 hour operation. Take out the air filter according to the following steps. Step 1 Loosen the fixing screws for the air intake grille and slide it horizontally. Slide the two knobs and open the air intake grille. Then, take out the air intake grilles as shown below.

Step 2 Pull down the air filter after lifting and remove it from the hinge.

Knob

Step 2 Hold the tag of the air filter and pull it, to take out the air filter. RPK-2.5 to 4.0FSNSM Step 1 Pull up the air intake grille after pushing two “PUSH” mark of right and left side on the grille.

Air Intake Grille

Step 2 Pull down the air filter after lifting and remove it from the hinge.

Air Filter

263

(5) Floor Concealed Type The indication, “FILTER” is shown on the display of the remote control switch after approximately 1,200 hour operation. Take out the air filter according to the following steps. Step 1 Make a condition to see the front side of the unit. The air filter is located at the air inlet in the bottom part of the unit. Step 2 Pull the tag of the air filter downwards. And take out the air filter as shown below.

1.2.2 Clean the Filter Clean the air filter according to the following steps. Step 1 use a vacuum cleaner or let water flow onto the air filter for removing the dirt from the air filter.

Do not use hot water higher than approximately 40oC. Step 2 Dry the air filter in the shade after shaking off moisture. 1.2.3 Reset of Filter Indication After cleaning the air filter, press the “RESET” button. The FILTER indication will disappear and the next filter cleaning time is will be set.

Air Filter

1.3

(6) Ceiling Type The indication, “FILTER” is shown on the display of the remote control switch after approximately 100 hour operation. Take out the air filter according to the following steps. Step 1 Side the knobs. Step 2 Open the air intake grille. Take out the air filter from the air intake grille.

Filter and Element Cleaning for Total Heat Exchanger

Do not operate the system without the air filter to protect the element of the total heat exchanger against being clogged. Turn OFF the main power switch before taking out the filter. (The previous operation mode may appear.) 1.3.1 Air Filter Cleaning Step 1 Remove the fixing screws, pull back the hinges, open the service cover and remove the cover from the catches. Hinge

Maintenance Cover

Air Filter

Air Intake Grille Knob

Push up the filter. Hook

Catch

264

Step 2 Draw out the air filters which air located at the bottom left and right of total heat exchanger elements. Air Filters

1.3.2 Element Cleaning Step 1 Open the service cover and take out the filters. Step 2 Take hold of the handle and draw the total heat exchange elements (two elements) out from the main unit. Total Heat Exchange Element Handle

Step 3 Use a vacuum cleaner to suck up the dust. To remove stubborn dirt, dissolve some neutral detergent in cold or lukewarm water, wash the filters by pressing on them in the water, take them out and leave them to dry. Vacuum Cleaner Air Filter

Step 3 Use a vacuum cleaner to suck up the dust and dirt on the exposed surfaces of the total heat exchange elements. Attach a nozzle with a brush to the vacuum cleaner for this job, and clean the elements by passing the brush lightly over their exposed surfaces.

Total Heat Exchanger Element

Never wash the filters in very hot water and never wash them by rubbing them. Do not dry the filters by exposing them to a flame. Step 4 Set the filter. Step 5 Close the service cover. Step 6 Press the â&#x20AC;&#x153;RESETâ&#x20AC;? switch of the remote control switch.

Corner

Vacuum Cleaner (with Brush Attachment)

Do not wash the element by water. Do not use the hard nozzle of the vacuum cleaner. It may damage the exposed surfaces of the Lossnay elements. Under no circumstances should the total heat exchange elements be washed in water. Step 4 Set the elements. Step 5 Set the air filters. Step 6 Close the service cover.

265

Troubleshooting

2.1

Initial Troubleshooting

2.1.1 This Is Not Abnormal (1) Smells from Indoor Unit Smell adheres on indoor unit after a long period of time. Clean the air filter and panels or allow a good ventilation. (2) Sound from Deforming Parts During system starting or stopping, an abrading sound might be heard. However, this is due to thermal deformation of plastic parts. It is not abnormal. (3) Steam from Outdoor Heat Exchanger During defrosting operation, ice on the outdoor heat exchanger is melted, resulting in making steam. (4) Dew on Air Panel When the cooling operation continues for a long period of time under high humidity conditions (higher than 27oC DB/80% R.H), dew can form on the air panel. (5) Refrigerant Flow Sound While the system is being started or stopped, sound from the refrigerant flow may be heard. 2.1.2 Not Cooling or Heating Well • Check for obstruction of air flow of the outside or inside units. • Check if too much heat source exists in the room. • Check if the air filter is clogged with dust. • Check to see if the doors or windows are opened or not. • Check if the temperature condition is not within the operation range. 2.1.3 Not Operated • Check for electrical wiring. • Check for dip switch setting. • Check whether the “SET TEMP” is set at the correct temperature. • In the case that “RUN” lamp on remote control switch is flickering every 2 seconds, check for connection of remote control line. • n the case that “RUN” lamp flashes 5 times (5 seconds) with unit number and alarm code displayed, refer to the next item “2.2 Troubleshooting by Alarm Code” and the “Service Manual”. • In the case that no alarm code is indicated and normal operation is not available, refer to the “Service Manual” because abnormality of some device is suspected.

2.2

Troubleshooting by Alarm Code

The Alarm Codes shown below are indicated when a fault occurs during operation. CAUTION Before servicing electric parts, cut off power supply completely. Indication

Trouble

RUN lamp flashes for 2 seconds.

Possible Causes

Failure in Transmission between Indoor Unit and Remote Control Switch

Remote Control Cable Broken Contact Failure in Remote Control Cable IC or Microcomputer Defective

RUN lamp flashes Failure 5 times (5 seconds) with unit number and alarm code displayed.

TEMP

RUN/STOP

MODE FAN SPEED

VENT

ON/OFF TIMER

LOUVER TIME

266

RESET

CHECK

Action Locate the cause and repair. Check by remote control self-checking function. (See Service Manual.)

Indication of Unit Number in Remote Control Switch Unit No.0

Unit No.1

Unit No.2

Unit No.3

Unit No.4

Unit No.5

Unit No.6

Unit No.7

Unit No.3

Unit No.8

Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit No.9 No.10 No.11 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15

Alarm Code of "Outdoor Unit Protection Activated"

NOTE: Alarm code is also indicated on 7-segment display on outdoor unit PCB1, if a trouble occurs.

â&#x20AC;˘ Alarm Codes Code No. 01

Indoor Unit

Tripping of Protection Device

Outdoor Unit

Tripping of Protection Device

Transmission

Inverter

Abnormality between Indoor and Outdoor (or Indoor) Inverter Trip of Outdoor Unit

05 06

Transmission Voltage Drop